Acl9000 PDF

ACL 9000 Service Manual
P/N 00079990-00 Revision 0 October 2000
Instrumentation Laboratory S.P.A Viale Monza 338 20128 Milano (Italia)

Foreword
This Service Manual contains the information necessary to service, maintain and
troubleshoot the Instrumentation Laboratory ACL 9000 system.
This Service Manual is strictly intended for IL field engineers, or service engineers
from organisations duly recognised and authorised by Instrumentation Laboratory,
who have been previously trained on how to use, maintain and troubleshoot the IL
ACL 9000 model.
The Service Engineer should be kept handy this Manual for reference when perform a
service action in field.
For detailed information on Operators interface and other user related topics,
reference to specific ACL 9000 Operators Manual.
The ACL 9000 system is compatible with the diverse requirements for supply voltage
and frequency encountered throughout the world.
The ACL 9000 system is conforms to the directives and standards of the Community
European 89/336/EEC + 92/31EEC + 93/68EEC and certified by CE marking. This
system is approved to CE standards EN55011:1991 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A;
EN50082-1:1997 and EN61010-1993 + A2:1995 (IEC 1010-1).
The ACL 9000 system is also conforms to the directives and standards of the CSA and
certified by CSA marking. This system is approved to CSA standards with licence
number LR24215 and produced under CSA certification number 161648/1121145.
All instruments bear the CE and CSA monograms.
The mechanical components (screws, nuts, washer, etc.) are metric.
The reproduction or copying of this manual without the explicit written authorisation
of Instrumentation Laboratory is prohibited.
Instrumentation Laboratory
Table of Contents
Foreword
Table of Contents
1 General Information 1.1
1.1 Product Use 1.2

1.2 Measured Parameters 1.2
1.3 Presentation of Results 1.3
1.4 Instrument Description and Operation 1.4
1.4.1 Main Hardware Components 1.5
1.4.2 Sample Tray 1.6
1.4.3 Reagent Area 1.8
1.4.4 Rinse/Waste Area 1.10
1.4.5 Rotor Loading and Analysis Area 1.10
1.4.6 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) 1.16
1.4.7 Keyboard 1.17
1.4.8 Interface Connectors 1.18
1.4.9 Internal Cooling System 1.19
1.4.10 On-board Barcode Reader 1.19
1.4.11 External Barcode Scanner 1.20
1.4.12 External printer 1.21
1.4.13 Floppy Disk Drive 1.21
1.5 Additional Features 1.22
1.5.1 Standby Status 1.22
1.5.2 End of the Cycle 1.22
1.5.3 Power Loss 1.22
1.5.4 Setup and Utility Programs 1.22
1.5.5 Fault Detection 1.22
1.6 Procedural Limitations 1.23
2 Operator Interface Description 2.1
2.1 Screen Areas and Main Commands Description 2.1

2.2 Available Input Devices 2.8
2.3 Instrument Status 2.10
2.4 Password 2.12
2.5 Analysis and Service Programs Menu Description 2.12
Instrumentation Laboratory I
Table of Contents
3 General Description 3.1
3.1 Main Fluidic System Description 3.2

3.2 Main Optic System Description 3.5
3.2.1 Coagulimetric Optic Channel 3.6
3.2.2 Chromogenic Optic Channel 3.8
3.3 Electronic Description 3.10
3.3.1 Interconnection Schematic 3.10
3.3.2 Quick Reference Board Function Table 3.11
3.3.3 Quick Reference Board Function Diagram 3.13
3.3.4 CPU Master Board #1 & PC104 Board 3.14
3.3.5 Slave Board #2 3.18
3.3.6 Acquisition & Sensors Board #3 3.22
3.3.7 Rotor Exchange Module Board #4 3.28
3.3.8 Motors Board #5 3.33
3.3.9 Photometric & Temperatures Control Board #6 3.37
3.3.10 Switching Power Supply Board 3.41
3.3.11 Instrument Ground Circuit 3.43
3.4 Main Hardware Components Description 3.44
3.5 Software Description 3.45
3.6 Heating and Cooling Systems Description 3.46
4 Parts Replacement 4.1
4.1 Parts Replacement 4.1

4.1.1 Autosampler Assy Replacement 4.2
4.1.2 Peltier 1 Assy Replacement 4.4
4.1.3 Sample Arm Assy Replacement 4.5
4.1.4 Rotor Holder Movement Assy Replacement 4.9
4.1.5 Rotor Exchange Module Replacement 4.11
4.1.6 Rotor Holder Cover Assy Replacement 4.20
4.1.7 Halogen Lamp Assy Replacement 4.24
4.1.8 Dilutors Replacement 4.26
4.1.9 Display Replacement 4.27
4.1.10 Hard Disk Drive Replacement 4.28
4.2 Instrument Covers Removing 4.30
4.3 Instrument Boards Replacement 4.31
II Instrumentation Laboratory
5 Installation & Maintenance 5.1
5.1 Installation 5.2

5.1.1 Site Requirements 5.2
5.1.2 Unpacking and Inspection 5.5
5.1.3 Mounting Instrument Parts 5.7
5.1.4 First Turn On Cycle 5.11
5.1.5 Instrument Set-up 5.14
5.1.6 Performance Tests 5.14
5.1.7 ACL 9000 Functionality Check List 5.15
5.2 Maintenance 5.16
5.2.1 Daily Maintenance 5.17
5.2.2 Weekly Maintenance 5.18
5.2.3 Bi-Weekly Maintenance 5.19
5.2.4 Monthly Maintenance 5.20
5.2.5 Yearly Maintenance 5.21
5.2.6 As needed Maintenance 5.21
5.2.7 Maintenance schedule 5.24
5.3 Shut down & Shipment Precautions 5.25
5.3.1 Long Term Shut Down 5.25
5.3.2 Shipment 5.25
6 Troubleshooting 6.1
6.1 Error Messages & Troubleshooting 6.1

6.1.1 System Errors 6.2
6.1.2 Temperature Errors 6.6
6.1.3 Mechanical Errors 6.10
6.1.4 R.E.M. Errors 6.14
6.1.5 Optic Errors 6.16
6.1.6 Acquisition Errors 6.17
6.1.7 Liquid Sensors Errors 6.19
6.1.8 Operative Errors 6.22
6.1.9 Database Errors 6.23
6.1.10 Sample Identification Errors 6.24
6.1.11 DMS Errors 6.24
6.1.12 Analytical Errors 6.26
6.2 Service Tools 6.41
6.3 Standard Tools 6.53
Instrumentation Laboratory III

Table of Contents
7 Check Out & Adjustment 7.1
7.1 Quick Reference Guide to Electronic Adjustment 7.2

7.2 Coagulimetric Channel 7.4
7.3 Chromogenic Channel 7.14
7.4 Liquid Sensor 7.23
7.4.1 Needles Sensors Test 7.23
7.4.2 Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume Test 7.24
7.5 Optic Sensor 7.27
7.5.1 Rotor Stack 7.28
7.5.2 Rotor Waste Container 7.31
7.5.3 Autosampler Housing 7.32
7.6 Motors Adjust 7.38
7.6.1 Rotor Motor 7.41
7.6.2 Rotor Holder Cover Motor 7.42
7.6.3 Sample Arm Horizontal Motor 7.44
7.6.4 Sample Arm Vertical Motor 7.45
7.6.5 Autosampler Motor 7.46
7.6.6 Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motors 7.48
7.6.7 Transport Motor 7.49
7.6.8 Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor 7.50
7.6.9 Rotor Arm Vertical Motor 7.51
7.7 Modules Positioning 7.52
7.7.1 Sample Arm Assy 7.53
7.7.2 Autosampler Assy 7.55
7.7.3 Rotor Holder Assy 7.57
7.7.4 Needles Block Assy 7.58
7.7.5 Rotor Transport Assy 7.61
7.7.6 Rotor Arm Assy 7.61
7.7.7 R.E.M. Centring 7.63
7.7.8 Rotor Arm Tilt Adjustment 7.65
7.7.9 R.E.M. Selftest 7.66
7.8 Dilutors Module 7.67
7.8.1 Dilutors Test 7.67
7.8.2 Volume Test 7.70
7.9 Magnetic Sensor 7.73
7.9.1 Rotor Cover Sensor 7.73
7.9.2 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor 7.74
7.10 Rotor Waste Presence Switch 7.75
7.11 Switching Power Supply Check Out & Adjustment 7.76
7.12 Touch Screen Calibration 7.77
7.13 Interface Test 7.78
7.14 Temperature Control 7.84
7.15 Floppy Disk Drive Test 7.85
IV Instrumentation Laboratory
7.16 Software Checking & Loading 7.87

7.16.1 Software Identification 7.87
7.16.2 Software Upload & Upgrade 7.88
7.16.3 Databases Check 7.91
7.16.4 Backup / Restore of the System Configuration 7.92
7.16.5 Upgrade IL Library 7.93
8 System Interfacing 8.1
8.1 Keyboard 8.2

8.2 External Parallel Printer 8.3
8.3 Network 8.4
8.4 Modem 8.4
8.5 Mouse 8.4
8.6 Host Computer 8.4
8.7 External Bar Code Reader 8.6
9 Parts List 9.1
9.1 Start Up Kit 9.2

9.2 Expendable 9.4
9.3 Service Parts List 9.5
10 Drawings 10.1
11 Service Notes 11.1
12 Appendix 12.1
A Host Communication Protocol 12.1 A

B Barcodes Label specifications 12.1 B
Instrumentation Laboratory V
1 General Information
This section of the Manual contains general information about the ACL 9000 system,
including its use, measured parameters, presentation of results, hardware description
and operation, additional features and procedural limitations.
Description and use of the ACL 9000 Operators Interface is addressed at separate
section of this Manual. Following are the specific sections.
1.1 Product Use

1.2 Measured Parameters
1.3 Presentation of Results
1.4 Instrument Description and Operation
1.5 Additional Features
1.6 Procedural Limitations
Instrumentation Laboratory 1.1

General Information
1.1 Product Use

The IL ACL 9000 system is a fully automated, high productivity analyser designed
specifically for clinical use in the hemostasis laboratory, for coagulation and/or
fibrinolysis testing.
The system provides results for both direct hemostasis measurements and calculated
parameters.
1.2 Measured Parameters

The ACL 9000 system is used to perform the following tests:
Coagulometric Tests
PT-FIB (Prothrombin Time and PT-Based Fibrinogen concentration)

APTT (Activated Partial Thromboplastin Time)
TT (Thrombin Time)
Single Factors (VII, X, V, II, XII, XI, IX, VIII)
Absorbance Tests
Antithrombin
Heparin Xa
Protein C
Plasmin Inhibitor (alpha-2-antiplasmin)
Plasminogen
Fibrinogen-C (Clauss method)
Immunological Tests
D-Dimer
von Willebrand Factor (*)
Special Tests
ProClot (clotting Protein C)

Protein S
APCR-V
Pro-IL-Complex **
Hepatocomplex **
Note: An (*) indicates that the test is not currently available for the ACL 9000.
An (**) indicates that the test is not available in the United States.
1.2 Instrumentation Laboratory

Profiles
The user may program Profiles on patient samples to be performed on a random access
basis. Refer to the Operators Manual for additional information on this subject.
Tests Groups
Some tests can be run together as a group, thus saving time when the number of
samples to be analysed is relatively small. Following are some examples:
PT-FIB/APTT
PT-FIB/APTT/TT
Double Tests
The ACL 9000 offers the user the capability to set up double tests. Refer to the
Operators Manual for additional information on this subject.
1.3 Presentation of Results

The ACL 9000 offers the following choices to display and print results of testing:
s (seconds)
R (Ratio)
NR (Normalised Ratio)
INR (International Normalised Ratio)
% (Percent activity)
U/mL (units/mL)
mg/dL (for example for Fibrinogen)
g/L (for example for Fibrinogen)
ng/mL (for example for D-Dimer)
microg/L (for example for D-Dimer)
micromol/L
IU/mL (International Unit)
User configurable unit

General Information
1.4 Instrument Description and Operation

The ACL is a family of fully automated computer-controlled, microcentrifugal
analysers.
The ACL 9000 system incorporates a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) unit that displays
the status of the instrument, permits the user to select desired procedures and, through
the use of menus and options, guides the operator through these procedures.
Information and instructions are entered into the system either via a Touch Screen
device or through a standard PC keyboard or through a mouse.
When sample testing is initiated, the samples and reagents are sequentially pipetted into
a 20-cuvette polystyrene rotor (loading process). Sample and reagents are then mixed
by centrifugation process. The mixing is carried out by a combination of rapid
acceleration and braking actions that are effective in thoroughly mixing the liquids.
Reaction measurements (data acquisition) via the photometer are made while the rotor
is spinning.
The ACL measures the parameters at 37 oC 1 oC (98.6 oF 1.8 oF), at an ambient

temperature from 15 oC to 32 oC (59 oF to 89 oF). However, if the ACL is in a
temperature controlled environment where the ambient temperature is held constant,
the measurements are made within a narrower temperature range: 37 oC 0.25 oC.
The results are displayed on the VDU and optionally printed by the external printer,
and/or sent to a host computer. The ACL performs automatic calibration, offers a
series of utility programs for the operator and manages a complete quality control
program.

1.4.1 Main hardware components
The ACL 9000 analyser includes several hardware components and modules, which
interact with each other to carry out the analytical process.
This section contains descriptions of those components and their functions as well as
the operations that take place during the analytical process.
The figure below highlights some of the main components of the ACL 9000, as viewed
from the front of the system.
1 Wash-R Emulsion 8 Rotor Stack Area

2 Dilutors 9 Rotor Holder Cover
3 Sample Tray 10 Rotor Transport & Rotor Arm
4 Reagent Area 11 Rotor Waste Area
5 Sampling Arm 12 Keyboard
6 Floppy Disk Drive 13 Adapters Area
7 LCD 14 Liquid Waste Outlet

General Information
More information about the other system present on the instrument is given in the
section 3 General Description.
Following are the specific sub-section with the item descriptions.
1.4.2 Sample Tray

1.4.3 Reagent Area
1.4.4 Rinse/Waste Area
1.4.5 Rotor loading and Analysis Area
1.4.6 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
1.4.7 Keyboard
1.4.8 Interface Connectors
1.4.9 Internal Cooling System
1.4.10 On-board Barcode Reader
1.4.11 External Barcode Scanner
1.4.12 External printer
1.4.13 Floppy disk drive
1.4.2 Sample Tray
The ACL Autosampler system includes a rotating sample tray that contains:
40 x 14.2 mm diameter positions for cups and primary tubes and
10 x 23 mm diameter positions to hold accessory materials such as calibrators,
diluents, reagents vials, etc.).

Optical sensors located around the tray verify that the tray is correctly positioned, and
also detect the presence of cups, tubes and vials.
Three different sample trays can be used with the ACL system each one appropriate for
different size of primary tubes: 3 mL, 5 mL and S11.5; all of them can be used for 0.5,
2 or 4 mL cups.
3 mL Primary tube, 3 or 3.5 mL total volume (13x75 mm)

5 mL Primary tube, 5 mL total volume (13x75 mm and/or 13x100 mL)
S 11.5 Sarstedt type primary tube, 3 mL volume (11.5x66 mm) and/or
5 mL volume (11.5x92 mm)
Note: The dimensions and volumes mentioned above are all nominal values.

General Information
Additional Reagents positions
The ten internal positions of the sample tray - A1 to A10 - are used for placing
materials such as calibrators, QC materials, diluents or reagents in a
choice of containers such as 23 mm vials (10 mL filling volume), 18 mm vials (4 mL
filling volume) or cups. Adapters are needed for the 4 mL vials and cups as seen in the
picture below.
Normally, position A1 is usually reserved for a cup containing calibration plasma

(normal pool) and position A10 is reserved for a cup containing IL Factor Diluent, for
use in the calibration procedure.
1.4.3 Reagent Area
The reagent area consists of 8 reservoirs labelled R1 to R8 designed to hold reagent

containers. An area alongside the vial holes is designed to hold the vial caps while the
vials are in use.
Positions R1 to R4 are cooled by a Peltier-effect temperature regulator and are
equipped with stirring mechanism.
Positions R5 to R8 are used for reagents at room temperature; these positions do not
have stirring mechanism.
The reagents in positions R1 to R6 are aspirated with the internal needle while the
reagents placed in positions R7 and R8 are aspirated with the external needle.

All eight reagent positions can hold 28 mm vials (16 mL filling volume). Smaller
diameter vials require the use of colour coded adapters.
Grey: for 10 mL vials

requiring magnetic stirrer
Light Blue: for 10 mL vials

not requiring magnetic stirrer
Dark Blue: for 4 mL vials

not requiring magnetic stirrer

General Information
1.4.4 Rinse/Waste Area
The rinse / waste system of the ACL consists of a removable Rinse / Waste Reservoir
positioned between reagent positions R4 and R5. A plastic tube is connected to the
reservoir that drains the waste from the reservoir to a waste container outside the
analyser (left hand side) where the waste is collected.
The Rinse / Waste Reservoir which is always filled with Wash-R emulsion, is used as a
washing basin for the dispensing needles in-between cycles; the liquid waste is then
drained and collected in the waste container on the outside of the analyser for proper
disposal.
1.4.5 Rotor loading and Analysis Area
The area of the analyser where the reaction cuvettes are loaded and the analysis takes
place is located under the rotor holder cover in the center of the instrument, on the
right side of the reagent area. This area includes:
The reaction cuvettes (rotors) storage system and mechanisms involved in the
transport of these rotors.
The plate where the rotor is placed during loading and analysis (Rotor Holder).
The hardware components responsible for ensuring proper mixing of reagents
samples in the cuvettes.
The optical system used to make the analytical measurements.

Rotor (reaction cuvettes)
The disposable reaction cuvettes, precision made of UV-transparent acrylic, are

radially arranged in groups of 20. The 20-cuvette unit is called a rotor.
Each wedge-shaped cuvette contains two compartments, a small one near the center to
hold the sample and/or reagent and a larger one that holds reagents only. A partial dam
between both compartments maintains their contents separate during the loading
process; as centrifugal action starts, the sample/reagent in the inside compartment
flows over the dam to mix with the contents in the large compartment. The reaction
and analysis take place within the large, outside compartment, while the rotor is
spinning.

General Information
Rotor Exchange Module (R.E.M.)
The Rotor Stack, the Rotor Transport and the Rotor Arm compose this assembly.
Rotor stack
Before their use, rotors are stored in the rotor stack that holds up to 12 rotors (240
cuvettes). The rotor stack compartment, which may be accessed from the top of the
analyser on the right side, can be filled at any time (continuous rotor loading) either
manually (one rotor at a time) or using a special rotor refill tool (up to 10 rotors at a
time).
The rotor stack area is thermostatically controlled in order to keep the rotors in a
temperature range between 36 and 39 oC; the rotor stack is insulated to help thermal-
regulation.

Rotor Transport
Below the rotor stack, a rotor transport mechanism moves the bottom rotor out to
make it available to the rotor arm mechanism.
Rotor Arm
The robotic arm takes the rotor and inserts it into the rotor holder. This is the area
where the rotor will remain during the loading and analysis process. Once analysis is
completed, if the rotor is fully utilised (or if requested by the user), the rotor arm takes
the rotor and discards it into the rotor waste container.

General Information
Rotor Holder and Rotor Loading
The Rotor Holder is an aluminium disk that holds the rotor in place during loading and
analysis. The rotor holder is thermostatically controlled to a temperature of 38.5 0.5
o
C to insure 37 oC inside the cuvette.
The loading of samples and reagents into the reaction cuvettes involves the action of
the sampling / dispensing arm and needles. When starting with a new rotor, cuvette 20
is generally filled with a normal pool of calibration plasma. Cuvette 19 is usually filled
with the Wash-Reference Emulsion aspirated from the one-litre bottle housed against
the back wall of the analyser. The remaining 18 rotor cuvettes (1-18) are filled with
samples and reagents as required by the programmed request.

Rotor Waste Area
The used rotors are dropped inside the Rotor Waste Container. This container is
accessed from a door in the right front area of the analyser for removal and disposal of
the used rotors, as seen in the figure below.

General Information
1.4.6 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
This module consists of a Liquid Crystal Display, 12-inch active matrix (LCD), which
is fitted with a Touch Screen function, allowing all operations to be carried out using
the LCD.
The LCD guides the operator during the analytical process and displays calibrator data
and patient results. It is also used to display calibration curves, and to perform several
utility programs that are easily accessible through this input device.
The LCD screen system reproduces 256 colours, and shows numeric and alphanumeric
characters. The interaction with the operator is also made user friendly by the
availability of graphics and icons. The screen is divided in three areas:
The upper section displays Status area and main menu.

The central section displays Working area.
The lower section displays Toolbar area.

1.4.7 Keyboard
The ACL 9000 has a standard computer keyboard with mechanical keys that allow the
user to access the various operating modes of the instrument.
Although the instrument is equipped with and supports the English keyboard layout,
the ACL software itself also supports the layout for the following languages: German,
French, Spanish, Italian and Unite States.

General Information
1.4.8 Interface Connectors
External Barcode Reader Interface (port 1)
The ACL 9000 includes an interface for an external barcode scanner that allows
additional reading. The external barcode scanner is an optional feature of the system.
RS-232 C Interface for Host (port 2)
The ACL 9000 contains an RS-232C interface (DTE Standard) for the output of data
to a central computer (Host) or a personal computer. Communication to a host
computer is via ASTM protocol.
RS-232 C Interface for an optional mouse (port 3)
Modem (port 4) not supported in this software release
Ethernet (port 5) not supported in this software release
External Printer Output (port 6)
The ACL 9000 has an output for an optional external printer. Two emulation protocols
are available for printers: ESC/P2 (Epson like printers) and HP-PCL (for HP like Laser
Printers).
Standard PC keyboard (port 7)

1.4.9 Internal Cooling System
The cooling of the system is insured by the presence of fans mounted on the internals
right and left sides of the analyser. An air filter prevents dust from entering the system.
A two-level alarm warns the user when the internal temperature of the instrument rises
above damaging levels. The first level alerts the operator of the temperature rise and
displays a warning. The second level switches off the instrument.
1.4.10 On-board Barcode Reader
The on-board barcode reader, a standard feature of the ACL 9000, is located in the
sampling area as indicated in the figure below. A small window indicates its position.
Following are the numerical and alphanumerical readable codes.
Codabar
Code 39
Code 128
Interleave 2 of 5
When using barcoded sample tubes, it is important to position them in the sample tray
such that the labels are facing towards the outside of the sample tray. This will allow a
correct reading of the labels by the on-board barcode reader.

General Information
1.4.11 External Barcode Scanner (optional)
The external barcode scanner is an optional feature of the ACL 9000. This barcode
scanner is able to read numerical and alphanumerical labels. The maximum barcode
label length readable is 6 cm with a resolution of 0.2 mm.
Following are the numerical and alphanumerical readable codes.
Code 39
Code 128
Code 93
Codabar
Interleave 2 of 5
MSI/PLESSEY
The scanner is provided with an On/Off trigger. The scanner has a timeout of 10
seconds. If no reading is done in this period the scanner is switched off.

1.4.12 External Printer (optional)
An external 80-column printer can be interfaced to the ACL 9000.

Two emulation protocols can be used: ESC P2 or HP-PCL.
The ESC P2 is a typical Epson like protocol while the HP-PCL is a typical Hewlett
Packard like protocol for Laser printers.
1.4.13 Floppy Disk Drive
A floppy disk drive is mounted in the upper right part of the ACL 9000. This device is
used for some of the utility programs.
The floppy disk is accessible from the little cover pushing both sides of it to open.
After that the Floppy Disk Drive is available insert the diskette when needed.

General Information
1.5 Additional Features

This section provides information on any additional features improved in the ACL
9000.
1.5.1 Standby Status
If the ACL 9000 is left ON for a period longer than 30 minutes without any operator
action, the system moves into the Standby status. The LCD screen displays Standby
Status. Pressing the Touch Screen reactivates the display and allows the system to
resume normal operation.
When the system enters the Standby status, all motors are deactivated to reduce power
consumption and the LED source is switched off. While the instrument is in the
Standby status, an automatic priming cycle is performed every 30 minutes.
1.5.2 End of the Cycle
At the end of each analytical cycle, a beep signal notifies the operator that the cycle has
been completed.
1.5.3 Power loss
The ACL contains a Hard Disk Drive to store the database in the event of a power
interruption. The instrument performs an automatic save of the database to retain the
data every entry in standby or when exiting from the main program for the power off.
The instrument has an internal clock that keeps track of the date and time.
1.5.4 Setup and Utility Programs
The instrument incorporates several utility programs that allow certain functions to be
changed or set according to the users needs. These programs also help in
troubleshooting.
For additional information, refer to section 2 Operator Interface description of this
Manual.
1.5.5 Fault Detection
The system automatically monitors faults to ensure accuracy of sample data and proper
system performance. Fault monitoring includes display of alarms and warnings.
For additional information, refer to the section 6 Troubleshooting of this Manual.

1.6 Procedural Limitations

The operating range of the ACL 9000 is 15 to 32 oC ( 59 to 89 oF) and at up to 85%
Relative Humidity (not condensing).
No safety hazards occur in the temperature range 5 - 40 oC (41 to 104 oF) and
functional performance characteristics are resumed when the instrument re-enters the
range of 15 to 32 oC ( 59 to 89 oF).

2 Operator Interface Description
This section is designed to familiarise the service engineer with the Operator Interface
(OI) items used during the process of requesting and performing analytical and service
operations, such as the data input devices, elements within menus, buttons and icons.
Following are the specific sections.
2.1 Screen areas and main commands description.

2.2 Available input devices.
2.3 Instrument status.
2.4 Passwords.
2.5 Analysis and Service program menu description.
2.1 Screen areas and main commands description.

In this section are provided information about the Operator Interface displayed on
screen.
The basic interaction with the ACL is done through menus which allow access to sets
of related functions (analysis, calibration, QC, set-up, diagnostics, etc.) and through
the use of windows, dialogue or message boxes to input or retrieve information.
The screen is divided in the following 3 main areas.
2.1.1 Status area and main menu.

2.1.2 Working area.
2.1.3 Toolbar area.
Note: On the screen, any disabled object (menu, check-box, and button) is displayed
dimmed and it cannot be selected.
2.1.1 Status area and main menu
This is the upper part of the screen that contains the following items.
IL Logo
Indication of current instrument status (see section 2.3)
Date and Time
Windows like Menu bar (see section 2.5)

Operator Interface Description
2.1.2 Working area
This is the central area of the screen, which display windows containing data,
commands or messages.
Within the ACL 9000 screens these item are grouped or contained in three different
types of defined windows that are following.
Standard window
In the analysis menu usually this is a larger area that contains sets of related data,
which can be edited by the user by means of command buttons.
In the service menu or in any common menu usually this is an area that contains
configuration and setting options with command buttons.
Dialogue box
This is a small area used to prompt the user to choose one of several options (OK,
Abort, Retry, Ignore, Cancel, Yes, No)
Message box
This is an area used only to provide information
Command buttons allow the user to select options, cause actions and get from one part
of the software to another.
The buttons are positioned in different areas depending on the screen.
Some are identified with text that is self-explanatory of the action.

Some are shown with an icon inside that illustrates an action as defined in the
following table.
Command Command / Action

Buttons Icons
Confirm
Cancel
(Dimmed if Edit action not allowed)
Print
Host
Delete
Add
Add an item to the list.
Remove
Remove an item from the list.
Transfer
Transfer an item from one list to another.
Details

Information
Provide information in different languages.
New Sample
Extract Sample Data
Note
Patient Name
Patient Details
Save
Save information to floppy disk.
Inside the standard windows may be present Check boxes which allow the user to
mark an item. If a check box or button is in mutual exclusion with another check box
or button, there is a frame wrapping the two, along with graphic information.

In the dialogue and in the message boxes are present any icons.
Following is the table with all possible icons and their corresponding meanings.
Icon Meaning
ERROR
To call attention to high priority failures and fault messages.
WARNING !
To deliver different kinds of messages. For example to warn
the user of a not allowed/wrong operation, or of
problems/errors detected by the instrument during or after
an operation.
QUESTION
To request confirmation by the user before starting an
operation or before cancelling an action
INFORMATION
To offer general information. In some boxes, but not always,
the message is followed by a request for confirmation.

2.1.3 Toolbar area
This is the bottom part of the screen, which contains a series of command buttons for
immediate and easy access to particular functions.
The status of the buttons (Active or Dimmed) is dependent on the instrument status,
but independent from the type of information displayed in the working area.
The buttons are shown with an icon inside that illustrates an action as defined in the
following table.
Toolbar Command Command / Action

Buttons Icons
Short Turn Around Time (STAT)

Urgent sample Pressing this button opens a window that guides
the operator. Confirmation is required.
Instrument Status
Informs the operator about the status of the operation in
progress.
Close/Open Cover
This operation is disabled if there is a possible interference with
the instrument operation.
STOP
Confirmation is required.
Resume
Starts the operations paused due to a STAT request.
Data Base View

The system goes back to the database view or Main screen.
Host Status
This icon appears only during communication with the Host to
inform the operator about the status of this action.

Printer Status
This icon appears only during printing to inform the operator
about the status of this action.
Warning !
This icon appears when there is at least one warning. Press to
open Warning List.
Exit
Allows the operator to exit the Service menu.
Log Out
Allows the operator to exit the Analysis menu.
Confirmation is required.

2.2 Available input devices

This section provides information about the available input devices and them use in
different screens.
Following are the specific sub-section for each device.
2.2.1 Touch Screen

2.2.2 Standard PC Keyboard
2.2.3 Mouse
2.2.4 External Bar Code Reader
2.2.1 Touch Screen
The main information input device for the user is the touch screen.
To start an enter command or edit value action the operator touches the area to be
edited, which results in the immediate display of the numerical keypad (if enabled).
If the information to be entered is strictly numerical, the editing is done directly on the
keypad.
If the information requires alphanumeric characters, the input is done through the
external keyboard.
The editing action may be closed by pressing the "Confirm" or the "Cancel" buttons or
by touching a different area of the screen (implicit confirmation).
Once the confirmation is done, the system performs an automatic check on the entered
value. If an error situation is detected the user is notified by means of dialogue boxes
and the editing action is reactivated.
The touch screen supports auto-repeat functions in order to make lists easier to scroll.

2.2.2 Standard PC Keyboard
The main function of the PC keyboard is to enter and edit data in the alphanumeric
fields.
To start the editing action selects the field to be edited. Moving the cursor from the
current object (it may be the default object if the window was just opened) does this to
the chosen object by pressing [TAB] or [Shift] [TAB].
To close the editing action press [Enter] or select another active object or move the
cursor by pressing the [TAB] or [Shift] [TAB] keys. In all cases, closing the editing
action causes the system to activate checks on the entered data and the user is notified
of any error conditions by means of a dialogue box. If the editing action has been
implicitly closed (touching a different area of the screen) the fault condition of the
entered value will be changed to the pre-existing one.
Pressing the [ESC] key without activating any control may also close the editing
action; in this case the value returns to the pre-existing one.
Main and secondary menus may be selected using the keyboard. Pressing [ALT]
+Character opens the menus; selections within the secondary menus are done using
the Character key.
The keyboard may also be used to activate the Toolbar functions ( [F 1] to [F 11] ).
Pressing [ALT]-[TAB] allows shifting from an activated window to another visible
window.
2.2.3 Mouse
The mouse is an optional device that may be used as a selecting device in place of
touching the screen. If at the instrument turn on the mouse is connected to the proper
ports of the Interface Board then the Mouse arrow pointer is displayed.
2.2.4 External Barcode Reader
The external barcode reader is an optional device used to read the information
encoded in sample barcode labels. The characters read are handled exactly as the
manual editing from the keyboard and are valid for every editable field.

2.3 Instrument Status

Located in the upper part of the screen, within the Status area, this item identifies the
current state of the instrument as one of the following.
SYSTEM INIT (BOOT/START-UP)
This indicates that the instrument after the turn on is performing start-up operations
(Initialising).
LOG-IN
This indicates that the instrument is inoperative and is waiting for the inputting of the
User Identification and the Password of the operator (see section 2.4).
READY
This indicates that there have been no blocking errors detected, there are no analytical
operations in progress and the instrument is ready to start.
OPERATING
This indicates that either an analytical function is in progress (Calibration or Sample

Analysis) or a diagnostic function is being performed.
HOLD
This identifies a system "pause" reached during an analytical session (STAT request,
no rotors, etc.). In order to continue the current session select Resume (green flag
icon in the Toolbar).
FAILURE
This indicates that the system has detected a blocking malfunction for a software
problem or into internal mechanisms (devices, temperature control, etc.).

STAND-BY
This is the status into which the instrument moves automatically after 30 minutes of
inactivity. The LCD lamp in the video module is turned off and its status led becomes
green. Both coagulimetric LED and Halogen Lamp are off and the system performs a
Database check then becomes inoperative.
To exit from the stand by status enter any command (Touch the screen, press any key
etc.).
SERVICE
This is the status assumed when the instrument is in the Service program or in its
menus.
To gain access at the Service program is necessary to insert the proper identification
password at the LOG-IN (User: Service, Password: ACL fix) and then select on the
windows like menu bar Diagnostic and then Service.
In the Service program are contained all the software tools and utilities to allows at the
Service Engineer a complete check out and adjustment of the whole Instrument.
In the Service program the coagulimetric LED and Halogen Lamp are turned on for
default.
To exit from the Service program selects the Exit button on the Toolbar.
Note: Every time that on the Tool Bar the Exit button is touched, the system
performs an initialisation of the Instrument.
During this initialisation puts all the motors in the home position and try to recover all
the error presents before access to the Analysis program.

2.4 Passwords
This section contains the available passwords implemented in the instrument software
together with the description of the gained functions.
Following are the Log-In passwords:
User Password Gained functions description
User Gain access only to the Analysis program.
Note: The Password field is empty.

Service ACL fix Gain access to the Service program though the selection of
the enabled option Service in the Diagnostic Menu.
Note: In the User as in the Password fields pay attention to type correctly the capital
letters and the spaces. Otherwise the system shows an Error message box.
Following is Service program password:
Password Function description
ACL8 Allows at the service engineer to Reset the Test Counter.
Note: The password is required only if in the Test Counter Menu the
Reset button is touched.
2.5 Analysis and Service program menu description

In this section is contained an overview on the configuration of the Windows like
Menu bars contained in the two main program.
Each of the two programs is basically composed by specific menus (in the Analysis
program: Analysis, QC and Calibration, while for the Service program: Service) and by
common menus (Diagnostic, Setup and Utility).
Specific information about the Analysis menus is provided in the Operator Manual.
A quick description of the menu that are common in the two programs is also
provided. Following are the specific sub-sections.
2.5.1 Analysis program Windows like Menu bar.

2.5.2 Service program Windows like Menu bar.
2.5.3 Common Menu description.

2.5.1 Analysis program Windows like Menu bar
This sub-section is designed to provides information about the location of the menu in
the Analysis program.
A menu may be opened by selecting the appropriate area of the screen (touch or click
with the mouse) or using the keyboard: [ALT] + Character.
The selection of menus to be opened may be done in all directions: up and down or
right and left.
The displayed items, which have a secondary menu, are identified with a marker ( ).
Selecting a menu item, touching an external area, or pressing [ESC] from the standard
keyboard closes a menu.
The Analysis Windows Like Menu Expanded Diagrams is available in the figure
2.5.1 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings.
2.5.2 Service program Windows like Menu bar
This sub-section is designed to provides information about the location of the menu in
the Service program.
A menu may be opened by selecting the appropriate area of the screen (touch or click
with the mouse) or using the keyboard: [ALT] + Character.
The selection of menus to be opened may be done in all directions: up and down or
right and left.
The displayed items, which have a secondary menu, are identified with a marker ( ).
Selecting a menu item, touching an external area, or pressing [ESC] from the standard
keyboard closes a menu.
The Service Windows Like Menu Expanded Diagrams is available in the figure
2.5.3 Common Menu description
This sub-section is designed to provide information on the menu that are common and
present in both the Analysis and the Service program. More information about these 3
menus is provided in the Operators Manual.
Following are the specific sub-section for these 3 menus.
2.5.3.a Diagnostic
2.5.3.b Setup
2.5.5.c Utility

2.5.3.a Diagnostic
Following is the table with the description of the functionality of each option in the
Diagnostic menu.
Option Description
Priming This performs a priming cycle of the fluidic system with

Wash-Reference Emulsion by means of the Dilutors.
Cleaning This performs a configurable cleaning cycle of the Needles
Block with Cleaning Solution by means of the Dilutors.
Maintenance This is a schedule that allows at the operator to remember
dates and notes about the instrument maintenance actions.
Temperature Control This screen allows to monitoring the temperatures of the
heating and cooling systems.
Needles Position This is a test that allows at the operator to verify/adjust the
Needles Block position.
Session Error History Its a table where are traced by the system the errors
occurred during the last session.
Logbook Its a table where are traced by the system the last 100
actions of the operators on the system configuration.
Service This option allows at the Service Engineer to access at the
Service program (without the proper password is dimmed).
2.5.3.b Setup
Setup menu.
Option Description
Tests This is a second level menu with any options that allow to
the operator to whole configure the analytical tests.
Profiles This is a second level menu with any options that allow to
the operator to whole configure the analytical profile tests.
Liquids This is an option that allows to the operator to whole
configure the liquids used by the instrument.
Interfaces This is a second level menu with any options that allow to
the operator to whole configure the interface with the
internal / external device.
System Configuration This is an option that allows to the operator to whole
configure the system.
Date / Time This is an option that allows to the operator to set the date
and the internal clock time.
Units This is an option that allows at the operator to select the
measuring units for the data.

2.5.3.c Utility
Utility menu.
Option Description
Upgrade IL Library This option allows to the operator to upgrade the IL library
present in the system with new liquids, tests and profiles.
Backup / Restore This option allows to the operator to backup or restore the
current system configuration (for Hardware, QC, AR, and
Patients).
Archive This option allows to the operator to store the data (QC,
AR, Patients database and Calibration) on floppy disks using
the .TXT format. If required these floppy disks are then
readable from a PC.
Software This option allows to the operator to check the release,
upload and upgrade the instrument software.
Save Last Rotor Map This option allows to the operator to save on floppy disk the
row data of all the rotors analysed in the last session using
the .TXT or .DAT formats. If required these row data
are then analysable in a PC.
Save Trace This option allows to the operator to save on floppy disk the
file where the instrument store any operation performed and
any command received. If required this file may be delivered
to the IL R&D department for troubleshooting purposes.
Decapper This option is dimmed (the Decapper unit is a feature not
available at the moment).
Debug This option is always dimmed (only for R&D purposes).
Testing This option is always dimmed (only for R&D purposes).

3 General Description
This section of the Manual contains general description about the ACL 9000 system,
including them use and functionality. Following are the specific sections.
3.1 Main Fluidic System Description

3.2 Main Optic System Description
3.3 Electronic Description
3.4 Main Hardware Components Description
3.5 Software Description
3.6 Heating and Cooling System Description

General Description
3.1 Main Fluidic System Description

This section provides information about the fluidic system functionality during the
analysis and on its components.
The fluidic functions are sampling, dispensing and flushing the system.
The ACL 9000 fluidic system includes the components described in the following
sub-sections.
3.1.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion bottle.

3.1.2 Dilutors Chamber and Electro-Valves.
3.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly.
3.1.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion bottle
This is a plastic bottle containing 1 L of silicon emulsion that is used as a wash

solution for the Needles Block as for the optical reference of the Coagulimetric
Channel.
A capacitive sensor located inside the bottle detects the Wash-Reference Emulsion
level.

3.1.2 Dilutors Chamber and Electro-Valves
The Dilutor Chamber is an acrylic block with two cylinders each of them has inside a
stainless steel piston and an O ring.
A stepping motor through a lead screw on which the fork actuator for the piston is
mounted drives each piston.
Volumes up to 140 l can be aspirated or dispensed. Since the pistons do not touch
the walls of the chambers in which they move, the volume of the liquid dispensed
depends entirely upon the accuracy of the piston and the travel.
The travel is determinate by the stepping motor and driving lead screw.
Note: Due to the critical adjustment and burn-in procedure required after the O ring
replacement, no any service action must be attempted at sub assy level in the field.
In order to keep different liquids separately in the same fluidic line (ex: The in line
Wash-Reference Emulsion and the samples or the reagents) the instrument loads
between the two liquids a little air bubble.
The 2 Electro-Valves are mounted above the Dilutors Chamber, each one connected
to one of the pistons. Two Electro-Valves are electronically controlled and connect
the pistons to the Wash-Reference Emulsion bottle as well as to the two needles of the
Needles Block mounted on the Sample Arm.
The Instrument Fluidic System Diagram is provided in the figure 3.1.2 Drawing 1
of the section 10 Drawings.

General Description
3.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly
Two stainless steel needles (External for Sample, Auxiliary Material and Reagent and
the Internal for Reagent only) are mounted on the end of the Sample Arm that is
moved by the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
The Sample Arm allows to the Needles Block to move in the proper positions and to
perform with the dilutors the following operations.
- Aspiration of sample, reagent and Auxiliary Material from their respective

locations.
- Dispensing into the internal and external compartments of the reaction
cuvettes within the rotor.
- Washing of the needles with Wash-Reference Emulsion in the Rinse/Waste
Reservoir.
Two specific capacitive sensors connected to the Needle Block are used to detect the
level of the liquid around the sample (External) and reagent (Internal) needle.
These liquid sensors are integrated into the ACL analytical cycles in such a way that
their operation does not affect the throughput of the system.
For all analytical cycles the verification by the sensors is done in-line during the
loading phase. The sampling arm stops when the needle is just below the liquid
surface to allow proper aspiration of the programmed amount of liquid.
Following is the sequence of the sensor operations during a cycle.
- self-check
- liquid test
- washing
- final sensor self-check
Operators are warned of sensor failures, results for a sample for which the system
detected insufficient volume will appear with a warning. In the case that all sample
containers in the sample tray are empty the cycle will be aborted after the final self-
check. No other warnings appear on the video or on the printer.

3.2 Main optic system description

This section provides information about the optic system onboard used by the
instrument to perform the analysis on the samples / reagent reaction during the
acquisition cycle as well as on its main components.
The ACL uses two different optic principles to measure the hemostasis parameters:
- The light scattering used for the Coagulimetric Channel.

- The light absorption used for the Chromogenic Channel.
Emerging Chromogenic
Light Channel
Scattered
Light
Rotor Sample
Cuvette Coagulimetric
Channel
Incident
Light
The rotor cuvette loading and analysis area also houses two optical systems for
analysis: Coagulimetric (nephelometric method) and Chromogenic (absorbance
method). Following are the specific sub-section.
3.2.1 Coagulimetric Channel

3.2.2 Chromogenic Channel

General Description
3.2.1 Coagulimetric channel
The ACL coagulimetric channel uses the light scattering method.

The system measures the rise in turbidity causes by the formation of the clot, within
the rotor cuvettes.
When a ray of light passes through a medium containing finely dispersed matter in
suspension, the ray is diffuses by the particles (light scattering) due to the reflection
and refraction phenomena.
The diffused light is measured at 90 with respect to the incident light (see next
figure). This system is known as nephelometric measurement.
Nephelometric analysis is particularly suited for the determination of the very finely
dispersed matter. Figure below shows the ACL optic system.
The coagulimetric channel uses a high efficiency light emitter diode (LED) as light
source (wavelength is 660 nm approx.).
The light radiation coming from the LED is transferred to the Rotor Holder using an
optic fibre system.
Due to the narrow bending radius required connecting the LED output to the rotor
mounting assy, the use of a very flexible optic fibre is required.
For this reason a multiple fibres system, composed by a large number of single fibres
(about 1000), is used.
The optic fibre is locked to both the emitter side and the rotor side, using 2 set screws.
Note: When the optic fibre is locked on the diode side, the applied torque cannot
exceed 90 degrees CW or CCW at the rotor holder side.
A specific circuit, powered by the Switching Mode Power Supply Board with the +12
Vdc, provides a constant current to the diode.

The light emitter is also equipped with a LED OFF line, coming from the Motor
Board (Board #5), which de-activates the LED when the instrument enters the Stand-
by status.
The light generated by the light emitter diode and transmitted through the optic fibre
is scattered by the reaction mixture present in the rotor cuvette. This scattered light is
read by using a solid state optical detector, which is installed below the Rotor Holder
and is directly connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3) through a
coaxial cable.

General Description
3.2.2 Chromogenic channel
The Chromogenic Channel is based on the light absorption principle.

A polychromatic source of light hits the cuvette content.
The radiation passes through the solution contained in the cuvette and the unabsorbed
portion of light reaches the photocell that transforms the light energy of the ray
striking it into an electrical signal. Figure below shows the ACL optic system.
The Chromogenic Channel uses a Halogen lamp with an effective life of 1000 hours.
The main characteristics of the lamp are the following:
Voltage: 6 V
Wattage: 10 W
The lamp is installed on to an appropriate socket that allows an easy installation into
the Source lamp assy. The Halogen Lamp Socket can be replaced by accessing the
area through a removable cover inside the rotor waste area, in the center of the
instrument. In case of replacement of the halogen lamp, attention must be paid to
avoid that fingerprints are left on the lamp bulb.
The Chromogenic Lamp is powered at a regulated voltage, generated by a particular

electronic circuit located onto the Switch Mode Power Supply. The circuit is provided
of protections against open circuit and short circuit.
The lamp is activated only during the chromogenic cycles, and when the instrument is
in the Service programs.
The lamp beam passes through an optical filter that cuts the infrared radiation
(named antiheat filter) in order to avoid damages to the fibre, caused by the high

temperature presents nearby the lamp. The filter is mounted in the Halogen Lamp
Assy. The beam passes through a quartz optic fibre, and then is fed to the rotor
through a focusing system, composed by an optic condenser (the two lenses).
The assembly composed by the focusing system plus the optic fibre is called Optical
Collimator Assy.
One end of the optic fibre is secured to the source lamp assy by means of a setscrew,
while the other end, is secured below the rotor mounting assy.
The quantity of radiation unabsorbed by the cuvette contents, passes through a 405
nm interferential filter and than is detected by an optical sensor (solid state
photodiode).
Both the optical detector and the filter are mounted in the Rotor Holder Cover.
The photodetector is directly connected to the Acquisition & Sensor Board #3 through
a coaxial cable.
Note: The optical path width for the Chromogenic Channel is 0,5 cm (cuvette height).
The absorbance values provided by the analyser are normalised to 1 cm. These values
are generally double the ones obtained on other ACL models, for which the
absorbance values are strictly the ones obtained for the 0,5 cm cuvette path.

General Description
3.3 Electronic Description

This section is designed to completely describe whole the electronic system of the
instrument.
Electronic drawings and explanation of the logical functionality are also included.
Following are the specific sub-sections.
3.3.1 Interconnection schematic

3.3.2 Quick reference board function table
3.3.3 Quick reference board function diagram
3.3.4 CPU Master Board #1
3.3.5 Slave Board #2
3.3.6 Acquisition & Sensors Board #3
3.3.7 Rotor Exchange Module Board #4
3.3.8 Motors Board #5
3.3.9 Photometric & Temperatures Control Board #6
3.3.10 Switching Power Supply Board
3.3.11 Instrument Ground Circuit
3.3.1 Interconnection Schematic
The purpose of this drawing is to clarify the starting point and the route of each signal
present in whole the Instrument.
The major modules are logically grouped. An exception is made for the big Module
Interconnection Board that is split for better identifies each single module driven.
The Mother Board and Interconnections General Block Diagrams is available in the
figure 3.3.1 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings.

3.3.2 Quick Reference Board Functions Table
This sub-section is designed to describe the circuits on the main boards and the main
modules and parts driven. Following is the board function table.
BOARDS MAIN COMPONENTS / MODULES / PARTS

CIRCUITS CONTROLLED / DRIVEN
Main Microprocessor Hard Disk and Floppy Disk

CPU Master IDE Hard Disk, Floppy LCD Board (LCD)
Board # 1 Disk controller Speaker
Serial/Parallel Port Interfaces Board (Mouse,
controller Parallel Printer, Ethernet and
Ethernet controller Ext. Keyboard ports)
Arcnet controller Communication with Slave

Serial Port controller Board # 2
PC104 Board Interfaces Board (Modem,
Host and Bar Code ports)
Touch Screen Board (Touch
Screen)
Slave Microprocessor Communication with PC104

Slave Arcnet controller Board
Board # 2 Serial controller Control of Boards #3, #4, #5
and #6
Internal Bar Code Reader
A/D Converter Coagulimetric &

Coagulimetric & Chromogenic Optical
Chromogenic optic channels channels
Acquisition amplification circuit Sample Tray Optical Sensors
& Sensors Samples Tray detectors Liquid Level Detection Board
Board # 3 circuit (Needles Block)
Needles Sensors drive circuit Reference Emulsion Sensor
Reference Emulsion Analysis Compartment Cover
presence circuit Hall sensor
Analysis Compartment
Cover Hall Sensor circuit

General Description
REM Slave Microprocessor Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor

Power switching step-up 24Vdc
12v-24v Rotor Arm Vertical Motor
Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor 24Vdc
drive circuit Transport Motor 24Vdc
Rotor Arm Vertical Motor REM Motors Dual Channel
Rotor drive circuit Optical Switch
Exchange Transport Motor drive circuit Rotor Stack & Rotors Waste
Module REM Motors Dual Channel Full Infra Red Sensors
Board # 4 Optical Switch reading Rotor Arm & Rotor Stack
circuit Electromagnets
Infra Red sensors drive Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
circuit Rotors Waste Presence
Electromagnets drive circuit Detector
Rotors Feed Stack Cover
Hall sensor circuit
Rotors Waste presence
detector circuit
Power switching step-up Autosampler Motor 12Vdc

12v-26v Sample Arm Horizontal
Autosampler drive circuit Motor 12Vdc
Sample Arm Horizontal Sample Arm Vertical Motor
Motor drive circuit 26Vdc
Sample Arm Vertical Motor Reagent Dilutor Motor 12Vdc
drive circuit Sample Dilutor Motor 12Vdc
Reagent Dilutor Motor drive Magnetic Stirrer Motors
Motors circuit 26Vac
Board # 5 Sample Dilutor Motor drive Dilutor Electro-valves 12Vdc
circuit Coagulimetric Channel LED
Magnetic Stirrer Motors 12Vdc
drive circuit Motors Dual Channel Optical
Dilutor Electro-valves drive Switch (W/O REM Motors)
circuit
Coagulimetric Channel LED
drive circuit
Motors Dual Channel
Optical Switch reading
circuit (W/O REM Motors)

+5VREF generator circuit Rotor Motor 70Vdc

Rotor Motor drive circuit Analysis Compartment Cover
Rotor Cover Motor drive Motor 12Vdc
Photometric circuit Thermoregulation Rotor
& Rotor Holder Holder
Temperature Thermoregulation Thermoregulation Peltier 1
s Control Peltiers Thermoregulation Thermoregulation Peltier 2
Board # 6 Rotor Transport (not-installed)
Thermoregulation Thermoregulation Transport
Rotors Stack Plate
Thermoregulation Thermoregulation Rotors
Feed Stack
Power line filter All modules

Voltages generators
Switching Main current protection
Power circuit
Supply Voltages protection circuit
Board Chromogenic Lamp
Protection circuit
3.3.3 Quick Reference Board Funcions Diagram
This sub-section provides a graphical representation of the hardware components

correlation. The Quick Reference Board Function Diagram is available in the figure
3.3.3 Draving 1 of the section 10 Drawing.

General Description
3.3.4 CPU Master Board (Board # 1) & PC104 Board
The CPU Master Board and the PC104 Board, located between the system Card
Housing and the Dilutor Assy, are powered through the Switching Power Supply,
which provides a +5Vdc (DGT) and +12Vdc (DGT).
The CPU Master Board (Board #1) has a Personal Computer architecture design.
The CPU Master Board General Block Diagram is available in figure 3.3.4 Drawing
1, while the PC104 Board General Block Diagram is available in figure 3.3.4
Drawing 2 of the section 10 Drawings.
The main functions reported in the brief below are further expanded and presented on
specific paragraphs.
CPU Master Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.4.a)
Software runtime.
Internal devices control.
External devices control.
Communication with PC104 Board.
PC104 Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.4.b)
Communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).

Touch Screen control.

3.3.4.a CPU Master Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.4 Drawing 1)
Software runtime.
At the instrument power on the CPU Master downloads from the Hard Disk Drive
both the Operating System and the Application software. A local MEMORY BANK
is used during the software runtime. After downloading, the Board #1 starts system
initialisation testing the instrument hardware through the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The control of the MEMORY BANK is achieved through the SYSTEM & DRAM
CONTROLLER and the MEMORY CONTROLLER. The Hard Disk Drive control is
performed through the SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER and the PERIPHERALS
STANDARD CONTROLLER.
In addition to the Operating System and Application software the Hard Disk Drive
also allows Patient and Analytical Database storage.
The CPU Master Board reads the internal device configuration, through the SYSTEM
& DRAM CONTROLLER from the BIOS MEMORY.
Internal device control.

The internal devices of the instrument controlled from the Board # 1 are:
The active matrix LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) controlled by the VGA
CONTROLLER and the VIDEO MEMORY (through the LCD ACTIVE
MATRIX CONNECTOR CN6). The VGA CONTROLLER can also support
standard PC monitor (through PC MONITOR CONNECTOR P1), and/or
passive matrix LCD (through the LCD PASSIVE MATRIX CONNECTOR
CN2 CN3).
The Floppy Disk Drive controlled by the PERIPHERAL STANDARD
CONTROLLER (through the FLOPPY DISK DRIVE CONNECTOR CN16).
The Hard Disk Drive (located under the CPU Master Board) controlled by the
PERIPHERAL STANDARD CONTROLLER (through the HARD DISK
DRIVE CONNECTOR CN17).
The SPEAKER (located on the rear of the system Card Housing) controlled by the
SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER (through the UTILITY CONNECTOR
CN7).

The external devices controlled by Board # 1 (through the Interface Board) are:
The standard PC Keyboard controlled from the SYSTEM & DRAM CONTROLLER
(through the UTILITY CONNECTOR CN7).
An external Ethernet interface controlled from the ETHERNET CONTROLLER
(through the ETHERNET CONNECTOR CN11).
An external Parallel Printer controlled from the PERIPHERAL STANDARD
CONTROLLER (through the PARALLEL PORT CONNECTOR CN18).

General Description
A PC serial Mouse controlled from the PERIPHERAL STANDARD CONTROLLER

(through the MOUSE SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR CN20).
Three other serial lines are controlled from the PERIPHERAL STANDARD
CONTROLLER (through the SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR CN19 CN21
CN22, actually Not Used).
Communication with PC104 Board.

The CPU Master Board communicates with the PC104 Board through the SYSTEM
& DRAM CONTROLLER and the PC104 CONNECTOR CN8 CN9 CN25.
The CPU Master Board receives the signal RESET from the Mother Board through
the UTILITY CONNECTOR CN7. This signal is generated from the Slave Board
(Board # 2) and is sent also to the PC104 Board.
The Board # 1 provides to the PC104 Board also a +5Vdc (DGT).

3.3.4.b PC104 Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.4 Drawing 2)
Communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).

The CPU Master Board communicates to the PC104 Board through the connector
CN1 CN2.
The PC104 Board interfaces with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the ARCNET
CONTROLLER, which is connected with the ARCNET CONNECTOR CN5 (CN4
could also be used as it replicates CN5 pinout, being parallel connected).
The controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the INSULATING &
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUIT.
External device control.

CN1 CN2.
The PC104 Board, through the SERIAL CONTROLLER, controls the MODEM
HOST BAR CODE SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR CN7 CN8 CN9. These
serial ports though the Interface Board allow to the Instrument to communicate with
the external devices. The MOUSE SERIAL PORT is configured to support an
external Bar Code Reader.
Touch Screen control.

CN1 CN2.
The PC104 Board through the TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BOARD SERIAL
LINE CN6 and the TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BORD POWER CN3, controls the
Touch Screen Board located inside the Display assembly.

General Description
3.3.5 Slave Board (Board # 2)
The Slave board (Board #2) is located on the system card housing and powered
through the Switching Power Supply, which provides a +5Vdc (DGT).
The Slave Board is equipped with a microprocessor (MCU U1), a resident memory
bank and a circuitry handling various interrupt signals that are sent to the board.
Multiple data and address busses are employed: (D0 - D15 and A0 - A23) are used to
connect the MCU U1 to the internal bus (DB0 - DB15 and AB0 - AB23). The internal
busses are then buffered to external data and address bus (SLD0 - SLD15 and SLA0 -
SLA23) through which the Slave board communicates with the Boards # 3, # 5 and
# 6.
The Slave Board General Block Diagram is available in figure 3.3.5 Drawing 1 of
the section 10 Drawings.
Slave Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.5.a)
Main Reset circuits.

Power supply presence circuit.
Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.b).
Memory Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.c) .
Glue Logic Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.d).
Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.b)
Receives commands forwarded from the CPU Master Board (Board # 1).
Controls the REM Board (Board #4) and the internal Bar Code Reader.
Memory Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.c)
Programs run time and data storage.
Main Logic Section (see paragraph 3.3.5.d)
Interfaces the Slave board with the external data and address bus
Interrupt controller

3.3.5.a Slave Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 1)
Main reset circuit

The RESET CIRCUIT U3 generates the signal RESET used to initialise the whole
system. The RESET CIRCUIT can be triggered by any of the following
devices/signals:
- The MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12 (Main Logic Section)

- The signal INIT generated on the Switching Power Supply.
- The local microswitch RESET SWITCH SW1 (used only for manufacturing
testing purposes).
The LED LD1 is aimed only when the signal RESET is present.
Power supply presence circuit

The LED LD4 is aimed always while the Board # 2 is powered with +5Vdc (DGT).
3.3.5.b Communication Section (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 2)
Receives commands forwarded from the CPU Master Board (Board # 1).
The Slave board communicates with the CPU Master Board by means of an Arcnet
connection, using a dedicated cable and connector P6 (P7 could also be used as it
replicates P6 pinout, being parallel connected). The data transmission is handled by
the ARCNET CONTROLLER CIRCUIT U27.
The controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the INSULATING CIRCUIT

ISO1 ISO2. A DC/DC CONVERTER REG1, connected to the LED LD2, provides
a dedicated power supply to the TRANCEIVER CIRCUIT U29. A further circuit
controlled by the CANBUS CONTROLLER U28 is present but not used on the Slave
board.
Controls the REM Board (Board #4) and the internal Bar Code Reader.
A serial communication is achieved by the SERIAL CONTROLLER CIRCUIT U31
U32. The serial controller is electrically de-coupled by means of the INSULATING
CIRCUIT ISO3 ISO10. A DC/DC CONVERTER REG2, connected to the LED
LD3, provides a dedicated power supply to the DRIVER CIRCUIT U33 U34 U35.
The serial communication line TX0 RX0 coming from MCU U1, is also linked to
the DRIVER CIRCUIT U33 U34 U35, which handles the serial communication
line TXD4 RXD4 to the REM board (board # 4).
Signals TRIGBARC, TX1 RX1 are respectively utilised for both enabling
(TRIGBARC) and communicate (TX1 - RX1) with the internal Bar Code reader.

General Description
The serial ports P8 - P9 - P10 are not used during the normal operations. Use of these
ports is limited to the manufacturing process when the board is connected to external
devices, which program the resident logic.
3.3.5.d Memory Section (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 3)
Programs run time and data storage.

A few memory devices are employed to support the MCU U1 on the Slave Board,
these are:
The SERIAL EEPROM U2 is directly linked to a serial port of the MCU U1.
The RAM STATIC MEMORY BANK U22-25 linked to MCU U1 through the data
bus DB0 - DB15 and the address bus AB0 - AB19.
The FLASH EPROM MEMORY U14 - U21 linked to MCU U1 through the data bus
DB0 - DB15 and the address bus AB0 - AB19.
The MCU U1 is also connected to the BOOT LOADER EPROM U26 from, which
downloads the boot program by sending the command CSBOOT while initialising.
3.3.5.d Main Logic Section (See figure 3.3.5 Drawing 4)
Interfaces the Slave board with the external data and address bus.
The MCU U1 is connected through the data bus D0 - D15 to the INTERNAL DATA
BUS TRANSCEIVER U4, which outputs DB0 - DB15 as local data bus connecting to
other devices resident on the Slave board.
The local data bus BD0 - DB15, is then linked to the EXTERNAL DATA BUS
TRANSCEIVER U7 U36. These devices output SLD0 - SLD15 slave data bus,
which allows MCU U1 to communicate with the Board # 3, # 5 and # 6, located on
the system card housing.
The address bus A0 - A23 links MCU U1 to the INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS
BUFFER U5 U6 which outputs AB0 - AB23 as local address bus connecting to
other devices resident on the Slave board.
The local address bus AD0 - AD23, is then linked to the EXTERNAL ADDRESS
BUS BUFFER U8 U9. These devices output SLA0 - SLA23 slave address bus,
which allows MCU U1 to communicate with the Board # 3, # 5 and # 6, located on
the system card housing.
The control signal R/W is fed to the INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS BUFFER U5 U6
which outputs a signal BR/W connected to the MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12. The EPLD
generates the individual control signals RD and WR which are routed to the
INTERNAL ADDRESS BUS BUFFER U5 U6 where they get converted into BRD
and BWR. The EXTERNAL INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 U11 buffer the

commands and output the commands SLRD and SLWR which become control signals
of the external data and address bus.
The MAIN LOGIC EPLD U12 also handles the chip select signals for the local
devices as well as the board select commands. The board select commands (BS0 -
BS3) are fed to the EXTERNAL INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 U11 which
provide outputs SLBS0 - SLBS3 to the Board # 3, # 5 e # 6 located on the system
Card Housing.
Interrupt controller.
Possible interrupts generated outside the Slave board are input via the EXTERNAL
INTERRUPT BUS BUFFER U10 U11 and then routed to the INTERRUPT
CONTROLLER EPLD U13. The EPDL U13 handles the interrupts following a
scheme of priority and sends signals IRQ1 - IRQ7 to the MCU U1.
The interrupts, which can be, generate and logged into the slave board are as follows:
- INIT (Initial Reset)

This signal is raised from the Switching Power Supply and has the purpose to keep
the system reset for a pre-defined period of time thus allowing the power supply
voltages to reach stability.
- POWERFAIL
This signal is raises from the Switching Power Supply, which can detect a lack of
supply voltage, and may lead to a decrease of the dc voltages thus impairing proper
functioning of the logic.
- STS
This can be raise by the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3) when the A/D
conversion has been accomplished and the data is available on the bus.
- ELETFAIL
This can be raise by the Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board # 4) in case of
malfunction of an electromagnet thus impairing proper rotor displacement.
- ROTCUV and ROTCUVZ

These can be raised by the Motor Board (Board # 5) and are utilised to highlight a
possible malfunction either of the rotor motor or associated device, such as the Dual
Channel Optical Switch.
- ROTFAIL
This can be raised by the Photometric & Temperature Control Board (Board # 6) in
case of a malfunction of the Rotor Motor.

General Description
3.3.6 Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3)
The Acquisition & Sensor Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and powered
through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT), +15Vdc
(ANA), -15Vdc (ANA) and +12Vdc (PW).
The Acquisition & Sensors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2)
through the signals SLD0 - SLD15 slave data bus, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7
slave address bus. This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD,
SLWR, RESET as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS0.
The Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram is available in figure
Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.6.a)
Reading Warning signals from Switching Power Supply.

Control signals for Switching Power Supply.
Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.b).
Channel Amplifier Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.c).
Sample Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections (see paragraph 3.3.6.d).
Needles Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.e).
Reference Emulsion Presence Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.f).
Analysis Compartment Cover Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.g).
Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.b)
A/D Conversion for most important signals.

Sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Frequency generation for Magnetic Stirrer Motors.
Channel Amplifier Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.c)
Optical channel amplification.
Sample Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections (see paragraph 3.3.6.d)
Container on Sample Tray detection.

Needles Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.e)
Liquid presence detection during the analysis loading cycle.
Reference Emulsion Presence Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.f)
Reference Emulsion presence level in the bottle.
Analysis Compartment Cover Hall Sensor Section (see paragraph 3.3.6.g)
Analysis Compartment Cover position detection.
3.3.6.a Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.6
Drawing 1)
Reading Warning signals from Switching Power Supply.

The Switching Power Supply, in case of malfunction, sends two warning signals to
the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3). The signal THERFAIL is raised by the
Switching Power Supply in case the temperature of the environment reaches a level
(about 60 C), which way become dangerous for the Switching Power Supply. If
overeating is detected (about 75 C) the Switching Power Supply enters the Protection
Mode putting down the power of the instrument.
The second signal MISSLAMP is raised by the Switching Power Supply when the
current for the Halogen Lamp gets too low.
Both signals enter in the PARALLEL I/O U5 where are read by the Slave Board.
Control signals for Switching Power Supply.

The Slave Board (Board # 2) sends to the PARALLEL I/O U5 two control signals for
the Switching Power Supply. The first is the signal LAMPWR that controls the
Halogen Lamp status.
The second is the signal PWROFF that controls the +9Vdc, +12Vdc and +70Vdc
power voltage status.

General Description
3.3.6.b Multiplexer & Acquisition Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 2)
A/D Conversion for most important signals.

Following are the most important signals converted:
COAG CHROM for the Analysis Compartment Optical Channels reading

TPELT1 for the Peltier temperature detection
TPELT2 for the second Peltier temperature detection (not used)
TROT for the Rotor Holder temperature detection
TFSLITTA for the Transport Plate temperature detection
TFSILOS for the Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection
+5VREF for the 5V Reference voltage detection
SCUVINT for the Sample Tray internal ring container detection
SCUVEXT for the Sample Tray middle and external rings container detection
SLIQ for the liquid presence detection
SFLUSH for the Reference Emulsion level detection
SHALL for the Analysis Compartment Cover closed detection.
The Board # 3 uses the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U1 to select that signal will
convert the A/D CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11. This selection is driven by the
PARALLEL I/O U5 that sends the control signals MUX0 - MUX3 to the multiplexer.
The EPLD U6 controls with the start signal ADRC and the end signal ADSTAT the
conversion process of the A/D CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11. The EPLD U6 controls
the timer programmable TIMER PROG. U9 that allows the EPLD of work with the
Rotor Motor s speed during acquisition at 600 or 1200 Rpm, and introduces a delay
in the acquisition time pre-selected in the Curve Adjustment Service menu (see
section 7.2 for Coag. and section 7.3 for Chrom.). The EPLD U6 receives from the
PARALLEL I/O U5 the control signals AACQ to select the static or the dynamic
acquisition and the signals SCALF to select the delay for Coag. Ch. or Chrom. Ch.
The EPLD U6 receives the signals ROTCUV ROTCUVZ from the Motors Board
(Board # 5) and they are very important signals to synchronise the data acquisition.
Sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
When the new data is ready the EPLD U6 receives the signal ADSTAT from the A/D
CONVERTER CIRCUIT U11, then enables the BUFFER 3-STATE U12 U13 with
the signal RDADC and sends the interrupt signal STS to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Frequency generation for Magnetic Stirrer Motors.

The timer programmable TIMER PROG. U10 is used to produce the frequency
FREQST for the work of the Magnetic Stirrer Motors drivers on the Motors Board
(Board # 5).

3.3.6.c Channels Amplifier Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 3)
Optical channel amplification.

The Optical sensor of the Coagulimetric Channel is located under the Rotor Holder.
This sensor is connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board through a coaxial cable
that enters in the specific amplifier s box. The sensor s signal enter in the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U17 U21, the output COAG is one of the most important
signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. This circuit is composed
also by the trimmers RV1 used to adjust the Offset and RV2 used to adjust the Gain
during the instrument testing (see section 7.2).
The Optical sensor of the Chromogenic Channel is located under the Analysis
Compartment Cover. This sensor is connected to the Acquisition & Sensors Board
through a coaxial cable that enters in the specific amplifier s box. The sensor s
signal enter in the AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U20 U22, the output CHROM is one of
the most important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. This
circuit is composed also by the trimmers RV4 used to adjust the Offset and RV3 used
to adjust the Gain during the instrument testing (see section 7.3).
3.3.6.e Samples Tray Detectors Emitter & Receiver Sections

(See figures 3.6.6 Drawing 4 and Drawing 5)
Container on Sample Tray detection.

The Autosampler is designed to accept patient samples, as well as calibrants on the
same tray (Sample Tray).
Forty positions are available to load patient samples. Two rings (outermost and
middle ring) can accept twenty cup/tubes each. A third ring (innermost) is available
on the Sample Tray either up to ten positions can be loaded with calibrants, controls
and/or reagents.
Two optical sensors are located in the Autosampler housing with the purpose of
detecting the presence of the containers in the Sample Tray. The internal sensor is
placed in the internal wall while the external sensor is placed in the external wall of
the Autosampler housing. Both the sensors detect the presence of the containers using
the refraction principle.
The power section for the infra red light emitter of the sensors is controlled by the
PARALLEL I/O U5 that sends the enabling signals ESCUV ESCUVINT
ESCUVEXT to the EPLD U6.
The Sample cup/tubes can be placed in the Sample Tray on two different rings. As the
sample cup/tubes can be placed on both the outermost and the middle ring, two
different levels of current are needed to drive the external sensor which shall detect
the presence of sample container located either close (outermost ring) or far (middle
ring).
To select the most appropriate current level, the EPLD U6 sends the AUTOC signal
to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26 which through the signals SCUVL1 SCUVL2 set
the current level output at the CURRENT GENERATOR U43A U46A.

General Description
The trimmer RV6 allow the adjustment of the current in the emitter during the
instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3). The outputs of the power circuit for the
external sensor are ANLED1 KD1.
The auxiliary materials containers are placed in the innermost ring of the Sample Tray
and are detected by the internal sensor. The trimmer RV7 allows the adjustment of the
current in the emitter during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3).
The outputs of the power circuit for the internal sensor are ANLED2 KD2.
The external sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the
signal ET1 witch is filtered and amplifier to produce the signal SCUVEXT. This
signal is then converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
To select the right works level, the EPLD U6 sends the controls signal AUTOC to
the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26 that can linking the trimmer RV10 to control the gain of
the AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U27A.
The trimmer RV10 allows, for the outermost ring, the adjustment of the amplifier gain
for the receiver signal during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.3).
Another controls signal is BLIVSCUV which is sent to the COMPARATOR
CIRCUIT U48A to select the right work level and produce the logical signal
PCUVEXT, then this signal is read from the PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER
CIRCUIT U28 controls the LED DL1 that is lighted when the sample containers are
detected during the Autosampler / BCR Test (see sub-section 7.5.3).
The internal sensor receive the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the
signal ET2 witch is filtered and amplifier to produce the signal SCUVINT, one of the
most important signals converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
The circuit produces also the logical signal PCUVINT witch is read from the
PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 controls the LED DL2 that is
lighted when the auxiliary materials containers are detected during the Autosampler
Test (see sub-section 7.5.3).
3.3.6.e Needles Sensor Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 6)
Liquid presence detection during the analysis loading cycle.

The Liquid Level Detector Board, connected to the needles probe assy, sends the
signals AGOSS for the sample needle and AGOSR for the reagent needle to the
Acquisition & Sensors Board. The EPLD U36 selects with the enabling signals
EAGOS - EAGOR the sample/reagent needle sensor signal. The EPLD U36 also
controls with the signals EAUTOZEROS RAUTOZEROS the reading or the reset
of the auto-zero circuit. The selected signals enter in the specific circuit and produce
the output signal SLIQ, which is then converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition
Section. The EPLD U36 sends the controls signals GXL1 GXL2 to the SWITCH
CIRCUIT U51 which, according with the cycle in progress, sets the gain of the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U39B by connecting either the trimmer RV11 (for the
Reagent) or RV12 (for the Sample) as appropriate.

The trimmer RV11 and RV12 allow the adjustments of the amplifier gain for the
output SLIQ during the instrument testing (see cap. 6.3.1). The signal SLIQ is also
compared with one of the three threshold signals SG1 SG2 SG3, this selection is
controlled by EPLD U36 to produce the logical signal PSAGO, then this signal is read
from the PARALLEL I/O U5. The DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 controls the LED DL4
that is lighted when the liquids are detected during the Needles Sensor Test (see sub-
section 7.4.1). The PARALLEL I/O U5 sends to the EPLD U36 the signal EAGHITIP
aimed at enabling the entire liquid detectors circuit and the signal LGT2 to enables the
timer programmable TIMER PROG. U9.
3.3.6.f Reference Emulsion Presence Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 7)
Reference Emulsion presence level in the bottle.

The sensor located inside the cap of Reference Emulsion bottle detects the volume of
the liquid in the bottle. The PARALLEL I/O U5 enables with the signal ECLKLIQ
the timer programmable TIMER PROG. U10, which outputs the clock signal
CLKSENSE, amplified and used with the name of CLKSINE as a reference. This
signal CLKSINE is sends to the sensor and return to the board attenuated with the
name of BFLUSH. The signal s attenuation is proportional to the missing volume of
Reference Emulsion, so the signal MFLUSH is the amplified reads of the sensor. The
EPLD U6 U36 controls through the signal SFLH the SWITCH CIRCUIT U26. This
circuit then selects between the inputs MFLUSH and CLKSINE the output signal
MSENSE. The signal MSENSE is then amplified and output as SFLUH from the
AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT U24. The signal SFLUSH is then converted in the
Multiplexer & Acquisition Section.
The trimmer RV9 allows the adjustments of the amplifier gain for the output signal
SFLUSH during the instrument testing (see sub-section 7.4.2). The trimmer RV8
allows the factory adjustment of the amplifier gain for the reference signal CLKSINE.
3.3.6.g Analysis Compartment Cover Sensor Section (See figure 3.3.6 Drawing 8)
Analysis Compartment Cover position detection.

The magnetic sensor, located under the Fluidic Plate on the left side of the Analysis
Compartment, detect the presence of the magnet placed in the Analysis Compartment
Cover and outputs the signals COVDET1 COVDET2 for the Acquisition & Sensor
Board. The circuit output the signal SHALL, one of the most important signals
converted in the Multiplexer & Acquisition Section. The trimmer RV5 allow the
adjustments of the amplifier for the output signal SHALL during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.9.1). The signal SHALL is also used to generate the signal
PHALL which enter in the DRIVER CIRCUIT U28 to controls the LED DL3 which
is lighted when the cover is closed.

General Description
3.3.7 Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board # 4)
The Rotor Exchange Module Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and
powered through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT),
+15Vdc (ANA), -15Vdc (ANA) and +12Vdc (PW).
The R.E.M. Board is equipped with a microprocessor (CPU U1) and a resident
memory bank. The R.E.M. Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2)
through the serial communications line TXD4 RXD4.
The Rotor Exchange Module Board General Block Diagram is available in figure
3.3.7 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawing.
Rotor Exchange Module General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.7.a)
Reading of the Motor Dual Channel Optical Switch.

Rotors Waste container presence detection.
Rotors Feed Stack cover position detection.
CPU ready condition circuit.
Transport Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.b).
Rotor Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.c).
Memory & Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.d).
Infra Red Sensors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.e).
Electro Magnets Control Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.f).
Transport Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.b)
Transport Motor drives circuit.
Rotor Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.c)
Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.

Rotor Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
Memory & Communication Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.d)
Resident Memory Bank and communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).

Infra Red Sensors Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.e)
New and used Rotors presence detection.
Electro Magnets Control Section (see paragraph 3.3.7.f)
Rotors loading from Caliper and Rotors Feed Stack.

Sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
3.3.7.a Rotor Exchange Module General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.7
Drawing 1)
Reading of the Motor Dual Channel Optical Switch.

Three Dual Channel Optical Switches are mounted on the Transport and on the Rotor
Arm assembly to detect the positions of the motors. The motor position is coded by
Encoder disk or flag located on the movement assy. The Dual Channel Optical Switch
sends to the Board # 4 the signals reading on the Encoders. These signals enter in the
BUFFER CIRCUIT U27 U28 U29, which output the signals: SLOT_CAS
EDGE_CAS for the Transport Motor, SLOT_ROT EDGE_ROT for the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor and SLOT_HIG EDGE_HIG for the Rotor Arm Vertical Motor.
These signals are routed directly or through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U6 into
the CPU U1.
The motor rotation, sensed by the Dual Channel Optical Switch, allows the CPU U1
to detect possible motor failures.
Rotors Waste container presence detection.

The status of the mechanical switch, located inside the Rotors Waste container
compartment, is read through the BUFFER CIRCUIT U27, which outputs the signal
DOOR_WST to the CPU U1.
Rotors Feed Stack cover position detection.

The magnetic sensor, located over the Rotors Feed Stack, is activated by a magnet
embedded inside the Feed Stack cover. The magnet sensor status is read through the
BUFFER CIRCUIT U30, which outputs the signal COP_SILOS to the CPU U1.
CPU ready condition circuit.

The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 controls the LED DL1, which is lighted when the
CPU U1 is ready.

General Description
3.3.7.b Transport Motor Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 2)
Transport Motor drive circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Transport Motor
movement. The CPU U1 controls the TRANSPORT MOTOR DRIVER U14 DX1,
whose output signals are the motor phases M1A M1BB. The CPU U1 uses the
demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the enable signal M1_PWR_ENA to the driver
circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to check the presence of the signal MO_CAS
generated by the driver only if there is a malfunction. The TRANSPORT MOTOR
DRIVER U14 DX1 is powered by the LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10.
The jumpers in M1 are factory pre-set to obtain full or half steps as required.
3.3.7.c Rotor Arm Motors Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 3)
Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor movement. The CPU U1 controls the ROTOR ARM
HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U16 DX2, whose output signals are the motor
phases M2A M2BB. The CPU U1 uses the demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the
enable signal M2_PWR_ENA to the driver circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to
check the presence of the signal MO_ROT generated by the driver only if there is a
malfunction. The ROTOR ARM HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U16 DX2 is
powered by the LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10. The jumpers in M2 are
factory pre-set to obtain full or half steps as required.
Rotor Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the CPU U1 the command relative to the Rotor Arm
Vertical Motor movement. The CPU U1 controls the ROTOR ARM VERTICAL
MOTOR DRIVER U18 DX3, whose output signals are the motor phases M3A
M3BB. The CPU U1 uses the demultiplexer DEMPL U29 to send the enable signal
M3_PWR_ENA to the driver circuit, and the multiplexer MPLX U6 to check the
presence of the signal MO_HIG generated by the driver only if there is a malfunction.
The ROTOR ARM VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER U18 DX3 is powered by the
LOCAL GENERATOR +24VPW U10. The jumpers in M3 are factory pre-set to
obtain the full or half steps as required.

3.3.7.d Memory & Communication Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 4)
Resident Memory Bank and communication with the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The CPU U1 controls through the data bus D0 D7, the address bus A8 A15, and
the BUFFER 3-STATE CIRCUIT U3, the RAM MEMORY U4 and the ROM
FLASH MEMORY U5, used for the program s run-time and data storage.
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 sends the enables signals to the memories.
The serial communication line of the CPU U1 is linked with the SERIAL I/O
CIRCUIT U8, which handles the serial communication line TXD4 RXD4 to the
Slave Board (Board # 2).
3.3.7.e Infra Red Sensors Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 5)
New and used Rotors presence detection.

Three optical sensors are located on the Rotor Exchange Module assy, with the
purpose of detecting the presence of the rotors along the route. This route begins in
the Rotors Feed Stack and ends in the Rotors Waste container. Two optical sensor are
located in the Rotors Feed Stack and one above the Rotors Waste container.
These three sensors detect the presence of the rotors using the refraction principle.
The upper sensor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack allows the system to detect for
presence of new rotors in the store of the Rotor Stack (over the mechanical
movements).
This sensor is powered by the POWER CIRCUIT Q7, which provides the signals
AFCS and CFC.
The sensor receives the refracted light and sends to the receiver circuit the signals
FCS, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_STR. This signal is
reads by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX CIRCUIT U7. This circuit is
composed also by the trimmer PT1 used to adjust the signal during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.5.1).
The lower sensor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack allows the system to detect for
presence of a new rotor on the Rotor Transport plate.
AFCC and CFC.
FCC, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_CAS. This signal is
composed also by the trimmer PT2 used to adjust the signal during the instrument
testing (see sub-section 7.5.1).

General Description
The sensor located above the Rotors Waste container allows the system to detect the
conditions of Waste container full.
AFCW and CFC.
FCW, which is handled by the circuit to produce the signal FC_WST. This signal is
composed also by the trimmers PT3 used to adjust the reading of the signal during the
instrument testing (see sub-section 7.5.2).
The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 sends the signal CK_LED, which is used to
enable the circuit.
3.3.7.f Electro Magnets Control Section (See figure 3.3.7 Drawing 6)
Rotor loading from Caliper and Rotors Feed Stack.

Three similar mechanisms achieve the rotors loading on the Rotor Exchange Module
assy. One of them is the Caliper, located over the Rotor Arm, used to load and unload
the Analysis Compartment and to waste the used rotors. Two of them are located
inside the Rotors Feed Stack to allow the correct rotors loading. These mechanisms
use three identical electromagnets. The CPU U1 through the EPLD U2 controls the
POWER CIRCUIT Q1 Q2 Q3 D7 D8, which outputs the signals used to
power the electromagnets.
These signals are EMCL for the Caliper, EMS1 for the upper movement inside the
Rotors Feed Stack and EMS2 for the lower one. The signal EM_SUPPLY is used as
common to recover the high current produced during the electromagnet opening.
Sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The RESISTIVE CIRCUIT controls the signals for the electromagnets and sends the
warning TEM_CLM for the Caliper, TEM_ST1 for the upper movement, TEM_ST2
for the lower movement, and the signal 24V_MOT for the LOCAL GENERATOR
+24VPW. These signals are reads by the CPU U1 through the multiplexer MPLX
CIRCUIT U7. If a warning signal is active the CPU U1 commands the EPLD U2 to
disable the electromagnet with the failure and sends the interrupt signal ELETFAIL to
the Slave Board (Board # 2).

3.3.8 Motors Board (Board # 5)
The Motors Board, is located in the system Card Housing, and powered through the
Switching Power Supply, which provides the +5Vdc (DGT), and +12Vdc (PW).
The Motors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the
signals SLD0 - SLD7 slave data bus, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7 slave address
bus. This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD, SLWR, RESET
as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS2.
The Motors Board General Block Diagram is available in figure 3.3.8 Drawing 1 of
the section 10 Drawings.
Motors Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.8.a)
Reading of the signals originated by the Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted on
the Autosampler Motor, the Sample Arm Motors, the Dilutors Motors, the Rotor
Motor and the Analisis Compartment Cover Motor.
Sends the interrupt signals ROTCUV ROTCUVZ to the Slave Board (Board #
2) and to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3).
Dilutor Electro Valves control.
Coagulimetric Channel LED status control.
Autosampler Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.b).
Sample Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.c).
Dilutors Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.d).
Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.e).
Autosampler Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.b)
Autosampler Motor drives circuit.
Sample Arm Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.c)
Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.

Sample Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.
Dilutors Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.d)
Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit.

Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit.

General Description
Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (see paragraph 3.3.8.e)
Magnetic Stirrer Motors drives circuit.
3.3.8.a Motors Board General Block Diagram (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 1)
Reading of the signals originated by the Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted on
the Autosampler Motor, the Sample Arm Motors, the Dilutors Motors, the Rotor
Motor and the Analisis Compartment Cover Motor.
The positions of the motors are coded by Encoders disk or flag located on the
movement assy. The Dual Channel Optical Switch sends to the Board # 5 the signals
reading on the Encoders associated. These signals are:
SMALOW SMAHIGH for the Autosampler Motor
SMOLOW SMOHIGH for the Sample Arm Horizontal Motor
SMVLOW SMVHIGH for the Sample Arm Vertical Motor
SMDREAG for the Reagent Dilutor Motor (use a Single Channel Optical Switch)
SMDSAMP for the Sample Dilutor Motor (use a Single Channel Optical Switch)
SMRTLOW SMRTHIG for the Analisis Compartment Cover Motor
SMRLOW SMRHIGH for the Rotor Motor.
These signals enter in the BUFFER CIRCUIT U7 U8 then in the PARALLEL I/O
U1, which is controlled through the slave data and address bus from the Slave
Board (board # 2).
The motor rotation, sensed by the Dual Channel Optical Switch, allows the Slave
Board to detect possible motor failures.
Sends the interrupt signals ROTCUV ROTCUVZ to the Slave Board (Board #
2) and to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3).
The Dual Channel Optical Switch mounted on the Rotor Motor is very important to
achieve a proper reading during the Analysis Acquisition. Its signals SMRLOW
SMRHIGH through the BUFFER CIRCUIT U7 U8 enter the EPLD U41, which
sends the signals ROTCUV ROTCUVZ to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board
# 3) and to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Dilutor Electro Valves control.

The Slave Board controls through the slave data and address bus the PARALLEL
I/O U1, which communicates the request status for the Electro Valves to the DRIVER
CIRCUIT U5. This driver energise/de-energise the Electro Valves through the power
signals EV1 EV2.
Coagulimetric Channel LED status control.

The Slave Board controls through the slave data and address bus the PARALLEL
I/O U1, which output enables the power circuit Q1 to send the signal LEDOFF to the
Coagulimetric Channel LED.
3.3.8.b Autosampler Motor Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 2)
Autosampler Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Autosampler
Motor movement. The EPLD U43 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT
U24 controls the AUTOSAMPLER MOTOR DRIVER U21 U22, which output
signals are the motor phases MFA1 MFA4.
The Autosampler Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR
+5VPW U40, factory adjusted by means of the trimmer RV6.
The trimmer RV3 is factory adjusted to sets the reference voltage to the demultiplexer
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U24.
3.3.8.c Sample Arm Motors Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 3)
Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Sample Arm
Horizontal Motor movement. The EPLD U42 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX
CIRCUIT U34 controls the SAMPLE ARM HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER U31
U32, which output signals are the motor phases MFO1 MFO4.
The Sample Arm Horizontal Motor drive circuit is powered from the LOCAL
GENERATOR +5VPW U40.
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U34.
Sample Arm Vertical Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Sample Arm
Vertical Motor movement. The EPLD U43 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX
CIRCUIT U38 controls the SAMPLE ARM VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER U35
U36, which output signals are the motor phases MFV1 MFV4.
The Sample Arm Vertical Motor drive circuit is powered from the LOCAL
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY +26VPW U7. This circuit is also powered from the
LOCAL GENERATOR +5VPW U40. The trimmer RV5 is factory adjusted to sets
the reference voltage to the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U38.

General Description
3.3.8.d Dilutors Motors Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 4)
Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Reagent Dilutor
U16 controls the REAGENT DILUTOR MOTOR DRIVER U13 U14, which output
signals are the motor phases MFR1 MFR4.
The Reagent Dilutor Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL
GENERATOR +5VPW U40. The trimmer RV1 is factory adjusted to sets the
reference voltage to the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U16.
Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U42 the command relative to the Sample Dilutor
U20 controls the SAMPLE DILUTOR MOTOR DRIVER U17 U18, which output
signals are the motor phases MFS1 MFS4.
The Sample Dilutor Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR
+5VPW U40. The trimmer RV2 is factory adjusted to sets the reference voltage to the
demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U20.
3.3.8.e Magnetic Stirrer Motors Section (See figure 3.3.8 Drawing 5)
Magnetic Stirrer Motors drives stage.

The Slave Board sends to the EPLD U43 the command relative to the Magnetic
Stirrer Motors movement. The EPLD U43 controls the MAGNETIC STIRRER
MOTOR DRIVER U25 U26 U27 U28, which outputs signals are the motor
phases AGTR1A AGTR4B. The driver circuit is powered from the LOCAL
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY +26VPW U7. These driver circuits work with AC
motors, so they need the frequency signal STFREQ (50 Hz) from the Acquisition &
Sensors Board.
The REFERENCE VOLTAGE GENERATOR U39 and the THRESHOLD CIRCUIT
U11 allow to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U6 U12 to detect a possible
malfunction of the magnetic stirrers. In case of malfunction is detected the
COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U6 U12 and outputs the warning signals ALAGTR1 -
ALAGTR4. These warning signals are read through the PARALLEL I/O U1 by the
Slave Board, and by the EPLD U43 that turns off the magnetic stirrer motor raising a
fail warning.

3.3.9 Photometric & Temperatures Control (Board # 6)
The Photometric & Temperatures Control Board, is located in the system Card
Housing, and powered through the Switching Power Supply, which provides the
+5Vdc (DGT), +15Vdc (ANA), -15Vdc (ANA), +9Vdc (PW), +12Vdc (PW) and
+70Vdc (PW).
The Motors Board communicates with the Slave Board (Board # 2) through the
signals SLD0 - SLD7 slave data bus, and the signals SLA0 - SLA7 slave address
bus. This communication is supported by the control signals SLRD, SLWR, RESET
as well as the Board enabling signal SLBS3.
The Photometric & Temperatures Control Board General Block Diagram is

available in figure 3.3.9 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings. The main functions
reported in the brief below are further expanded and presented on specific paragraphs.
Photometric & Temperatures Control General Block Diagram
Rotor Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.a).

Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.b).
Rotor Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.c).
Peltiers Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.d).
Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.e).
Rotor Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.a)
Rotor Motor drives circuit.

Sends the interrupt signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.b)
Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit.
Rotor Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.c)
Rotor Holder temperature detection and control.
Peltier Thermoregulation Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.d)
Peltier temperature detection and control.

+5VREF generator circuit.

General Description
Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (see paragraph 3.3.9.e)
Transport plate temperature detection and control.

Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection and control.
3.3.9.a Rotor Motor Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 2)
Rotor Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board through the PARALLEL I/O U4 sends to the EPLD U5 the
command relative to the Rotor Motor movement. The EPLD U5 controls the ROTOR
MOTOR DRIVER U7 U8 U10 U14, which output signals are the motor phases
RF1 RF4.
The Rotor Motor drives circuits is powered from the LOCAL GENERATOR +5VPW
U13.
Sends the interrupt signal ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The circuits ROTOR MOTOR DRIVER U7 U8 U10 U14 send the signals
VSENSE1 VSENSE2 to the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U12, which is aimed to
detect possible motor fail. If the fail is present this circuit outputs the signal IRFAIL,
which enters the BUFFER CIRCUIT U2. The buffer sends the interrupt signal
ROTFAIL to the Slave Board (Board # 2).
The Slave Board disables the interrupt ROTFAIL through the PARALLEL I/O U4,
which sends the signal ROTCLR to the EPLD U5. The EPLD U5 controls with the
signal NROTCLR the SWITCH CIRCUIT U18, which sends the signal CLFAIL to
reset the COMPARATOR CIRCUIT U12.
If there is a warning for high current, the driver circuits output the signals AACHOP
BBCHOP, which are used to disable the EPLD U5
3.3.9.b Analysis Compartment Cover Motor Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 3)
Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit.

The Slave Board through the PARALLEL I/O U4 sends to the EPLD U5 the
command relative to the Analysis Compartment Cover Motor movement. The EPLD
U5 through the demultiplexer DEMPLX CIRCUIT U37 controls the COVER
MOTOR DRIVER U15 U16, which outputs signals are the motor phases MFT1
MFT4.
The Analysis Compartment Cover Motor drives circuit is powered from the LOCAL
GENERATOR +5VPW U13.
DEMPLX CIRCUIT U37.

3.3.9.c Rotor Thermoregulation Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 4)
Rotor Holder temperature detection and control.

The thermistor located inside the Rotor Holder sends the signal SROT1 SROT2 to
the Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is connected to the jumper JR1, the reference resistance R59 and to the
trimmer RV1. When the jumper JR1 is on the check position the trimmer RV1 allows
the factory adjustment of the circuit. When the jumper JR1 is in the reading position
the signal SROT1 SROT2 is amplified and outputs as TROT, which is sent to the
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
The Slave Board through the Acquisition & Sensors Board acquires the temperature
of the Rotor Holder, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INCOIL to the EPLD U6. The EPLD U6 controls the thermoregulation circuit, which
provides the signal Z1 FOTGND to the heating coil of the Rotor Holder. The circuit
that provides the power is also composed of:
The PACKET DELAY CIRCUIT U26A U21 output signal TASTD, which controls
the timing of the sinusoidal wave signals packet.
The PHASE DISPLACEMENT CIRCUIT U22 output the signal COMROT that, with
the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19, controls the phase of the sinusoidal wave signal
generated by the OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT U23.
The IMPULSE GENERATOR U24 generate the signal that triggers the POWER
CIRCUIT Q11 that activates the LC oscillator circuit providing heating to the rotor
holder. The trimmer RV2 is factory set to obtain the most suitable time shift to the
power signal and avoid overcurrent which may damage the POWER CIRCUIT Q11.
3.3.9.d Peltiers Thermoregulation Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 5)
Peltier temperature detection and control.

The thermistor located inside the Peltier sends the signal SPELT1 to the Photometric
& Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is connected to the jumper JR2, with the reference resistance R86 and to
the trimmer RV3. When the jumper JR2 is on the check position the trimmer RV3
allows the factory adjustment of the circuit. When the jumper JR2 is in the reading
position the signals SPELT1 is amplified and outputs as TPELT1, which is sent to the
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
of the Peltier, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INPELT1 to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19. This circuit outputs the signal ONPELT1
to active the CURRENT GENERATOR CIUCUIT U32A, which provide the current
signal +VP1 to the Peltier cell used to cool the Peltier assembly.
Another identical circuit, as reported in fig. 3.3.9 Drawing 5, is present on the Board #
6 but not used in the ACL 9000.

General Description
+5VREF generator circuit.

The Board # 6 has a dedicated voltage generator circuit, called REFERENCE
VOLTAGE GENERATOR +5VREF U29, which provides the signal +5VREF.
This reference signal is used in the temperature control sections and is also sent for
the conversion to the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
The reference value is factory pre-set through the trimmer RV4.
3.3.9.e Transport & Rotors Feed Stack Section (See figure 3.3.9 Drawing 6)
Transport Plate temperature detection and control.

The thermistor located inside the Transport Plate sends the signal SSLITTA to the
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is amplified and outputs as TFSLITTA to the Acquisition & Sensor Board
(Board # 3).
of the Transport Plate, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable
signal INPREH to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U18. This circuit outputs the signal
ONSLITTA to active the POWER CIRCUIT Q10, which provide the current signal
PSLITTA to the heating pad used to heat the transport plate.
Rotors Feed Stack temperature detection and control.

The thermistor located inside the Rotors Feed Stack sends the signal SSILOS to the
Photometric & Temperatures Control Board.
This signal is amplified and outputs as TFSILOS to the Acquisition & Sensor Board
(Board # 3).
of the Feed Stack, and controls the PARALLEL I/O U4 that sends the enable signal
INPREH to the SWITCH CIRCUIT U19. This circuit outputs the signal ONSILOS to
active the POWER CIRCUIT Q14, which provide the current signal PSILOS to the
heating pad used to heat the Rotors Feed Stack.

3.3.10 Switching Power Supply Board
The Switching Power Supply Board, located under the dilutor assembly, provides to
the whole the instrument +5VDGT, +12VDGT, +15VANA, -15VANA, +9VPW,
+12VPW, +70VPW and +6VLAMP.
The Power Entry provides the signal LINE-IN that allows the operation of the
Switching Power Supply. This signal must be in the range from 100-120Vac to 220-
240Vac (50-60 Hz).
The Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram is available in figure
3.3.10 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings. The main functions reported in the
brief below are further expanded and presented on specific paragraphs.
Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram (see paragraph 3.3.10.a)
Line filter.
Automatic identification of the line voltage.
Control & Protection stage for all the generators.
Sends the ready signal to the system.
Control the turn off of the power voltages.
Chromogenic Lamp drives circuit.
Communicate warning status to the system.
3.3.10.a Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram (See figure
3.3.10 Drawing 1)
Line filter.
The Switching Power Supply Board has a LINE FILTER integrated on board.
Automatic identification of the line voltage.

The Board through the POWER FACTOR CORRECTION BOARD PCB1 identifies
the line voltage connected to the instrument, and sets the Switching Power Supply
Board as appropriate. The line voltage acceptable for the Switching Power Supply
Board are100-120Vac to 220-240Vac (50-60 Hz).

General Description
Control & Protection stage for all the generators.

The POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 controls all the voltage generators, and
protects them from Short Circuit or high voltage. If one of these problems is present
on the voltage GENERATOR +5VDGT, +15VANA and -15VANA, the POWER
CONTROL BOARD PCB2 sets to Protection Mode, turn off all the dc voltage and
lights the LED DL1. To recover proper working conditions it is necessary to switch
the system OFF for at least 20 seconds prior switching it beck ON.
The TRIMMER RV2 RV3 RV4 RV5 RV6 are used to adjust the digital and
analogical voltage outputs. The Test Points TP1 TP9 are used for factory testing of
the Switching Power Supply Board.
Sends the ready signal to the system.

At the instrument turn on, the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 controls all the dc
voltage outputs, when all of them are stabilised, sends the signal INIT to the Slave
Board (Board # 2).
Control the turn off of the power voltages.

When the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 receives the signal POWEROFF from
the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3), it disables the power voltages
GENERATOR +9VPW, +12VPW and +70VPW.
Chromogenic Lamp drives circuit.

When the POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 receive the signal LAMPWR from the
Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3), enables the GENERATOR +6VLAMP that
turns on the Chromogenic Lamp.
Communicate warning status to the system.

The POWER CONTROL BOARD PCB2 sends three warning signals to the system in
case of malfunction, which are detected as follows:
The signal POWERFAIL is sent to the Slave Board (Board # 2) if the output voltages
are lower than the 80% of the normal value, or in any case before that the Switching
Power Supply is turned off.
The signal THERFAIL is sent to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3) if the
environment temperature is over 60 C. If this temperature rises up to readies 75 C,
the Board sets to Protection Mode and turning off the whole the instrument.
The signal MISSLAMP is sent to the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3) if a
Short Circuit or a no load is detected on the GENERATOR +6VLAMP.

3.3.11 Instrument Ground Circuit
This sub-section provides information about the Instrument Ground System, in order
to help the service engineer in the assembling of the circuit placed in whole the
Instrument.
The diagram of the Instrument Ground Circuit is available in figure 3.3.11 Drawing
1 of the section 10 Drawings.

General Description
3.4 Main Hardware Components Description

This section contains a general description of the main hardware components and
modules, which interact with each other to carry out the analytical process.
The figure below highlights some of the main hardware components of the ACL 9000
as viewed from the front of the instrument, while the main electronic boards and
system interconnection ports are located on the rear of the system.
1. Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle with liquid level sensor.

2. Dilutors Assy.
3. Autosampler Housing with internal BCR and presence sensors for cups/tubes on
Sample Tray.
4. Reagent Tray Area with Peltier Assy (Reagents cooling & stirring).
5. Sample Arm with liquid level sensors in the Rinse / Waste position.
6. Floppy Disk Drive (covered).
7. LCD display with Touch Screen.
8. Rotor Stack Assy.
9. Rotor Holder automatic Cover.
10. Rotor Transport and Rotor Arm Assy (covered).
11. Rotor Waste Container compartment with presence and status sensors.
12. Alphanumeric Keyboard.
13. Adapters Area
14. Liquid Waste Outlet

3.5 Software Description

This section contains a general description of the main software and its physical
location in the system.
At the turn on the instrument shows the CPU Master Board (Board #1) BIOS boot
screen with the CPU Master initialization.
Then the system loading the operative system and the application program from the
Hard Disk Drive and perform the initialisation of both the electronic boards and the
modules.
In the Hard Disk Drive is stored all the software of the instrument, both the
application program (Analytical and Service programs) and backup files of the
software working on the Slave Board (Board #2) and R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
These two specific softwares are stored in the memories located onboard the Slave
Board and the R.E.M. Board where are located two slave microprocessors.
The two microproprocessors loading the software directly from the memories (Flash
Eprom) at the instrument turn on.
In order to load a new software revison in the instrument or download the software
from the Hard Disk Drive to the boards memories, the software upgrade procedure
have to be performed as described in the sub-section 7.16.2.

General Description
3.6 Heating and Cooling System Description

This section contains a general description of the assemblies that insure proper
temperatures during the pre-analysis and the analysis phases. These temperatures
(reagent cooling and plastic rotors heating) are very important for the analysis
carrying out. Following are these assemblies.
Rotor Holder Assy.

Peltier Assy.
Rotor Transport Assy.
Rotor Stack Assy.
Rotor Holder Assy
The Rotor Holder Assy is provided with a Heating Coil and a high precision
thermistor, that are powered and driven by a specific electronic circuit.
Through this system the instrument insure the 38.5 C (the accepted range is 38.0 C
to 39.0 C) on the Rotor Holder iron and so the 37.0 C (the accepted range is 36.0 C
to 38.0 C) on the liquids inside the cuvettes of the plastic rotor.
Peltier Assy
The Peltier Assy is provided with 3 Peltier effect cells and a high precision
thermistor, that are powered and driven by a specific electronic circuit.
Through this system the instrument insure that the reagent vials temperature on the
assembly is maintained in the accepted range from 10.0 C to 16.0 C.
Rotor Transport Assy
The Rotor Transport Assy is provided with 2 Heating Pad resistance and a high
precision thermistor, that is powered and driven by a specific electronic circuit.
Through this system the instrument insure that the plastic rotor temperature on the
Rotor Stack Assy
The Rotor Stack Assy is provided with 2 Heating Pad resistance and a high precision
thermistor, that is powered and driven by a specific electronic circuit.
Through this system the instrument insure that the plastic rotors temperature in the

4 Parts Replacement
This section of the Manual contains general description about the operation required in
order to replace the main assemblies as well as the electronic boards and the covers
present on the ACL 9000 system.
4.1 Parts Replacement.

4.2 Instrument Covers Removing.
4.3 Instrument Boards Replacement.
4.1 Parts Replacement

This section is designed to drive step by step the Service Engineer during the
Replacement of the major assembly on board of the Instrument.
Following are the specific sub-sections for each module.
4.1.1 Autosampler Assy Replacement.

4.1.2 Peltier 1 Assy Replacement.
4.1.3 Sample Arm Assy Replacement.
4.1.4 Rotor Holder Assy Replacement.
4.1.5 Rotor Holder Cover Assy Replacement.
4.1.6 Dilutors Replacement.
4.1.7 Display Replacement.
4.1.8 Rotor Exchange Module Replacement.
4.1.9 Hard Disk Drive Replacement.

Parts Replacement
4.1.1 Autosampler Assembly Replacement
The Autosampler Assembly is composed by a grey upper support called Flange

Adjustable that is moved by the mechanical assembly, located under the Fluidic Plate,
called Autosampler Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the system
through the Module Interconnection Board.
Procedure for Remove the Autosampler Assy
Materials / tools necessary: - Standard tools.
Precaution
Make sure that the Instrument has been switched OFF prior going through the
following procedure.
1 Remove the 2 screw that fixes the Flange Adjustable.

2 Remove the Flange Adjustable.
3 Remove the 2 screw that fixes the Internal Ring Sensor to the Fluidic Plate.
4 Remove from the Module Interconnection Board the connectors P72, P73, P74
and the 2 ground cables (see Instrument Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11
Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).
5 Remove the 4 black columns that fix the Autosampler Movement Assy to the
Fluidic Plate.
6 Remove the Autosampler Movement Assy.
The Autosampler Movement Assy P/N 181108-30 includes the following spare parts:
- 1 Dual Channel Optical Switch flat (fixed with 2 screw) P/N 182356-80
- 1 Autosampler Internal Ring Sensor (fixed with 1 strap) P/N 84869-38

Procedure for Replace the Autosampler Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Autosampler
Assy paying attention to the position of the Internal Ring Sensor cable respect
to the encoder disk.
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Autosampler Motor as described in
the sub-section 7.6.5.
3 Follow the procedure for the Autosampler Assy module centring as described
in the sub-section 7.7.1.
4 Perform the check out & adjustment for the Internal/External Rings Sensors as
described in the sub-section 7.5.3.
5 Perform the verification/adjustment of the Needles Sensors as described in the
sub-section 7.4.1.

Parts Replacement
4.1.2 Peltier 1 Assy Replacement
The Peltier Assembly is located under the Fluidic Plate and its connected to the
system through the Module Interconnection Board.
Procedure for Remove the Peltier 1 Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P121, P122, P123, P124, P126 and the 2 ground
cables (see Instrument Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section
10 Drawings).
2 Remove the 3 screws that fix the Peltier Assembly.
3 Remove the Peltier Assembly.
The Peltier 1 Assy P/N 181108-34 includes the following spare parts:
- 1 Peltier Temperature Sensor (fixed with 2 screws and 1 strap) P/N 181021-28
- 4 Stirrer Motor (removable after removed the black dissipater, which is fixed
with 3 screws located under the black dissipater) P/N 181108-35

Procedure for Replace the Peltier 1 Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Peltier 1 Assy
paying attention during the fixing at the cables on the rear of the assembly.
2 Verify with a Magnetic Stirrer Bar the functionality of the 4 Stirrer Motors.
3 Verify that the Peltier 1 thermoregulation system works correctly as described
in the sub-section 7.14.
4.1.3 Sample Arm Assembly Replacement
The Sample Arm Assembly is composed by an upper support called Sample Arm and
by a lower assembly, located under the Fluidic Plate, called Sample Arm Movement
Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the system through the Module
Interconnection Board.
Procedure for Remove the Sample Arm
Precaution
1 Loose the knob, located on the rear of the Sample Arm, which fixes the
Needles Block.
2 Remove the Needles Assy and then remove its connector for the liquid sensor.
3 Remove the upper cover of the Sample Arm fixed with a screw.
4 Remove the Liquid Level Detection Cable from the Needles & Wash-R
5 Loose the 3 setscrew located at 120 on the aluminium support.
6 Remove the Sample Arm.

Parts Replacement
The Sample Arm P/N 181108-42 includes the following spare parts:
- 1 Needles Block P/N 181108-43

- 1 Liquid Level Detection Board (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 182356-40
- 1 Liquid Level Detection Cable (fixed with 1 screw and 1 strap) P/N 84869-12

Procedure for Remove the Sample Arm Movement Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P91, P92, P93, P94 and the 2 ground cables (see
Instrument Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section 10
Drawings).
2 Remove the 3 black columns that fix the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
3 Remove the Sample Arm Movement Assy.
The Sample Arm Movement Assy P/N 181108-41 includes the following spare parts:
- 2 Dual Channel Optical Switch flat (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 182356-80

Parts Replacement
Procedure for Replace the Sample Arm Movement Assy

- Sample Arm Centring Tool
P/N 190513-00
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Sample Arm
Movement Assy.
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Sample Arm Horizontal and
Vertical Motor as described in the sub-section 7.6.3 and 7.6.4.
3 Centre shaft of the assembly in the hole of the Fluidic Plate using the Sample
Arm Centring Tool P/N 190513-00.
Procedure for Replace the Sample Arm
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Sample Arm.
2 Follow the procedure for the module centring of this assembly as described in
the sub-section 7.7.1. and also the procedure to fine adjust the Needles Block
Assy position as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.
3 Perform the Liquid Level Sensor test as described in the sub-section 7.4.1.

4.1.4 Rotor Holder Movement Assy Replacement
The Rotor Holder Movement Assy is located under the Fluidic Plate. The Rotor
Holder Movement Assy is connected at the system through the Photometer Interface
Board.
Procedure for Remove the Rotor Holder Movement Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.

2 Remove the connectors P140, P141, P143, P144, P145, the Coag. Coaxial
Cable from the Board #3 and the 3 ground cables (see Instrument Ground
Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).
3 Remove the 3 black columns that fix the Rotor Holder Movement Assy.
4 Remove the Rotor Holder Movement Assy.
The Rotor Holder Movement Assy P/N 181108-50 includes the following spare parts:
- 1 Dual Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 70908-00

- 1 Rotor Holder Snap (fixed with 1 side screw) P/N 181102-10
- 1 Coagulimetric Sensor w/cable (fixed with 1 setscrew and 1 screw for the
ground cable) P/N 84869-46
- 1 Optical Collimator Assy (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 181021-95
- 1 Brushes Assembly (fixed with 2 screws and soldered at 2 wires) P/N 181024-
43
- 1 Photometer Interface Board (fixed with 3 screws) P/N 182356-30
- 1 Coagulimetric Channel Led w/Fibre (fixed with 2 screws and 1 set screw)
P/N 181025-15

Parts Replacement
Are following any notices about particular Spare Parts replacements.
- Coagulimetric Sensor w/cable must be placed in the bottom of the sensor

housing paying attention to dont lose the Black Spacer located between the
Coagulimetric Sensor and its glass windows under the Rotor Holder.
- Optical Collimator Assy must be placed in the bottom of its housing and the 2
screws must be properly tightened. The other side of the Optical Collimator
must be placed in the bottom of its Halogen Lamp Assy housing paying
attention to dont damage the fibre when tighten the setscrew.
- Brushes Assembly must be placed paying attention that the four brushes touch
completely the two rings under the Rotor Holder.
- Coagulimetric Channel Led w/Fibre must be placed with the Optic fibre in the
bottom of the Rotor Holder housing (see Coagulimetric Channel in the section
7.2).

Procedure for Replace the Rotor Holder Movement Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Rotor Holder
Movement Assy.
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Rotor Motor as described in the
sub-section 7.6.1.
3 Follow the procedure for the module centring of the Rotor Holder as described
4 Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Holder works correctly
as described in the sub-section 7.14.
5 Perform the tests for both the Coagulimetric and the Chromogenic Channels as
described in the sections 7.2 and 7.3.
4.1.5 Rotor Exchange Module Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Exchange Module Assembly is composed by more than one mechanical
assembly assembled on a common support, located under the Fluidic Plate, called
Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic).
The R.E.M. Assembly is located on the right side of the Rotor Holder Cover and is
covered by the R.E.M. Cover. This includes the Rotor Stack mobile cover that allows
the insertion of new rotors in the Rotor Stack.
On the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) are located: the Rotor Arm, the Rotor
Transport and the Rotor Stack. Under the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) is
located the Rotor Arm Movement Assy. The Rotor Transport mechanical movement
isnt removable because incorporated in the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic).
The whole R.E.M. is connected to the system through the Upper and the Lower
R.E.M. Interconnection Boards. Following are the specific paragraph for the R.E.M.
sub-modules replacement.
4.1.5.a Rotor Arm Assembly Replacement

4.1.5.b Rotor Transport Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.c Rotor Stack Assembly Replacement
4.1.5.d Rotor Exchange Module (Basic) Replacement

Parts Replacement
4.1.5.a Rotor Arm Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Arm Assembly is composed by an upper support called Rotor Arm and by a
lower assembly, located under the R.E.M. Common support under the Fluidic Plate,
called Rotor Arm Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected to the system
through the R.E.M. Upper and Lower Interconnection Board.
Procedure for Remove the Rotor Arm
Precaution
1 Remove the connector P112 of the Electro-Magnet.

2 Loose the 3 set screws located at 120 on the aluminium support.
3 Remove the Rotor Arm.
The Rotor Arm P/N 181108-55 includes the following spare parts:
- 1 Spring for Rotor Arm P/N 181103-06

- 1 Electro-Magnet (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 181108-60

Procedure for Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P104, P105, P107, P108 and the ground cable (see
Instrument Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section 10
Drawings).
2 Remove the Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) as described in this sub-
section at the paragraph 4.1.5.d.
3 Remove the 3 nuts that fix the Rotor Arm Movement Assy.
4 Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy.
The Rotor Arm Movement Assy P/N 181108-54 includes the following spare parts:
Procedure for Replace the Rotor Arm Movement Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for remove the Rotor Arm
Movement Assy.
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Rotor Arm Horizontal and Vertical
Motor as described in the sub-sections 7.6.8 and 7.6.9.

Parts Replacement
Procedure for Replace the Rotor Arm
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Rotor Arm.
2 Follow the module centring procedure to align the Rotor Arm at the Rotor
Transport as described in the sub-section 7.7.6.
3 Follow the module centring procedure to align the R.E.M. at the Rotor Holder
as described in the sub-section 7.7.7.
4.1.5.b Rotor Transport Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Transport Assembly is composed by a black upper support (like a Rotor
Holder) called Rotor Transport and by a mechanical movement (moved by the
Transport Motor) incorporated in the R.E.M. Assy (Basic) located under the Fluidic
Plate. The whole assembly is connected to the system through the R.E.M. Lower
Procedure for Remove the Rotor Transport
Precaution
1 Remove the connector P111 of the thermoregulation.

2 Loose the 3 screws that fix the Rotor Transport.
3 Remove the Rotor Transport.

The Rotor Transport P/N 181108-57 doesnt include spare part.
Procedure for Replace the Rotor Transport
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Rotor
Transport.
2 Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Transport works
correctly as described in the section 7.14.

Parts Replacement
4.1.5.c Rotor Stack Assy Replacement
The Rotor Stack Assy is located on the right side of the R.E.M. The whole assembly is
connected to the system through the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection Board.
Procedure for Remove the Rotor Stack Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P113, P114, P116, P117, P118, P119 and the ground
cable (see Instrument Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section
10 Drawings).
2 Remove the 3 screws, located under the common support, which fix the Rotor
Stack Assembly (see Rotor Exchange Module Replacement figure 4.1.5
Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).
3 Remove the Rotor Stack Assy.
The Rotor Stack Assy P/N 181108-59 includes the following spare parts:
- 2 Electro-Magnet (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 181108-60

- 2 Spring for Rotor Stack P/N 181103-22
- 1 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor (fixed with a screw) P/N 182356-70
- 1 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Upper P/N 84869-36
- 1 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Lower P/N 84869-37

Procedure for Replace the Rotor Stack Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Rotor Stack
Assy.
2 Verify that the thermoregulation system for the Rotor Stack works correctly as
described in the section 7.14.
3 Follow the module centring procedure to align the Rotor Stack and the Rotor
Transport as described in the sub-section 7.7.5.
4 Perform the Optic Sensor test for the Rotor Stack as described in the sub-
section 7.5.1.
5 Verify that the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor works correctly as described in the
sub-section 7.9.2.
6 Perform the RA SL RH test as described in the sub-section 7.7.9 to verify
the proper rotors movements inside the Rotor Stack.
4.1.5.d Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) Replacement
The Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) is an assembly that incorporates the black
R.E.M. Common Support plate, the Rotor Transport mechanical movement and the
Transport Motor.
Procedure for Remove the R.E.M. Assy (Basic)
Precaution
1 Remove the Halogen Lamp as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.

2 Remove the 2 screws, which fix the Coag. Channel LED without remove the
Optic Fibre.
3 Remove the Rotor Arm as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.a.
4 Remove the Rotor Transport as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.b.
5 Remove the Rotor Stack as described in the paragraph 4.1.5.c.
6 Remove the connectors P103, P104, P105, P106, P107, P108, P109, P110 and
the 2 ground (see Instrument Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the
section 10 Drawings).
7 Lift the Instrument on the 2 Main Support foots.

Parts Replacement
8 Remove the 5 fixing screws, located on the Fluidic Plate, which fix the whole
assembly (See the REM Common Support Position 3 in the drawing R.E.M.
Replacement available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the section 10
Drawings).
9 Hold with one hand the right side, then slowly push down the left side of the
REM Common Support (See the REM Common Support Position 2 in the
drawing R.E.M. Replacement available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the
section 10 Drawings).
10 Remove the whole REM Common Support following the arrows (See the
REM Common Support Position 1 in the drawing R.E.M. Replacement
available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).
11 Remove the Rotor Arm Movement Assy fixed with 3 nuts.
12 The assembly that includes the black R.E.M. Common support plate, the Rotor
Transport mechanical movement and the Transport Motor is called Rotor
Exchange Module Assy (Basic).
The Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) P/N 181108-53 includes the following
spare parts:
- 1 Rotor Transport Motor (fixed with 4 screws) P/N 82433-00
- 1 Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full (fixed with 4 screws) P/N 84869-47
Procedure for Replace the R.E.M. Assy (Basic)
Precaution
1 Fixes with the 3 nuts the Rotor Arm Movement Assy in place.
2 Put the whole REM Common Support under the tilted Instrument (See the
REM Common Support Position 1 in the drawing R.E.M. Replacement
available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).

3 Following the arrows lift the right side of the REM Common Support, paying
attention to center the 3 Rotor Stack fixing points holes in the Fluidic Plate
(See the REM Common Support Position 2 in the drawing R.E.M.
Replacement available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the section 10
Drawings).
4 Hold with one hand the right side, then slowly lift the left side of the REM
Common Support (See the REM Common Support Position 3 in the drawing
R.E.M. Replacement available in the figure 4.1.5 drawing 1 of the section
10 Drawings).
5 Fix the 5 screws, located on the Fluidic Plate, which fix the whole assembly
(See the 5 REM fixing points).
6 Now follow in the opposite direction from the point 7 to the point 1 the
procedure for remove the R.E.M. Assy (Basic).
7 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Transport Motor as described in
Note: Its requited to perform also the relevant check out for all the other assembly
that was been removed.

Parts Replacement
4.1.6 Rotor Cover Assembly Replacement
The Rotor Cover Assembly is composed by an upper cover called Rotor Cover, by a
mechanical support called Arm with Pulley and by an assembly, located under the
Fluidic Plate, called Rotor Cover Movement Assy. The whole assembly is connected to
the system through the Photometer Interface Board.
Rotor Cover Assy
Arm with Pulley
Rotor Cover Belt
Rotor Cover
Movement Assy

Procedure for Remove the Rotor Cover Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the 3 screws, located on the lower black side, which fix the upper
white support.
2 Remove the 2 screws, located on the metallic mechanical arm, which fix the
black lower support.
3 Remove the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable.
The Rotor Cover P/N 181108-46 include the following spare parts:
- 1 Chromogenic Coaxial Cable (connected to the Board #3) P/N 84869-44.

- 1 Filter Optical 405 nm (located in the black Filter & Sensor Housing, fixed
with 5 screws, and hold in the bottom with a white spacer) P/N 89721-00.
- 1 Chromogenic Sensor Board (located in the Filter & Sensor Housing colour
black and fixed with 6 screws) P/N 82627-00.
Procedure for Replace the Rotor Cover Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Rotor Cover
paying attention at the cleaning of the optic parts.
2 Perform the tests for the Chromogenic Channel as described in the sub section
7.3.

Parts Replacement
Procedure for Remove the Arm with Pulley
Precaution
1 Remove the Rotor Holder as described in the sub-sections 4.1.4.

2 Remove the Rotor Cover and the Rotor Cover Movement Assy as described in
this sub-section 4.1.6.
3 Remove the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable.
4 Remove the Arm with Pulley (fixed with 4 screws).
The Arm with Pulley includes the following spare part.
- 1 Rotor Cover Belt P/N 66675-60
Procedure for Replace the Arm with Pulley
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Removes the Arm with
Pulley, paying attention to secure the Chromogenic Coaxial Cable in a proper
position to save it during the Arm with Pulley movement.
Procedure for Remove the Rotor Cover Movement Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the Halogen Lamp as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.

2 Remove the connectors P143, P144 and the ground cable (see Instrument
Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).
3 Remove Rotor Holder Movement Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.4.
4 Remove all the 5 Boards in the Card Housing.
5 Remove the bulkhead and the 2 fixing knobs located inside the Card Housing.
6 Loose the 3 screws that fix the Cover Movement Assy.

7 Loose the tension of the Rotor Cover Belt lifting the Cover Movement Assy
and free the belt from the pulley holding the motor encoder at the top.
8 Remove the 3 loosed screws and the Cover Movement Assy.
The Rotor Cover Movement Assy P/N 181108-47 includes the following spare part:
- 1 Dual Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screws) P/N 70908-00
Procedure for Replace the Rotor Cover Movement Assy

- Rotor Cover Motor Centring Tool
P/N 190510-00
- Rotor Cover Encoder Centring Tool
P/N 190575-00
Precaution
1 Assemble the Rotor Cover Movement Assy (without tight the 3 screws).
2 Lift the Rotor Cover Movement Assy and, with the Encoder at the top, insert
the Rotor Cover Belt on the Rotor Cover Motor pulley.
3 Using the Rotor Cover Centring Tool in the niche between the support and the
assembly, push down the Rotor Cover Movement Assy until the Rotor Cover
Belt reach the proper tension (take as example the tension of the other belts on
the assemblies in the instrument). In this condition tight the 3 screws paying
attention at the horizontally of the assembly.
4 Loose the 2 setscrews that fix the Encoder to the motor shaft, rotate the
Encoder until is in the middle of the Dual Channel Optical Switch sensor.
5 Leaves fall the Encoder until its upper side is horizontal and about 1 mm above
the upper side of the Dual Channel Optical Switch sensor then fix the 2
setscrews.

Parts Replacement
Dual Channel
Optical Switch
Note: If available use the Rotor Cover Encoder Centring Tool P/N 190575-00.
6 Assemble and fix with 2 knobs the bulkhead located inside the rear of the Card
Housing.
7 Insert and connect the 5 Board in the Card Housing.
8 Assemble the Rotor Holder Movement Assy as described in the sub-section
4.1.4.
9 Connect P143, P144 and the ground (see Instrument Ground Circuit figure
3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).
10 Assemble the Halogen Lamp Assy as described in the sub-section 4.1.7.
11 Perform the Motor Adjustment test for the Rotor Cover Motor as described in
4.1.7 Halogen Lamp Assy Replacement
The Halogen Lamp Assy is located under the Fluidic Plate. The Halogen Lamp Socket
is powered directly through the Switching Power Supply Board.
Its possible without remove the Front Cover change the Halogen Lamp Socket Assy
through the Rotor Waste compartment.
Procedure for Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the connector of the Halogen Lamp Socket Assy.

2 Remove the power connector from the Switching Power Supply Board (fixed
with 2 screws) and the 2 ground cables (see Instrument Ground Circuit
figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings).
3 Remove the R.E.M. Cover.

4 Remove the 2 screws, located on the Fluidic Plate that fixes the Halogen Lamp
Assy.
5 Remove the Halogen Lamp Assy paying attention at dont damage the Optical
Collimator Assy.
6 Remove the Optical Collimator Assy loosing the setscrew.
The Halogen Lamp Assy include the following spare part:
- 1 Halogen Lamp Socket (fixed with 1 knob and 1 screw) P/N 181021-81
Procedure for Replace the Halogen Lamp Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Removes the Halogen
Lamp Assy paying attention at dont damage the Optical Collimator Assy
when tight the setscrew.
2 Perform the Chromogenic Channel check out & adjustment test as described

Parts Replacement
4.1.8 Dilutor Assy Replacement
The Dilutor Assy is located under the rectangular Transparent Cover behind the
Sample Tray. The Dilutor Assy is connected to the system through the Module
Procedure for Remove the Dilutor Assy
Precaution
1 Remove the connectors P81, P82, P83, P84, P85, P86 and the ground cable
(see Instrument Ground Circuit figure 3.3.11 Drawing 1 of the section 10
Drawings).
2 Remove the fluidic tube that connects the Wash-R Emulsion Bottle to the T
Connector.
3 Remove the 2 fluidic tubes that connect the 2 Dilutor Electro-Valves to the
Needles Block.
4 Remove the 3 screws that fix the Dilutor Assy.
5 Remove the Dilutor Assy.
The Dilutor Assy P/N 181108-36 includes the following spare part:
- 2 Single Channel Optical Switch (fixed with 2 screw) P/N 70907-00

- 1 Dilutor Chamber (fixed with 2 screw) P/N 181108-37
- 2 Dilutor Electro-Valve 3 Way (fixed with 2 screw) P/N 181108-38
- 1 T Connector P/N 74068-00

Procedure for Replace the Dilutor Assy
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Dilutor Assy.
2 Perform the Motor Adjustment tests for the Sample/Reagent Motors as
described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
3 Perform the Volume Check and the Dilutor Test as described in Dilutor
Module test in the section 7.8.
4.1.9 Display Assembly Replacement
The Display Assembly is located on a flag support over the right side of the
Instrument. The Display Assembly is connected to the CPU Master Board and to the
PC104 Board through the Display Cable.
Procedure for Remove the Display Assembly
Precaution
1 Remove the Cover on the rear of the Display Assembly.

2 Remove the Display Cable that is fixed with 2 screws.
3 Remove the Display Connector.
4 Remove the 8 screws that fix the Display Assembly to the flag paying attention
to hold the Assembly.
5 Remove the Display Assembly.

Parts Replacement
The Display Assembly P/N 181105-70 includes the following spare parts:
- 1 LCD Inverter Board P/N 69454-16

- 1 LCD Touch Screen Control Board P/N 69454-18
- 1 LCD Video Board P/N 182355-10
Procedure for Replace the Display Assembly
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Display
Assembly.
2 Perform the Touch Screen Calibration the as described in the section 7.12.
4.1.10 Hard Disk Drive Replacement
The Hard Disk Drive is located under the CPU Master Board #1 and PC104 Board
support in the middle of the rear side of the Instrument. The Hard Disk Drive is
connected to the CPU Master Board through the HDD data flat cable.

Procedure for Remove the Hard Disk Drive
Precaution
1 Remove all the cables connected to the CPU Master Board #1 and PC104
Board.
2 Remove the Needles & Wash-R Sensor Interconnection Board support that is
fixed with 2 screws.
3 Remove the HDD with the CPU Master Board and the PC104 Board removing
the 2 external screw and loosing the internal 1 screw.
4 Remove the HDD power and data cables connectors.
5 Remove the HDD that is fixed with 4 screw.
The Hard Disk Drive P/N 065033-00 doesnt includes spare parts.
Procedure for Replace the Hard Disk Drive
Precaution
1 Follow in the opposite direction the Procedure for Remove the Hard Disk
Drive.
2 Perform the procedures described in the section 7.16 Software Checking and
Loading.
Note: In order to completely restore the system status on the new Hard Disk Drive as
before the replacement of the damaged one, is needed perform the following
operations.
- Perform the Upload & Upgrade procedures of the Master Software as

descrebed in the sub-section 7.16.2.
- Perform the Upload procedure of the Slave and the R.E.M. Software as
descrebed in the sub-section 7.16.2.
- Perform the Restore procedure of the last Backup of the system configuration
available descrebed in the sub-section 7.16.4.
- Perform the Upgrade procedure for the IL Library descrebed in the sub-section
7.16.5.

Parts Replacement
4.2 Instrument Covers removing

This section is designed to clarify the Instrument Covers names and positions as well as
them removing / assembling sequence and fixing points.
Following is the Covers lists with the relevant fixing points.
Cover Name Fixing point Note

1 Left Side Cover 3 Screws
2 Right Side Cover 3 Screws
3 Upper Cover 4 Screws Remove before the Left &
(2 for each side) Right Side Covers.
4 Rear Cover 2 Screws Remove before the Left &
(1 for each side + 2 hook the Right Side Covers.
shape on the bottom)
5 Front Cover 6 Screws Remove before the Left &
(2 for each side + 2 under Right Side Covers.
the Front Lower Plate)
6 Front Lower Plate 2 Knob Remove before the Left &
Right Side Covers and the
Front Cover.
7 R.E.M. Cover No screws. Remove with caution the 3
fixing points at pressure.
8 Reagent 3 screws.
Transparent Cover
9 Dilutors No screws. Press with cautions the 2
Transparent Cover fixing points at pressure.
10 Keyboard Support 4 Screws
(2 for each sledge)
The table is according with the drawing Instrument Covers reported in the figure 4.2
Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings.

4.3 Instrument Boards Replacement

This section provides information on the electronic boards located in several places
inside the instrument that compose the electronic system.
Following is the boards list with the proper Check Out & Adjustment required after
boards replacement for troubleshooting purposes.
Board Name P/N Check Out & Adjustment Section
CPU Master Board #1 182352-10 Test for functionality. 3.3.4

No Adjustment Required.
Slave Board #2 182355-30 Check Software revision. 7.16.1
Upgrade SW if required 7.16.2
Test for functionality. 3.3.5
Acquisition & Sensors 182355-40 Test for functionality. 3.3.6
Board #3 Coagulimetric Channel Check
Out 7.2
Chromogenic Channel Check Out
Liquid Sensors Check Out 7.3
Autosampler Optic Sensors 7.4
Check Out
Rotor Cover Sensor Check Out 7.5.3
7.9.1
Rotor Exchange Module 182356-00 Check Software revision. 7.16.1
Board #4 Upgrade SW if required 7.16.2
Test for functionality. 3.3.7
REM Optic Sensors Check Out 7.5
Motors Board #5 182355-50 Test for functionality. 3.3.8
Photometric & 182355-60 Test for functionality. 3.3.9
Temperature Control Temperatures Check Out. 7.14
Board #6 No Adjustment Required.
PC104 Board 182355-20 Test for functionality. 3.3.4
Switching Power Supply 182356-60 Test for functionality. 3.3.10
Board No Adjustment Required.
Interface Board 182355-00 Test for functionality. 7.13
Fan control Board 182356-90 Test for functionality. 7.14
LCD Touch Screen 069454-18 Test for functionality.
Control Board Calibrate Touch Screen if
required 7.12
Liquid Level Detection 182356-40 Test for functionality. 7.4.1
Board No Adjustment Required.

5 Installation & Maintenance
This section provides information related to the Instrument installation, as

recommendation for the unpacking and the various set-up procedures necessary to put
the system in working condition, as well as Operator maintenance procedures.
Sub-section detailing on Instrument cleaning and decontamination procedures, plus
shut down and shipment precautions complete this section.
Following are the specific section with the relevant procedures.
5.1 Installation
5.2 Maintenance
5.3 Shut down & Shipment precautions
WARNING !
BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS EXIST. Avoid touching, with bare hands, any parts
of the system which may have come in contact with potentially infectious fluids.
ALWAYS wear gloves when performing any type of Maintenance/Service action
on this area.
As a reminder for the technical personnel, the above warning is also directly shown in
those sub-sections describing the maintenance / cleaning actions on the fluidic lines of
the Instrument.

Installation & Maintenance
5.1 Installation
This section contains all the information necessary for install, set-up and put in
working conditions the ACL 9000 system.
Before attempting the installation of the ACL 9000 system in the laboratory, inspect
the site with laboratory personnel to identify the desired location for the system and to
insure that the environment meets all the requirements for its successful installation.
In addition ensure that the Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit P/N 97580-50 and the
Chromogenic Optic Test Kit P/N 97579-50 together with the Temperature Probe P/N
70954-00 are available.
Following are the specific sub-sections.
5.1.1 Site requirements

5.1.2 Unpacking and inspection
5.1.3 Mounting Instrument parts
5.1.4 First turn on cycle
5.1.5 Instrument set-up
5.1.6 Performance tests
5.1.7 ACL 9000 Functionality Check List
Note: The ACL 9000 system must only be installed either by IL personnel or IL
authorised personnel.
5.1.1 Site requirement
Following are the specific paragraph with the required condition to install the ACL
9000 system.
5.1.1.a Ambient condition

5.1.1.b Space requirements
5.1.1.c Electrical requirements
5.1.1.a Ambient Condition
The instrument will function correctly in an ambient temperature of 15-32 C (59 F to

89 F) with a relative humidity of up to 85% (non-condensing).
In accordance with the IEC regulations no instrument failures will occur in presence of
short-term ambient temperature as low as 5 C or as high as 40 C.
The instrument should be positioned in an area free from dust, fumes, vibrations and
excessive variations of temperature.

5.1.1.b Space requirements
Following are the external dimensions and the weight of the ACL 9000 analyser.
Height at display level 60 cm 23.6inches

Height of analysis surface 27 cm 10.6 inches
Width (including LCD) 100 cm39.4 inches
Depth 60 cm 23.6 inches
Weight 63 Kg 139 lbs.
The heat generated by the instrument during normal operation is exhausted from the
bottom, in the front-right and left side of the unit.
Sufficient space must be allowed around the instrument to permit circulation of air for
cooling.
The instrument must be positioned so that a waste tube can be easily connected on its
left side.
If the operator wishes to work from a sitting position in front of the system, leg-space
should be provided under the front of the instrument.
5.1.1.c Electrical requirements
Voltage
The instrument has been designed to operate correctly with variations of 10% on the
nominal line voltage and with line frequencies between 50-60 Hz.
The instrument has a power supply that can operate from 100 to 240 V and it
automatically switches to the line voltage required.
Warning:
Check that the nominal line voltage in the laboratory is compatible with the label on the
rear of the instrument as shown in the table below.
Value as shown on the label Values of line voltage for

Normal function
100 240 V 100, 110, 115, 120, 125 Vac 10%
220, 230, 240 Vac 10%
Power Consumption
Check that the line is capable of supplying 350 VA.
Note: The average power consumption is about 350 VA, but peak loads or current
surges may exceed this value when turning the instrument on and during the
temperature warm-up.

Line Frequency
The instrument will function at any frequency between 50-60 Hz.

The power cord provided with the system is specifically designed for it and should not
be substituted for another one.
The cord plugs into the Power Entry socket as shown in the figure below.
The Power Entry module includes the ON/OFF switch too.
Fuse
The fuses are enclosed in the compartment to the right of the Power Entry socket.
Fuse has to meet the specification 6.3 A 250 V.
Following are reported in the figure the Power Entry and Fuse box removal.

Interface ports
The instrument is provided with 7 connectors, located on the rear, which are
associated with 7 relevant devices.
Following are the connectors and the relevant devices.
Connectors Connectors names Devices

position
1 Bar Code External Bar Code Reader (Optional)
2 Host Host Computer (Optional)
3 Mouse Standard PC Serial Mouse (Optional)
4 Modem Modem (Optional)
5 Ethernet Ethernet (Optional)
6 Parallel Printer Parallel Printer (Optional)
7 Keyboard Standard PC Keyboard (Always present)
5.1.2 Unpacking and inspection
Before unpacking the boxes containing the ACL 9000 and accessories, visually inspect
them to verify that there has been no damage done during shipping and handling.
In case of damage notify the carrier and your IL Representative immediately.
Remove the box containing the rotors and the Start-up kit. Using the Start-up kit list
included in the box, confirm that all the components are present.
Remove the instrument and place it on the working surface.
Remove the adhesive tape used for transport from the various parts.
Note: Two people should lift the instrument using the space below the unit at the front
and at the back as shown on the figure below.

In the figure below are highlighted the instrument carrying points

5.1.3 Mounting Instrument parts
This sub-section provides information about the parts that have to be mounted on the
Instrument before switch it on.
Waste tube
Connect the waste tube to the fitting on the bottom left hand side of the Instrument.
Cut the tube to suitable length to fit into the waste container which must be situated
below the instrument waste outlet port, as shown in the figures below.
Note: The horizontal section of the tube should be kept as short as possible and the
free end should not be immersed in the liquid waste container.
CAUTION !
The liquid waste from the instrument is to be considered contaminated and

should be disposed of according to the waste management procedures of the
laboratory and in compliance with local regulations (see also NCCLS GP25-A,
Vol. 13 No. 22: Clinical Laboratory Waste Management, Dec. 1993).
In the figure below are reported the Waste tube connection and waste container proper
position.

Rinse, Sample and Reagent Accessories
Verify that the Needles Waste-Rinse reservoir is placed in its appropriate position.
Fit the appropriate Sample Tray on its corresponding support.
Fit the reagent adapters in their appropriate positions, as shown in the figure below.
Following are the 3 colour coded reagent adapters available for the reagent positions
R1 to R8.
Adapter Colour Reagent Vials

Grey 10 mL vials requiring magnetic stirrer
Light Blue 10 mL vials not requiring magnetic stirrer
Dark Blue 4 mL vials not requiring magnetic stirrer
Place 4 magnetic stirrers inside the reagent vials in reagent positions R1 to R4.
Reagent Adapters for the R1-R8 positions
Different vial adapters are used for the additional positions on the Sample Tray.

In the figure below are reported the Reagent Adapters for the Sample Tray A1-A10
positions.
Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle
Place the 1 litre bottle of Wash-Reference Emulsion in the appropriate position at the
back of the dilutors. Make sure that the bottle cap is closed.
Make sure that the connectors of the Reference Emulsion Sensor and of the Liquid
Level Detection Cable are properly plugged on the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Positioning of the Wash-Reference Emulsion Bottle

Electro-Valve / Needle Block connection
Verify that the two fluidic tubes from the Electro-Valve in the Dilutor Assy to the
Needles Block are tightly connected.
Note: The tube from the left hand Electro-Valve fits into the lower position on the
Needles Block (internal Needle, Reagent). The tube from the right hand Electro-Valve
fits into the upper position on the Needles Block (external needle, Sample).
Display Assembly
Positioning as wished the Display Assembly using the appropriate lever on the right
hand side of the Instrument, as shown in the figure below.
Positioning of the Display Assembly
External Bar-Code Reader (Optional Feature)
Connect the External Bar-Code Reader to its port (Bar Code port) in the rear panel.
External Printer (Optional Feature)
Connect the External Printer to its port (Parallel Printer port) in the rear panel.

5.1.4 First turn on cycle
Before turning the Instrument on, check that the line voltage setting of the laboratory
is in accordance with the Instrument label.
Switch the Instrument on using the Power Switch on the Power Entry.
The system initialises the Instrument with a series of electronics and mechanics self-
checks. During this initialisation check that the Sample Arm, the Rotor Arm and the
Rotor Cover may be free to move without obstruction.
Following are some of messages showed during the System Init phase.
ACL Starting. Please wait
Checking DatabaseCheck Ok. Continuing Init.
The Init System phase continue with a progress bar in a window where is wrote
Init System in Progress. Please Wait.
When the progress bar is full and all the sequence of self-checks is ended, then the
Login window appears.
- Touching the USER window it goes in reverse mode.

- Press Del (Delete Key) on the main Keyboard, the window becomes empty.
- Type the word Service (with capital S).
- Touching the PASSWORD window it goes in reverse mode.
- Type the word ACL fix (with capital ACL) then confirm touching V.
The system shows the main Analytical Menu.
Touch Utility on the Main Menu Bar then the Software and the Software
Identification option. Checks that in the SW Identification screen all the software
have been the last revision. The last software revision is also present in the Instrument
Start Up Kit.
Check for Magnetic Stirrer bar rotation in the R1 R4 reagents positions.
Note: Any temperature and liquid level sensors warning may be present. In this case
the yellow Warning button on the Tool Bar is active.
Touch Setup on the Main Menu Bar then the Date/Time option. Choose the date
format and set the current date and time. Press V to accept.
Mounting (if needed) the Needles Block and then perform/verify the Needle Position
procedure as described in the sub-section 7.7.4.

Select Diagnostic from the Main Menu Bar and click the Priming option.
The following Priming screen is displayed during the priming cycle:
During the Priming cycle check that the number of air bubbles in the dilutor chambers
is reduced to a minimum. If necessary, pinch the chamber outlet tubes while the piston
is descending and releases them before the piston reaches bottom dead point. Repeat
the Priming cycle if necessary.
If in the end of the Priming the message SENSOR FAIL in the Warning area is
displayed, the priming cycle must be repeated.
Check that there are no blockages or leaks in the fluid path and that the liquid is
flowing smoothly from the bottle to the dilutors and from the dilutors to the needles.
Check that the discharge of liquid from the Wash/Rinse Reservoir to the Instrument
outlet and then to the liquid waste container is not impaired.
Check the Air Cooling System. Verify that the 2 Instrument Fans in the right hand side
of the instrument are operating properly as the 2 Secondary Fans on the left hand side.
Locate the ventilation filter slider on the right side of the instrument and verify also
that the filter is clean.

Before check the Temperatures wait until all the start up temperature warnings have
disappeared, then enter Diagnostic on the Main Menu Bar and select the
Temperature Control option, which will open the Temperature Control screen.
As the temperature is continuously checked the screen is constantly refreshed showing

a blink effect. The temperature should be within the following ranges for each area (as
described in the section 3.6).
Rotor Holder 38 to 39 C
Peltier 10 to 16 C
Rotor Transport 34 to 40 C
Rotor Stack 34 to 40 C

5.1.5 Instrument Setup
The purpose of this sub-section is to verify that all the main Setup option has been
already set or otherwise to help the customer to make his owner setup.
Select Setup from the Main Menu Bar then set the following options.
System Configuration
Patient Database listing
QC Database listing
Reflex Status
Current language
Sample Tray type
Sensor Enable
HW enable
Date / Time
Unit
5.1.6 Performance tests
The following test, which we recommend be carried out at the installation, check the
precision and the linearity of the two Optic Channel as well as the precision and the
accuracy of the dilutors.
Perform a Priming cycle then check the Optic Channel precision and accuracy as
described in the sub-sections 7.2.2 (for Coagulimetric) and 7.3.2 (for Chromogenic).
Perform a Priming cycle then check the Dilutors precision as described in the sub-
section 7.8.1 (for Coagulimetric and Chromogenic Channel).
Perform a Priming cycle then carry out the PT-FIB calibration cycle as described in the
Operators Manual.

5.1.7 ACL 9000 Functionality Check List
Following is the ACL 9000 Functionality Check List that is not strictly related to the
instrument installation phase. This may be useful in any situation where a general check
out of the instrument is required.
Test Name of the Tests Check

Number Mark
1 Check Air Filter
2 Check Waste line efficiency
3 Check Magnetic Stirrer Bars rotation
4 Check System Configuration
5 Check Software Revision
6 Verify Autosampler / BCR test
Container presence
Bar Code Labels identification
7 Verify Liquid Level Detection sensors
Wash-Reference Emulsion sensor
Needles Block sensors
8 Verify Rotor Exchange Module functionality
R.E.M. SA-SL-RH Test
Rotor Waste Full & Presence sensors
9 Check Temperatures
10 Verify Optic Channels (Coag. & Chrom.)
Offsets
Gains
Curves
405 Filter test
Fibre adjustment test
11 Perform Dilutor test
Coagulimetric
Chromogenic
12 Perform PT-FIB (Optional)
Calibration
Test

5.2 Maintenance
In order to keep the ACL 9000 analyser in optimal operating condition its recommend
that the following procedures be carried out by a trained operator at the frequency
specified.
The Maintenance subsection of the Diagnostic menu allows the user to access and
record dates and notes related to the performance of specific maintenance operations.
If any maintenance action is not performed within the recommended period then the
relevant line will appear in red.
Following are the specific sub-section.
5.2.1 Daily Maintenance

5.2.2 Weekly Maintenance
5.2.3 Bi-Weekly Maintenance
5.2.4 Monthly Maintenance
5.2.5 Yearly Maintenance
5.2.6 As needed Maintenance
5.2.7 Maintenance schedule
WARNING !
on this area.

5.2.1 Daily Maintenance
At the beginning and at the end of each working day perform a Priming cycle to ensure
the complete removal of all sample or reagent residual along the fluidic paths.
While the priming cycle is in progress, the operator should visually inspect three items:
That number of bubbles in the Dilutor Chamber reduces to minimum. If bubbles are
still present, pinch the chamber outlet tubes while the piston is descending and
releases them before the piston reaches the bottom dead center. Repeat the priming
cycle as needed until all bubbles are gone.
That there are no blockages or leaks in the liquid flow path and the liquid is
flowing smoothly from reservoir to dilutors and from dilutors to needles.
That there is free flow of the liquid waste from the washing chamber to the
instrument outlet tube and then to the waste container (check the liquid level in the
waste container).
Note: The Instrument is provided of sensors to detect the availability of Wash

Reference Emulsion as well as new and used rotors. In order to start the working day
with the maximum of Instrument autonomy its advisable to empty the Rotor Waste
Container from used rotors, fill the Rotor Stack with brand new rotors and check the
level of the Wash Reference Emulsion in the bottle.

5.2.2 Weekly Maintenance
The weekly preventive maintenance for the ACL consists in cleaning all the key
instrument areas which normally come in contact with sample and reagents and
therefore accumulate residues that will, if allowed to build up, impair the instrument
functionality and affect the tests results. The parts / areas to be cleaned are:
Instrument exposed surfaces.

The Needle Block.
The Rinse / Waste reservoir.
WARNING !
on this area.
Instrument exposed surfaces
Wipe down all exposed surfaces of the analyser body, the inside of the Autosampler
compartment and the Rotor compartment (excluding the rotor holder) using a cloth
soaked in a 0.1 N Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) solution (IL Cleaning Solution P/N 98317-
00). Rinse using a cloth soaked in distilled water. Wipe dry.
The Needle Block
Place 2 glass vials with 4 mL of 0.1 N HCl solution in reagent positions R6 and R7
Click the Diagnostic button on the Main menu bar and select the Cleaning option of
the Diagnostic submenu to display the Cleaning screen.
In this screen the operator defines the configuration of the cleaning operation,
according to the needs of the instrument.
Clicking the Start button starts the cleaning cycle and opens a window displaying a bar
that moves to show the elapsed time of the procedure.
The Rinse / Waste reservoir
Remove the Rinse / Waste reservoir, wash it thoroughly with 0.1N HCl solution (IL
Cleaning Solution P/N 98317-00) and rinse it with distilled water.

5.2.3 Bi-Weekly Maintenance
The rotor holder and the optical path components located in the analysis area must be
cleaned every two weeks under normal instrument use.
WARNING !
on this area.
Press the Open/Close Cover icon to open the Rotor Holder Cover.
Proceed as follows using the figure below as a reference:
Using a cotton tip applicator moistened with distilled water, clean all 20 holes in the
Rotor Holder and the surfaces of the Channels sensors and fibres. Use a clean, dry
cotton tip applicator to remove all moisture from these areas.

5.2.4 Monthly Maintenance
Check and clean the Air Filter
In order to check and clean the analyser air filter, it must first be removed from its
location on the right side of the instrument. The filter slides out when pulled after
inserting a finger in the holder slot (see figure below).
Check the filter: if it is dirty or blocked, clean it with compressed air or by washing it
in water and blowing it dry. Do not place a wet filter into its position.
If the filter appears damaged, it should be replaced. Insert the clean or new Air Filter
back in its holder.

5.2.5 Yearly Maintenance
The yearly preventive maintenance for the ACL consists in replacing the wear
expandable parts.
Replace the Air Filter

Replace the sample and reagent tubes
Replace the Needle Block (see sub-section 5.2.6)
Replace the waste tube
Replace the Rinse/Waste Reservoir
WARNING !
on this area.
5.2.6 As needed Maintenance
WARNING !
on this area.
Waste Line Cleaning Procedure
The waste line cleaning procedure is performed to prevent formation of clots or to

clean any possible blockages (due to clotting) in the waste line. The frequency with
which this procedure should be done depends on the daily workload.
Materials / Tools needed: - 20 mL plastic syringe

- 20 cm of PVC tube, 4 mm ID, 6 mm OD.
- 20 mL of distilled water.
1 Remove the needle from the plastic syringe (if necessary), and fit the PVC tube
on the end on the syringe (the tubes dimensions must be such that it will fit
onto the syringe on one end and into the waste line at the other end).
2 Fill the syringe with distilled water.
3 Remove the Rinse / Waste Reservoir and clean it if necessary (refer to Section
5.2.2).

4 Insert the free end of the PVC tube into the waste line, carefully inject the
distilled water into the waste line and check that the liquid flows out from the
external waste line of the instrument to the waste container.
5 Repeat the procedure several times to ensure removal of any potential blockage
then replace the Rinse / Waste reservoir.
Cleaning of Sample Spillage
In case of sample / reagent spillage wipe using a clean cloth or cotton tip applicator
soaked in a 0.1N HCl solution (IL Cleaning Solution P/N 98317-00). Follow with
distilled water and dry with a clean cloth or cotton tip applicator.
In case of sample / reagent spillage in the Autosampler or in the Rotor Holder
compartment, it may be required to clean also the 2 sensors in the Autosampler and the
two optical paths in the analysis area (see sub-section 5.2.3).
Needles Block replacing and positioning
Press the Open/Close Cover icon to open the Rotor Cover.

Click Diagnostic on the Main menu bar and select Needles Position. The Sample
Arm moves over the Rotor Holder.
Loosen the white knob on the back of the Sample Arm, disconnect the tubing and the
Liquid Sensor Cable and remove the Needle Block.
Insert the new Needle Block, connect the sensor cable and the two tubing and position
the block higher than the arms top surface.
Follow the Needles Block Assy positioning procedure as described in the sub-section
7.7.4.

Needles Block decontamination procedure
This sub-section describes the procedure to decontaminate the ACL Needles Block.
Its recommended after using the system to test a highly infectious sample and as a
general precaution to prevent and eliminate potential bacterial contamination.
The use of the ACL system for the analysis of known or suspected highly infectious
samples, should be followed by careful disinfecting of the instrument surfaces and parts
which have been in contact with the samples. The disinfecting agent used to perform
the procedure indicated below is a 1:8 dilution of IL Cleaning Agent P/N 98327-00,
which is a solution of sodium hypochlorite with a concentration of less than 0.625% of
available chlorine. The 1:8 diluted solution is prepared by mixing 1 part Cleaning
Agent with 7 parts of distilled water.
WARNING !
Use only IL Cleaning Agent (P/N 98327-00) diluted 1:8 with distilled water.
The use of undiluted IL Cleaning Agent may cause corrosion of metal parts.
Materials / Tools needed: - 2 glass 10 mL vials

- IL Cleaning Agent
P/N 98327-00
- Distilled water
Prepare approximately 16 mL of diluted Cleaning Agent solution (mix 2 part of IL

Cleaning Agent and 14 parts distilled water).
Load the ACL reagent position R6 and R7 with the 2 glass vials filled with 8 mL of the
prepared diluted Cleaning Agent solution
Press Diagnostic on the Main menu bar, select Cleaning and then press Start.
At the end of the cleaning cycle remove the vials in position R6 and R7 and perform a
Priming cycle.
Replace the external waste tube and the waste container.
CAUTION !
The discarded items must be placed in an appropriate container for further

incineration, according to proper local regulations.
In the case of suspected severe contamination, replace the tubing and discard the
old one in an appropriate container for further incineration, according to proper
local regulations

5.2.7 Maintenance schedule
Frequency Maintenance procedure
Daily At the beginning and at the end of each working day or once per shift,
carry out a priming cycle.
Empty the liquid waste container when needed.
Empty the rotors waste container when needed.
Fill the Rotor Stack with new rotors when needed.
Load a new bottle of Wash Reference Emulsion when needed.
Weekly Clean the exposed instrument surfaces, inside the Autosampler and the
analysis compartments (with the exception of the Rotor Holder).
Clean the Needles Block carrying out the dedicated cleaning cycle
Clean the Rinse / Waste Reservoir
Bi-Weekly Clean the analysis compartment optical parts with a cotton tip
applicator moistened with distilled water:
Clean the LED sensor surface
Clean the LED optic fibre surface
Clean the Halogen Lamp sensor filter surface
Clean the Halogen Lamp optic fibre glass surface
Clean the 20 holes of the Rotor Holder
Monthly Check the Air Filter
Yearly Replace the Air Filter
Replace the sample and reagent tubes
Replace the Needles Block
Replace the waste tube
Replace the Rinse/Waste Reservoir
As needed Clean the Waste line
Clean the sample spillage
Replace the Needles Block
Decontaminate the Needles Block
Note: A yearly Preventive Maintenance Kit P/N 190693-00 is available. Following is

the list of the materials content in the kit.
Item Name Part Number

1 Air Filter Assy 181812-71
2 Sample and Reagent Tubing, 1.5 m 073289-01
3 Waste Tube, 1.5 m 099095-03
4 Rinse/Waste Reservoir 181812-72
5 Needles Block Assembly 181108-43
6 Liquid Level Detection Cable 084869-12
7 Rotor Holder Snap 181102-10

5.3 Shut down & Shipment precautions

This section give some suggestions in case of long term shut down or shipment of the
instrument.
The following procedures describe how to prepare the ACL before a shut down or a
shipment.
5.3.1 Long term shut down

5.3.2 Shipment
5.3.1 Long term shut down
For long period of inactivity, more than one week, the following actions should be
carried out.
1 Perform a Priming cycle by selecting Priming in the Diagnostic menu.

2 Remove any container on board the instrument.
3 Empty the Rotor Waste Container.
4 Remove and close the Wash Reference Emulsion bottle.
5 Empty the fluidic tubes by performing another Priming cycle.
6 Close the Wash Reference Emulsion aspiration tube with adhesive tape.
7 Log-out and switch the instrument Off.
8 Empty and remove the waste tube and the waste container.
9 Disconnect the ACL system electrically from the main power, removing the
Power Cord from the rear of the instrument and from the main line.
10 Cover the instrument with a dust cover.
5.3.2 Shipment
In case of shipment, carry out the following actions.
1 Perform the actions suggested in the sub-section 5.3.1.

2 Remove the Needles Block, wash it with IL Cleaning Solution P/N 98317-00
and rinse with distilled water. Pack it separately.
3 Remove and pack separately also all the other accessories (Sample Tray,
Adapters, Keyboard etc).
4 Fix with adhesive tape all the parts that could be moving during the transport
(Sample Arm, Rotor Cover, Rotor Stack Cover, Rotor Waste Compartment
Panel etc).
5 Close with adhesive tape the waste outlet tube on the left side of the
instrument.
6 If the original packing is not available is recommended that a suitable box to
isolate the instrument from any external impact to be used (paying particular
attention to the Display Assembly). In this case pack all the accessories in
another box, separately.

6 Troubleshooting
This section is designed to provide at Service Engineer information about the error
messages displayed by the instrument as well as suggestions and tools to fix the
problem during the Instrument Troubleshooting.
6.1 Error Messages & Troubleshooting

6.2 Service Tools
6.3 Standard Tools
6.1 Error Messages and Troubleshooting

This section provides information about instrument error conditions and specific errors
displayed by the instrument.
Following are the specific sub-section for each category of problem.
6.1.1 System errors

6.1.2 Temperature errors
6.1.3 Mechanical errors
6.1.4 R.E.M. error
6.1.5 Optic errors
6.1.6 Acquisition errors
6.1.7 Liquid sensors errors
6.1.8 Operative error
6.1.9 Database errors
6.1.10 Sample identification errors
6.1.11 DMS errors
6.1.12 Analytical errors

Troubleshooting
6.1.1 System Errors
Following are provided information about problems related to the PC like system
present inside the instrument.
Unexpected Shut Down and Turn On problems.

Problems detected by the CPU Master Boards Bios.
Problems detected by the Main Program
Unexpected Shut Down and Turn On problems.
ERROR MEANING AND POSSIBLE CAUSES, PARTS TO BE

MESSAGES EFFECTS CHECKED OR REPLACED
Instrument At the Turn On Check that the SPS is not in Protection Mode
Turn On with the Instrument is (DL1 On).
Black Screen with Black Check the presence of all the output voltages on
Screen. the SPSs Test Point TP1 TP9 (w/o TP6 for
voltage +6VLAMP).
If the SPS is in protection Mode or output
voltages are less go to the error message
Instrument Shut Down for Voltage problem.
Replace the Display Cable.
Replace the Inverter Board.
Replace the LCD Video Board
Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Replace the Video Module.
Instrument The Instrument Turn Off the Instrument and verify the proper
Turn On with performs the Turn Display Cable connection on CN3 and CN6 in the
Touch Screen On cycle but the PC104 Board.
problem Touch Screen is Replace the Display Cable.
out of work. Replace the PC104 Board.
Replace the Touch Screen Control Board.
Replace the LCD video Board.
Replace the Display Assembly.
Instrument Unexpected Shut Turn Off the Instrument at least for 20 seconds.
Shut Down Down for a Short Check the Main fuses into the Power Entry.
for Voltage Circuit or for a Unplug the 5 Boards located in the Card
problem lowering of the Housing, CN12 on the CPU Master Board and
voltages on the then Turn On:
Switching Power Check for the presence of the output voltages on
Supply. the SPSs Test Point TP1 TP9 (w/o TP6 for
The SPS is in the voltage +6VLAMP).
Protection Mode If now the voltages are present then investigate
(DL1 On). for which load or Board in Card Housing is the
problem.
Else Turn Off the Instrument, unplug the 3

connectors on the Power (K1, K2 e K3) and

Turn On.
Now Check for the presence of the output
voltages on the SPSs Test Point TP1 TP9
(w/o TP6 for the voltage +6VLAMP).
If the voltages are present, then investigate for
which load or Interconnection Board is present
the Short Circuit.
Else replace the SPS Board.
Instrument Unexpected Shut Verify that the environment temperature doesnt
Shut Down Down for high exceed 40C.
for temperature on Verify that there is enough space around the
Temperature the Switching Instrument for the fans cooling.
problem Power Supplys Turn OFF the Main Switch and wait Instrument
thermistor (over cooling (about 15 minutes).
75 C). In the meanwhile check for the Air Filter cleaning
The SPS is in or replacement.
Protection Mode Now Turn On the Instrument and check that the
(DL1 On). Fans work correctly.
Check the presence of all the output voltages on
the SPSs Test Point TP1 TP9 (w/o TP6 for
voltage +6VLAMP); pay attention to the
+12VPW for the Fans.
Replace the SPS Board.
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board
#3)
Problems detected by the CPU Master Boards Bios.

Hard Disk During the Boot Verify that the HDD parameters are present in
Drive Failure phase the CPU the Bios configuration (No changes are required,
Master Boards only to check for possible parameters lost).
Bios detect a Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
problem on the Replace the Hard Disk Drive.
HDD.
Floppy Disk During the Boot Verify that the FDD parameters are present in the
Drive Failure phase the CPU Bios configuration (No changes are required,
Master Boards only to check for possible parameters lost).
Bios detect a Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
problem on the Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
FDD.

Troubleshooting
RAM During the Boot Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Memory phase the CPU
Failure Master Boards
Bios detect a
problem on the
RAM Memory.
Keyboard During the Boot Replace the Keyboard.
Failure phase the CPU Replace the Interface Board.
Master Boards Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Bios detect a Replace the Mother Board.
problem on the
Keyboard.
Problems detected by the Main Program

Warning: The Main Following the procedure in the sub-section
Error Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
opening file problem during the Master Software.
opening file. Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Error reading Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
file problem during the Master Software.
reading file. Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Error writing Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
to file problem during the Master Software.
writing to file. Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
Session Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
loading Error problem during the Master and of the Slave Software.
the loading of the Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
current session.
Warning: During the Following the procedure in the sub-section
Master communications 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Slave from the CPU the Master and of the Slave Software.
communicatio Master to the Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
n timeout Slave, the timeout Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Error is expired.
Warning:
Timeout
Expired

Warning:
Error parsing
loading
parameters
Warning: Invalid parameters Following the procedure in the sub-section
Invalid are detects, during 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
parameters the sending from the Master and of the Slave Software.
the CPU Master Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
to the Slave. Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Warning: Zip
/ Unzip Error
REM program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
download problem during the REM Software.
Error the Download of Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
the R.E.M Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Software.
Alarm: Slave The CPU Master Following the procedure in the sub-section
Absent doesnt find the 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Slave. the Slave Software.
Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Alarm: Slave The CPU Master Following the procedure in the sub-section
program not doesnt find the 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
loaded software on board the Slave Software.
of the Slave. Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Alarm: Flash The CPU Master Following the procedure in the sub-section
Memory detects a problem 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Error on the Flash the Slave Software.
Memory on the Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Slave Board.
Alarm: The Main Verify the Arcnet interconnection cable.
Arcnet program detects a Try also to use the connector CN4 (on the
Connection problem in the PC104 Board) and P7 (on the Slave Board).
Error communications Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
with the Slave Replace the PC104 Board.
through Arcnet.
Alarm: A/D
Converter
Error
Alarm: OI
Error

Troubleshooting
Alarm: Error The Main Following the procedure in the sub-section

Creating Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Window problem during the Master Software.
the creating of a Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
window for the
Operator
Interface graphic
program.
Alarm:
Timeout
Expired
Alarm:
Unknown
message
Alarm: Error
sending
message
Alarm: Error The Main Following the procedure in the sub-section
creating timer Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
problem during the Master Software.
the creating of a Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
timer.
Alarm: The Main Following the procedure in the sub-section
Master Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Slave message problem in the the Master Software.
has incorrect length of a Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
length message sent from
the CPU Master
to the Slave.
Alarm: The Main Following the procedure in the sub-section
Master Program detects a 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Slave message problem in the the Master Software.
has incorrect code of a message Replace the CPU Master Board (Board #1).
code sent from the
CPU Master to
the Slave.
6.1.2 Temperatures Errors

Warning: The Instrument is Wait the Rotor Holder warm up.
Incubation Turn On less then If after 30 minutes the Rotor Holder hasnt
temperature 30 minutes and achieves the right temperature (38-39 C) the
out of range the Rotor Holder error message becomes: Warning: Incubation
in startup is warming up. temperature out of range.
Warning: The Instrument is Verify the Rotor Holder movement assy:

Incubation Turn On more Verify, with a DVM that on the connector P148
temperature then 30 minutes is present the resistance of the thermistor (If its a
out of range and the Rotor Short Circuit or an Open Circuit verify the
Holder Brushes assy If the Brushes Assy is correct then
temperature is out read the thermistors resistance directly on the 2
of range 38-39 rings. If the thermistor is defective replace the
C. whole Rotor Holder movement Assy).
Verify on the connector P148 that the Heater
Coil isnt interrupted or the capacitor unsoldered.
Verify the Photometric and temperature control
Board (Board #6) functionality as described in
Verify the Photometer Interface Board.
Warning: The Instrument is Wait the Peltier 1 cooling.
Peltier 1 Turn On less then If after 30 minutes the Peltier 1 hasnt achieves
temperature 30 minutes and the right temperature (10-16 C) the error
out of range the Peltier 1 is message becomes: Warning: Peltier 1
in startup cooling. temperature out of range.
Warning: The Instrument is Verify the Peltier 1 assy:
Peltier 1 Turn On more Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
temperature then 30 minutes P126 is present the resistance of the thermistor
out of range and the Peltier 1 (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces
temperature is out the thermistor).
of range 10-16 Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
C. P126 is present also the resistance of the Peltier
Cell (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit
replaces the whole Peltier 1 Assy).
Verify the Modules Interconnection Board.
Warning: The Instrument is Wait the Peltier 2 cooling.
Peltier 2 Turn On less then If after 30 minutes the Peltier 2 hasnt achieves
temperature 30 minutes and the right temperature (10-16 C) the error
out of range the Peltier 2 is message becomes: Warning: Peltier 2
in startup cooling. temperature out of range.

Troubleshooting
Warning: The Instrument is Verify the Peltier 2 assy:

Peltier 2 Turn On more Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
out of range and the Peltier 2 (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces
temperature is out the thermistor).
of range 10-16 Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
C. P131 is present also the resistance of the Peltier
Cell (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit
replaces the whole Peltier 2 Assy).
Verify the Modules Interconnection Board.
Warning: The Instrument is Wait the Rotor Transport warm up.
Rotor Turn On less then If after 30 minutes the Rotor Transport hasnt
Transport 30 minutes and achieves the right temperature (34-40 C) the
temperature the Rotor error message becomes: Warning: Rotor
out of range Transport is Transport temperature out of range.
in startup warming up.
Warning: The Instrument is Verify the Rotor Transport assy:
Rotor Turn On more Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
Transport then 30 minutes P111 is present the resistance of the thermistor
temperature and the Rotor (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces
out of range Transport the Rotor Transport).
temperature is out Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
of range 34-40 P111 is present also the resistance of the Heating
C. Pad (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit
replaces the Rotor Transport).
Verify the REM Lower Interconnection Board.
Warning: The Instrument is Wait the Rotor Stack warm up.
Rotor Stack Turn On less then If after 30 minutes the Rotor Stack hasnt
temperature 30 minutes and achieves the right temperature (34-40 C) the
out of range the Rotor Stack is error message becomes: Warning: Rotor Stack
in startup warming up. temperature out of range.

Warning: The Instrument is Verify the Rotor Stack assy:

Rotor Stack Turn On more Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
out of range and the Rotor (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit replaces
Stack temperature the Rotor Stack).
is out of range 34- Verify, with a DVM, which on the connector
40 C. P117 is present also the resistance of the Heating
Pad (If its a Short Circuit or an Open Circuit
replaces the Rotor Stack).
Verify the REM Lower Interconnection Board.
Warning: The internal Verify that the environment temperature doesnt
Instrument temperature of the exceed 40C.
Temperature Instrument, Verify that there is enough space around the
Error detects by the Instrument for the fans cooling.
Switching Power Turn OFF the Main Switch and wait Instrument
Supplys cooling (about 15 minutes).
thermistor, In the meanwhile check for the Air Filter cleaning
reaches the or replacement.
critical Now Turn On the Instrument and check that the
temperature of 60 Fans work correctly.
C. Check the presence of all the output voltages on
If its reaches the the SPSs Test Point TP1 TP9 (w/o TP6 for
75 C then the voltage +6VLAMP); pay attention to the
SPS Board will +12VPW for the Fans.
enter in Replace the SPS Board.
Protection Mode Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board
and the whole #3).
Instrument Shut
Down (see
Instrument Shut
Down for
temperature).

Troubleshooting
Alarm: One of the Is possible remove the Alarms message and

Temperature Assemblys restore the normal situation only with a Log-Out,
Power off temperatures a Turn Off and after few seconds a Turn On.
reached a critical Now is possible investigate about the assembly
value or is OUT with the problem and perform the
OF RANGE since troubleshooting with the help of the Temperature
more then 15 Warnings message associated in this section.
minutes. If the problem is extended at all the temperatures
The Instrument then go in the A/D Converter test, check if all the
for protection values on the screen are ***** or -----, in this
purposes Turns case replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board
Off the (Board #3).
thermoregulation
system for the
Rotor Holder,
Peltier and/or
REMs Modules.
6.1.3 Mechanical Errors

Warning: The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Autosampler detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the Check for the plug in of the connectors P74 (for
Autosampler the motor) and P73 (for DCOS).
Motors Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
movement. the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.5.
Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Warning: The Instrument Replace the Magnetic Stirrer Motor 1.
Stirrer R1 detects a problem Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Error on the Magnetic Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Stirrer Motor 1
(Reagent Position
R1).
Stirrer Motor 2
(Reagent Position
R2).
Stirrer Motor 3
(Reagent Position

R3).
Stirrer Motor 4
(Reagent Position
R4).
Warning: The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P83 (for
Sample line detects a problem the motor) and P81 (for SCOS).
Dilutor Motor during the Sample Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
Error Dilutor Motors the SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
movement. Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Warning: The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P84 (for
Reagent line detects a problem the motor) and P82 (for SCOS).
Dilutor Motor during the Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
Error Reagent Dilutor the SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
Motors Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
movement. Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.
Sample Arm detects a problem movement.
Horizontal during the Sample Check for the plug in of the connectors P93 (for
Motor Error Arm Horizontal the motor) and P92 (for DCOS).
Vertical during the Sample Check for the plug in of the connectors P94 (for
Motor Error Arm Vertical the motor) and P91 (for DCOS).
Rotor Holder detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the Rotor Check for the plug in of the connectors P147
Holder Motors (for the motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
movement. Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Replace the Photometric and Temperatures
Control Board (Board #6).
Replace the Photometer Interface Board.

Troubleshooting

Rotor Cover detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the Rotor Check for the plug in of the connectors P144
Cover Motors (for the motor) and P143 (for DCOS).
the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.2;
pay attention to tension of the Cover movement
Belt.
Warning:
Home
Position not
found
Alarm: Motor
Phase and
Delay Error
Alarm: The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Autosampler detects a problem movement.
Motor Error during the Check for the plug in of the connectors P74 (for
Autosampler the motor) and P73 (for DCOS).
Alarm: The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P83 (for
Sample line detects a problem the motor) and P81 (for SCOS).
Dilutor Motor during the Sample Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
Error Dilutor Motors the SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
movement. Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
Alarm: The Instrument Check for the plug in of the connectors P84 (for
Reagent line detects a problem the motor) and P82 (for SCOS).
Dilutor Motor during the Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
Error Reagent Dilutor the SCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.6.
Motors Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
movement. Replace the Modules Interconnection Board.


Horizontal during the Sample Check for the plug in of the connectors P93 (for
Motor Error Arm Horizontal the motor) and P92 (for DCOS).
Vertical during the Sample Check for the plug in of the connectors P94 (for
Motor Error Arm Vertical the motor) and P91 (for DCOS).
Alarm: Rotor The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Holder Motor detects a problem movement.
Error during the Rotor Check for the plug in of the connectors P147
Holder Motors (for the motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
Alarm: Rotor The Instrument Check for mechanical obstruction during the
Cover Motor detects a problem movement.
Error during the Rotor Check for the plug in of the connectors P144
Cover Motors (for the motor) and P143 (for DCOS).
the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.2;
pay attention to tension of the Cover movement
Belt.

Troubleshooting
6.1.4 R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) Errors

Rotor Arm detects a problem movement.
Horizontal during the Rotor Check for the plug in of the connectors P104
Motor Error Arm Horizontal (for the motor) and P107 (for DCOS).
Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Replace the R.E.M. Lower Interconnection
Board.
Rotor Arm detects a problem movement.
Vertical during the Rotor Check for the plug in of the connectors P105
Motor Error Arm Vertical (for the motor) and P108 (for DCOS).
Board.
Rotor detects a problem movement.
Transport during the Rotor Check for the plug in of the connectors P103
Motor Error Transport (for the motor) and P106 (for DCOS).
Board.
Warning: The Instrument Check the Electro-Magnet on the Rotor Arm.
Rotor Arm detects a problem Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Electromagne in the Electro- Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection
t Error Magnet located Board.
on the Rotor
Arm.
Warning: The Instrument Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Rotor Arm detects a problem Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection
Electromagne in the driver Board.
t Circuit circuit for the Check the Electro-Magnet on the Rotor Arm.
Error Electro-Magnet
located on the
Rotor Arm.
Warning: The Instrument Check the Upper Electro-Magnet of the Rotor
Rotor Stack detects a problem Stack.
Upper in the Upper Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Electromagne Electro-Magnet of Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection
t Error the Rotor Stack. Board.


Rotor Stack detects a problem Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection
Upper in the driver Board.
Electromagne circuit for the Check the Upper Electro-Magnet of the Rotor
t Circuit Upper Electro- Stack.
Error Magnet of the
Rotor Stack.
Warning: The Instrument Check the Lower Electro-Magnet of the Rotor
Rotor Stack detects a problem Stack.
Lower in the Lower Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Electromagne Electro-Magnet of Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection
t Error the Rotor Stack. Board.
Rotor Stack detects a problem Replace the R.E.M. Upper Interconnection
Lower in the driver Board.
Electromagne circuit for the Check the Lower Electro-Magnet of the Rotor
t Circuit Lower Electro- Stack.
Error Magnet of the
Rotor Stack.
Warning: The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section
REM CPU detects a problem 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Error in the CPU on the the REM Software.
R.E.M. Board. Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
Warning: The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section
REM detects a problem 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
communicatio during the the REM Software.
n Error communications Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
from the CPU on Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
the R.E.M. Board
to the CPU on the
Slave Board.
Warning: The Instrument Its a generic message, typically its associated to
REM detects a generic another error (see the Warning List and the File
execution problem during Error History); after the solution of other
Error the movements of problem if this error message don disappear then
the REMs Log-Out, Turn Off and On the Instrument.
assembles and/or Following the procedure in the sub-section
Electro-Magnet. 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
the REM Software.
Replace the R.E.M. Upper or Lower

Troubleshooting
Alarm: REM The REMs CPU Following the procedure in the sub-section
electric Error detects a Short 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
Circuit on one, or the REM Software.
more then one, Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
driver circuit on Check in the File Error History for the presence
Board. of other alarm message associated.
So, for protection Replace the R.E.M. Upper or Lower
purposes, the Interconnection Board.
REMs CPU
Turns Off the
+12VPW, which
power the Board.
Alarm: REM The REMs CPU Check the presence of the +12VPWR on the TP2
voltage out of detects a problem of the Switching Power Supply Board.
range on the +24VPW Replace the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
generated on the
REM Board.
6.1.5 Optic Errors

Warning: Analysis aborted Check the Halogen Lamp.
Halogen for an unexpected Assess Service Program and check the
Lamp Error Halogen Lamps +6VLAMP voltage on the TP6 of the SPS; if
Turn Off or a required adjust this voltage through RV2.
lowering of the Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board
+6VLAMP #3).
voltage on the
Switching Power
Supply.
Warning: No The Instrument Check the presence of Wash-R Emulsion or
Wash-R detects a problem Distilled Water in the Rotors cuvettes.
Emulsion / on the Optical
Optical Reference or the Cleans the Rotor Holders holes and all the optic
Channel Optical Channels parts in the analysis compartment (for both the
Error during the Optic Channels), using cotton tips with Distilled
Analysis. Water.
Following are the
checks performed: Check Out and Adjust the Optic Channels value:
Coagulimetric Channel
1) During the OFFSET: 2 20 mV.
rotor verification: GAIN: with Wash-R Emulsion in cuv. #20
- OFFSET 2.6 2.8 V.
Coagulimetric Ch
<50mV. Chromogenic Channel
- OFFSET OFFSET: 2 20 mV.

Chromogenic Ch GAIN: with Distilled Water in cuv. #6

<100 mV. 7.9 8.1 V.
Check also that the Chromogenic Channels value
2) During the reads with the Wash-R Emulsion in the cuv. #6 is
Acquisition: <3.5 V. If fail this last verify then replace the
- Coagulimetric Optical Filter at 405 nm, located over the
Channel s values, Chromogenic Sensor inside the Rotor Cover.
reads on the
Wash-R Check the light sources efficiency.
Emulsion, within
range 1.5 4.0 V.
- Chromogenic
Channels values,
reads on the
distilled water,
within range 5.0 -
9.5 V.
- Chromogenic
Channels values,
reads on the
Wash-R Emulsion
<3.5V.
6.1.6 Acquisition Errors

Warning: Analysis aborted Check for the plug in of the connectors P147
Rotor Holder for an unexpected (for the motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Motor fail of the Rotor Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
blocked Holder Motor the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
during during the Replace the Photometric and Temperatures
acquisition acquisition. Control Board (Board #6).

Troubleshooting
Home for an unexpected (for the motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Position not fail, during the Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
found during acquisition, of the the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
acquisition DCOS associated Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
to the Rotor Replace the Photometric and Temperatures
Holder. Control Board (Board #6).
#3).
Unexpected for an unexpected (for the motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
cuvette fail, during the Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
interruption acquisition, of the the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
DCOS associated Replace the Motors Board (Board #5).
to the Rotor Replace the Photometric and Temperatures
Holder. Control Board (Board #6).
#3).
Warning: Analysis aborted Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board
Unexpected for an unexpected #3).
ADC A/D Converter Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
interrupt Interrupt, during
the acquisition.
Warning:
Null optical
reference
ADC error in
acquisition
Warning:
Null reference
ADC error in
acquisition
Warning: Analysis aborted Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board
Data for an unexpected #3).
transmission error of the data Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
error during transmission,
acquisition during the
acquisition.

Rotor Holder for an unexpected (for the motor) and P142 (for DCOS).
Motor error fail of the Rotor Check for the functionality of the Motor and of
during Holder Motor the DCOS as described in the sub-section 7.6.1.
acquisition during the Replace the Photometric and Temperatures
acquisition. Control Board (Board #6).
Warning:
Acquisition
stopped
Warning: Analysis aborted Check for the functionality of the Rotor Cover
Rotor Cover for an unexpected Sensor as described in the sub-section 7.9.1; pays
opened opening of the attention to the correct positioning of the sensor.
during Rotor Cover Replace the Rotor Cover Sensor.
acquisition during the Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board
acquisition. #3).
Replace the Photometric Interface Board.
6.1.7 Liquid Sensors Error

Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Liquid in
Sample Low detects, during the the Position xxx.
Level in loading, a Low Perform any Priming cycles and then check for
Position xxx Level on the air bubbles along the fluidic path.
Sample located in Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.1,
the position xxx. checks for the functionality of the Needles
Sensor; pays attention to the correct positioning
of the Needles Block.
Replace the Needles Block.
Replace the LLD Board.
Replace the LLD Cable.
Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Liquid
Liquid Id detects, during the Id in the Position xxx.
Low Level in loading, a Low Perform any Priming cycles and then check for
Position xxx Level on the air bubbles along the fluidic path.
for test yyy Liquid Id Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.1,
located in the checks for the functionality of the Needles
position xxx and Sensor; pays attention to the correct positioning
used for the test of the Needles Block.
yyy. Replace the Needles Block.
Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the
Mandatory detects, during the Mandatory Liquid Id in the Position xxx.

Troubleshooting
Liquid Id loading, a Low Perform any Priming cycles and then check for
Low Level in Level on the air bubbles along the fluidic path.
Position xxx Mandatory Liquid Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.6.5,
for test yyy Id located in the checks for the functionality of the Needles
position xxx and Sensor; pays attention to the correct positioning
used for the test of the Needles Block.
yyy. Replace the Needles Block.
Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
Wash-R detects a Low Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
Emulsion Level on the Check also the horizontally of the Wash-R
Low Level Wash-R Emulsions bottle and for the correct insertion of
Emulsion. the cap sensor.
Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
checks for the functionality of the Wash-R
Emulsion Sensor.
Warning: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
Wash-R detects, during a Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
Emulsion not analytical Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
absent cycle, that the checks for the functionality of the Wash-R
Wash-R Emulsion Emulsion Sensor.
is absent. Replace the Reference Emulsion Sensor.
Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (board
#3).
Replace the Mother Board
Warning: The Instrument Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.1,
Sample detects a problem checks for the functionality of the Needles
sensor Error on the Sample Sensor.
lines Liquid Replace the Needles Block.
Sensor. Replace the LLD Board.
#3).


Reagent detects a problem checks for the functionality of the Needles
sensor Error on the Reagent Sensor.
lines Liquid Replace the Needles Block.
Sensor. Replace the LLD Board.
#3).
Warning: The Wash-R Solves the problem associated to the Wash-R
Wash-R Emulsion Sensor Sensor, then enable the sensor in the System
sensor Off is disabled in the Configurations menu to restore the normal
System condition.
Configurations
menu.
Warning: The Sample lines Solves the problem associated to the Sample
Sample Sensor is disabled Sensor, then enable the sensor in the System
sensor Off in the System Configurations menu to restore the normal
Configurations condition.
menu.
Warning: The Reagent Solves the problem associated to the Reagent
Reagent lines Sensor is Sensor, then enable the sensor in the System
sensor Off disabled in the Configurations menu to restore the normal
System condition.
Configurations
menu.
Alarm: The Instrument Check the presence and the level of the Wash-R
Wash-R detects, during an Emulsion (at least over 100 mL).
Emulsion analysis, that the Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.2,
absent Wash-R Emulsion checks for the functionality of the Wash-R
is absent. Emulsion Sensor.
The analysis Replace the Reference Emulsion Sensor.
aborts. Replace the Needles & Wash-R Sensor
#3).

Troubleshooting
6.1.8 Operative Errors

Warning: The Instrument Check in the Optic Sensor test the functionality
Rotor Waste detects, before the and the mechanical assemble of the Rotor Waste
Door open Rotor unloading, Presence Switch.
and/or Rotor that the Rotor Replace the REM Lower Interconnection.
Waste Waste door is Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Container open and/or the
absent Rotor Waste is
missing.
Rotor Waste detects, before the checks for the functionality of the Waste Full
Full Rotor unloading, Sensor.
that the Rotor Replace the REM Lower Interconnection.
Waste is full. Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Warning: The Instrument Check that the External Printer is connected and
Printer detects, before the On-Line.
failure document Check in the Interface Setup that the transmission
printing, that the protocol selected is consistent (ex. ESC/P2).
External Printer Following the procedure in the section 7.13,
fails or is not checks for the functionality of the External
ready to print. Printer.
Replace the Interface Board.
Replace the CPU Master Board.
Warning: The Instrument Check for the presence of the liquids required in
Cleaning not detects, during the the positions R6 and R7.
performed cleaning cycle, Following the procedure in the sub-section 7.4.1,
that the cleanings checks for the functionality of the Needles
liquid is missing in Sensor.
the positions R6 Replace the Needles Block.
and/or R7. Replace the LLD Board.
#3).
Replace the Mother Board.
Warning: The Instrument Check for the functionality of the Rotor Cover
Forced open detects, during Sensor as described in the sub-section 7.9.1; pays
Rotor Cover loading or attention to the correct positioning of the sensor.
incubation, that Replace the Rotor Cover Sensor.
the Rotor Cover Replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board
is open. #3).
Replace the Photometric Interface Board.
Warning: The Instrument Check for the functionality of the Rotor Stack
Rotor Stack detects that the Cover Sensor in the Optic Sensor test.
Cover open Rotor Stack Check for the presence of the Magnet.

Cover is open. Replace the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor.

Replace the REM Upper Interface Board.
Replace the REM Board (Board #4).
Warning: The Instrument Check for the presence of the Floppy Disk in the
Floppy Not detects that the Floppy Disk Drive.
Present Floppy Disk is Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
missing. Replace the Cable of the Floppy Disk Drive.
Warning: The Instrument Check that the Floppy Disk in the Floppy Disk
Floppy disk detects, during a Drive is not write protect.
write writing operation, Replace the Floppy Disk.
protected that the Floppy Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Disk is write Replace the Cable of the Floppy Disk Drive.
protected. Replace the CPU Master Board.
Warning: The Instrument Check that the Floppy Disk in the Floppy Disk
Floppy disk detects, during a Drive is not full.
full writing operation, Replace the Floppy Disk.
that the Floppy Replace the Floppy Disk Drive.
Disk is full. Replace the Cable of the Floppy Disk Drive.
Warning: During the Following the procedure in the sub-section
Timeout loading of the 7.16.2, make the Upload and then the Upgrade of
expired analytical cycle the Master and of the Slave Software.
during the timeout is Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
loading expired.
6.1.9 Database Errors

Warning: The Instrument Restore normal conditions performing a Backup
Database full detects that the (Recommended) and a Delete of the Patient data.
Database is full.
Warning:
Error
restoring
Database
Warning:
Error backing
up Database
Alarm: Error
opening
Database
Alarm:
Check
Database
error

Troubleshooting
Alarm:
Database
Error
6.1.10 Samples Identification Errors

Warning: No There is not Check for the consistency between Samples ID
Test to consistency on the Sample Tray and the programmed
Perform between Samples Loadlists.
ID and
programmed
Loadlists.
Warning: The Barcode Check for the presence of a good label on the
Error in Reader cant Samples and the correct position.
Samples recognise one or Check that the Labels are as specification
Identification more Sample ID required (see Appendix B).
Labels. Check for the correct assemble and alignment of
the Internal Barcode Reader.
Check for the cleaning and the transparency of
the plastic slide in front to the BCR.
Warning: The Instrument Replace the Internal Barcode Reader.
Internal Bar detects the Replace the Slave Board (Board #2).
Code Reader Internal Bar Code Replace the Module Interconnection Board.
Error Reader fail.
6.1.11 DMS Errors

Warning: Informative Verify the functionality of the Host
Host Com.: Message. communication serial line as described in the
ASTM Error section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.
Bad Test section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Code the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.


Too Many section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Test the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.
Unknown section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Test Code the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.
Host Not section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Responding the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.
Host section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Required the Appendix A Host Communication
Stop Protocol.
Format Error section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Protocol.
Test Order section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
without the Appendix A Host Communication
Sample ID Protocol.
Sample ID section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
without Test the Appendix A Host Communication
Order Protocol.
Invalid section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Sample ID the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.
Used Sample section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
ID the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.

Troubleshooting

Database Full section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Protocol.
Sent Different section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Sample ID the Appendix A Host Communication
Protocol.
Invalid section 7.13. If the HW pass the test then consult
Instrument the Appendix A Host Communication
ID Protocol.
6.1.12 Analytical Errors
This sub-section of the Service Manual is only a reminder. For reference on the
analytical errors consult the proper section of the Operators Manual.
Any error that occurs during the data reduction process will be reported as a code
number. Possible sources for the errors, identified by letter codes, are shown as flags
according to the following list:
Data reduction errors R (no measured result is available)

Instrument errors E
Calibration errors Q
Analytical Reference errors Q
QC errors Q
All the error code numbers and their meanings are listed in the following tables.
Session Error Codes

Reaction Curve Error Codes
Calibration Error Codes
Analytical Reference Error Codes
QC Error Codes
Double Test Error Codes
Ratio and INR Error Codes
DMS Error
Other Miscellaneous Error

Session Error Codes
Error code 1
Meaning No flush/optical error

Cause Nephelometric optical reference channel out of range
(above 4.0 V or below 1.5 V)
Flags Cycle aborted
Results No results in the database
Remedial Action Replace Reference Emulsion bottle and clean optics
Error code 2
Meaning Optical error

Cause Absorbance optical reference channel out of range (above 9.5 V
or below 5.0 V)
Flags Cycle aborted
Remedial Action Clean optics
Error code 3
Meaning No flush
Cause Absorbance channel Reference Emulsion out of range (above
3.5 V or below 0.0 V)
Flags Cycle aborted
Error code 4
Meaning Optical failure

Cause Acquisition data check (signal above 10 V)
Flags Cycle aborted

Troubleshooting
Reaction Curve Error Codes
Error code 5
Meaning Optical failure

Cause ADC saturation (signal above 9.5 V at the end of the clotting
curve)
Flags R
Results Error 5 instead of the result
Remedial Action Possible high Fibrinogen concentration. Dilute the sample 1:1
with factor Diluent and repeat the test.
Error code 6
Meaning No coag
Cause First threshold not passed
Flags R
Remedial Action Sample does not clot within the acquisition time. Repeat the test
in extended acquisition time.
Error code 7
Meaning Coag error

Cause Second threshold not passed
Flags R
Remedial Action Sample clot curve is noisy and does not give a normal clot signal
within the acquisition time. Repeat the test in extended
acquisition time.
Error code 8
Meaning Coag error

Cause Delta time between the two thresholds is higher than the
selected value
Flags R
Remedial Action Possible non-phasic clotting curve. Review the clot curve.
Possible sample interference with the clotting reaction.

Error code 9
Meaning Coag error

Cause Initial slope of the reaction curve is higher than the selected
value
Flags R
Remedial Action Possible bi-phasic clotting curve. Review the clot curve.
Possible sample interference with the clotting reaction.
Error code 10
Meaning Coag error

Cause Final slope of the reaction curve is higher than the selected value
Flags R
Remedial Action Unstable endpoint of the clotting curve. Review the clot curve.
Possible sample interference with the clotting reaction. Repeat
the test in extended acquisition time.
Error code 11
Meaning Final delta error

Cause Final delta of the reaction curve is higher than the selected value
Flags R
Remedial Action If this is a nephelometric reaction, it may be an indication of an
unstable endpoint in the clotting curve. Review the clot curve.
Possible sample interference with the clotting reaction. Repeat
the test in extended acquisition time.
If this is an absorbance test, it may be an indication of an
absorbance value outside the specified limit.
Error code 12
Meaning Coag error

Cause Maximum peak of the first derivative is below the selected limit
value
Flags R
Remedial Action First derivative peak is not significant enough to indicate a real
clotting reaction point. Review the clot curve. Repeat the test in
extended acquisition time.

Troubleshooting
Error code 13
Meaning Coag error

Cause Maximum peak of the second derivative is below the selected
limit value
Flags R
Remedial Action Second derivative peak is not significant enough to indicate a
real clotting reaction point. Review the clot curve. Repeat the
test in extended acquisition time.
Error code 14
Meaning Offset error

Cause Offset of the initial part of the curve is above the selected limit
value
Flags R
Remedial Action Initial reaction turbidity is relatively high. Review the clot
reaction curve.
Calibration Error Codes
Error code 15
Meaning No cal - Insufficient data (curve with a single segment)

Cause Less than 2 calibration standards gave valid results in the
specific curve segment
Flags on samples Q No cal insufficient data
Cal Results Error 15 instead of the result
Remedial Action Invalid result. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the calibration
with freshly prepared materials.
Error code 16
Meaning Invalid curve - Insufficient data (curve with more than one
segment)
Cause Less than 2 calibration standards gave valid results
Flags on samples Q Invalid curve
Remedial Action Invalid result. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the calibration

Error code 17
Meaning Lower No. of standards

Cause A number of standards points are less than the ones defined in
the setup
Flags on samples Q n-1 Std points
Remedial Action Invalid results. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the calibration
Error code 18
Meaning No cal - No mandatory standard/s

Cause A mandatory calibration standard does not give a valid result
(single curve segment)
Flags Q no cal no Std n
Remedial Action Invalid curve. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the calibration
Error code 19
Meaning Invalid curve segment- No mandatory standard/s

Cause A mandatory calibration standard does not give a valid result
(curve with more than one segment)
Flags on samples Q invalid curve no Std
Remedial Action Invalid curve. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the calibration
Error code 20
Meaning Invalid standards replicates

Cause One or more of the replicates for a defined calibration standard
does not give a valid result
Flags on samples Q invalid Std n
Cal Results Error 20. Mean is flagged. CV is not shown.
Remedial Action Invalid standard. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the
calibration with freshly prepared materials.

Troubleshooting
Error code 21
Meaning CV not shown Insufficient replicates

Cause One or more of the replicates for a defined calibration standard
does not give a valid result. CV cannot be calculated (replicates
below or = 2).
Flags on samples Q Insufficient replicates
Cal Results Error 21. CV is not shown
Remedial Action Invalid standard. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the
Error code 22
Meaning Invalid replicate

Cause One replicate for a defined calibration standard does not give a
valid result.
Flags Q Invalid replicates
Results Error 22. Mean value is flagged
Remedial Action Invalid replicate. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the
Error code 23
Meaning CV out of range

Cause CV of the replicates higher than the selected limit
Flags on samples Q CV out of range
Cal Results Error 23. CV is flagged
Remedial Action Result out of range. Review the reaction curve. Repeat the
Error code 24
Meaning No cal - slope out of range

Cause The slope of the curve (curve composed by a single equation) is
out of the defined range (single segment)
Flags on samples Q No cal slope out of range
Cal Results Error 24. Calibration curve not displayed
Remedial Action Review the reaction curve. Repeat the calibration with freshly
prepared materials.

Error code 25
Meaning Invalid curve - slope out of range

Cause One of the slopes of the curve (curve composed by several
segments) is out of the defined range
Flags on samples Q Invalid segment slope out of range
Cal Results Error 25. Calibration curve is displayed
prepared materials.
Error code 26
Meaning R2 out of range

Cause The R2 of the calibration is outside the selected limit
Flag on samples Q - R2 out of range
Cal Results Error 26. Calibration curve is displayed
prepared materials.
Error code 27
Meaning No cal - No valid curve

Cause The calibration curve does not have any valid segment
Flags on samples No cal no valid curve
Cal Results Error 27. Calibration curve is not presented
prepared materials.
Analytical Reference Error Codes
Error code 28
Meaning AR invalid (using Reference Value for Ratio/INR

calculation)
Cause AR does not give a valid result
Flags on samples Q AR invalid
AR Results Error 28. AR is flagged with an R.
Remedial Action Review the reaction curves. Repeat the test with freshly
prepared materials.

Troubleshooting
Error code 29
Meaning AR out of range (using Reference Value for Ratio/INR

calculation)
Cause AR gives a result out of range
Flags on samples Q AR out of range
AR Results AR is flagged
prepared materials.
Error code 30
Meaning AR invalid (AR used as reference for Ratio/INR calculation)

Cause AR does not give a valid calculated result
Flags on samples Q AR invalid. Ratio/INR on samples is not presented
AR Results Error 30. AR is flagged.
prepared materials.
Error code 31
Meaning AR out of range (AR used as reference for Ratio/INR

calculation)
Flags on samples Q AR out of range. Ratio/INR on samples is not presented
prepared materials.
Error code 32
Meaning AR out of range (compared to a Cal standard)

Cause AR does not have a valid Ratio result
Flags on samples Q AR out of range, Ratio/INR on samples is not presented
AR Results AR has no ratio calculated
prepared materials.
Error code 33
Meaning AR not checked (compared to a Cal standard not defined)

Flags on samples Q AR not checked. Ratio/INR is given on samples
prepared materials.

Error code 34
Meaning AR out of range (no check on AR selected)

Cause AR gives an invalid result
Flags on samples Q AR out of range. Ratio/INR is not presented on samples
AR Results Error 34. AR is flagged
prepared materials.
Error code 35
Meaning AR invalid (Ratio defined versus one Cal Standard)

Cause AR gives an invalid calculated unit
Flags on samples Q AR invalid. Ratio/INR is presented on samples
AR Results Error 35. AR is flagged
prepared materials.
Error code 36
Meaning AR out of range (Ratio defined versus one Cal Standard)

Cause AR gives a calculated out of range result
Flags on samples Q AR out of range. Ratio/INR is presented on samples
AR Results AR is calculated and flagged
prepared materials.
Error code 37
Meaning AR invalid (No check on AR is selected)

Cause AR gives an invalid result
Flags on samples R - AR invalid. Ratio/INR are not given if AR is defined for
Ratio/INR calculation
AR Results Error 37. AR is not displayed
prepared materials.
Error code 38
Meaning AR out of range (Check on AR is selected)

Cause AR gives an out of range result
Flags on samples Q AR out of range. Ratio/INR are not given if AR is defined
for Ratio/INR calculation
prepared materials.

Troubleshooting
Error code 39
Meaning AR out of range (Check on AR is selected on Cal standard)

Cause AR gives an out of range result
Flags on samples Q - AR out of range. Ratio/INR are given but flagged
prepared materials.
QC Error Codes
Error code 40
Meaning QC not valid (No check QC selected)

Cause QC gives a non valid result
Flags on samples No flag on samples
QC Results Error 40. QC result is not displayed
prepared materials.
Error code 41
Meaning QC not valid (Check on QC selected, flag on samples not

selected)
prepared materials.
Error code 42
Meaning QC out of range (Check on QC selected, flag on samples not

selected)
Cause QC gives a result out of range
QC Results QC result is not flagged
prepared materials.

Error code 43
Meaning QC invalid (Check on QC selected, flag on samples selected)

Flags on samples Q Flag on samples is present
prepared materials.
Error code 44
Meaning QC out of range (Check on QC selected, flag on samples is

selected)
Flags Q Flag on samples is present
Results QC result is flagged
prepared materials.
Double Test Error Codes
Error code 45
Meaning Mean not calculated (No check selected on the mean)

Cause One of the two tests is not valid (non numeric result)
Results Error 46. Mean is not displayed
prepared materials.
Error code 46
Meaning Mean not calculated (Check selected on the mean)

Cause One of the two tests is not valid
Flags on samples R Flag on samples
Results Error 46. Mean is not displayed
prepared materials.

Troubleshooting
Error code 47
Meaning Mean out of range (Check selected on the mean)

Cause One of the two results is out of normal range or linearity range
Flags on samples Mean is flagged on samples
Results Error 47
prepared materials.
Error code 48
Meaning Mean out of range (Check selected on the mean)

Cause One of the two results is out of the specified range
Flags on samples Mean is flagged on samples
Results Error 48.
prepared materials.
Ratio and INR Error Codes
Error code 49
Meaning Ratio calculation error (i.e. Ratio for PT, APTT, TT, etc.)
Cause One of the results needed for the calculation is not valid
Flags on samples Q - Ratio calculation error. Flag on samples
Results Error 49. Ratio is not displayed
prepared materials.
Error code 50
Meaning Ratio : S or Sa out of range (i.e. Ratio for APCR-V)

Cause S or Sa out of normal range
Flags on samples Q - Ratio out of range. Flag on samples
Results Error 50. Ratio is not calculated
prepared materials.

Error code 51
Meaning NR: AR or ARa out of range (i.e. NR for APCR-V)

Cause AR or ARa out of normal range
Flags on samples Q - Ratio out of range.
Results Error 51. Ratio is displayed but not the NR
prepared materials.
Error code 52
Meaning NR calculation error

Cause Ratio not available to calculate the NR
Flags on samples Q NR calculation error. Ratio cannot be calculated
Results Error 52. Ratio is displayed but not the NR
prepared materials.
DMS Errors
Error message Possible explanation

Data base full More than 1000 Sample IDs in the DMS. Sample IDs must be
deleted to allow space for programming.
More than 20 Trying to program the test # 21 for a sample. Tests must be
tests deleted to allow space for programming.
programmed per
sample
Duplicated A duplicate sample ID has been entered when editing a loadlist.
sample ID Duplicate sample ID must be deleted.
Control ID ID already used for a QC material. Sample ID must be changed.
already used
Control ID ID already used for another patient sample. Sample ID must be
already used for changed.
patient
Invalid range One of the two IDs in the selected range does not exist.
selection
Sample ID not IDs requested does not exist in the database.
found

Troubleshooting
Other Miscellaneous Errors
Error message Possible explanation

Unidentified Sample does not have an associated ID in the loadlist.
sample in
position X
Check sample Material is missing from the sample tray.
tray
No sample Sample was found missing during aspiration or liquid level
detection check.
Test X is not Test does not have a calibration associated with it.
calibrated
Added sample in A sample that was not in the previous loadlist was found during
position X the sample tray check.
Used rotor Rotor is partially used. Enter the unused cuvette positions (open
the rotor cover to check the first available empty cuvette
number).
Load rotors Rotor is insufficient to perform the requested analysis. Add more
rotors to the rotor stack.
NP out of range NP out of range ( 9% for PT, 15% for APTT or 20% for
FIB-PT based).
QC out of range QC material out of range according to the selected SD limit in
the QC setup.

6.2 Service Tools

In this section are described the entire Service Tool that have been designed to aid the
service of the ACL 9000.
All tools listed below are included in the Service Tools Kit for ACL 9000 P/N
190653-00.
Following is the table with the main information about the Service Tools.
Name Part Used for Already used in

Number ACL family
Temperature Probe 70954-00 Rotor Holder temperature test YES
Coagulimetric Optic 97580-50 Coagulimetric Channel YES
Test Kit performance checks
Chromogenic Optic 97579-50 Chromogenic Channel YES
Test Kit performance checks
Graduated Capillary 82589-00 Sample / Reagent Dilutor line YES
Kit dispensation test
RS 232 C Interface 99211-01 Serial lines test (Require the YES
Check Connector Adapter below to work)
RS 232 C Interface 71467-70 Serial lines test (Require the NO
Check Connector Check connector above to
Adapter work)
Needles Position Tool 181039-41 Needles Position test YES
Sample Arm 190513-00 Sample Arm Movement Assy NO
Centring Tool positioning
Rotor Arm Centring 190503-00 Rotor Arm positioning NO
Tool
Needles Waste 190515-00 Sample Arm positioning NO
Centring Tool
Peltier Centring Tool 190507-00 Peltier positioning NO
Touch Screen 190574-00 Touch Screen Calibration test NO
Calibration Tool
Rotor Cover Motor 190510-00 Rotor Cover Movement Assy NO
Centring Tool positioning
Rotor Cover 190575-00 Rotor Cover Movement Assy NO
Encoder Centring Encoder positioning
Tool
Rotor Stack 190501-01 Rotor Stack positioning NO
Centring Tool
Sample Tray 190520-00 Sample Tray Positioning NO
Centring Tool

Troubleshooting
Following is a detailed description of each Service Tool above listed.
Temperature Probe (P/N 70954-00)
Purpose:
This Tool allows the checking of the truthful temperature within a cuvette of the
analysis rotor.
Description:
It consists of a precise thermistor fit into a cuvette of an analysis rotor.
The leads of the thermistor are brought to the upper tool surface in order to allow the
measuring of the thermistor resistance (with a DVM) through the two dispensing holes
on the Rotor Cover. The read resistance value allows through a mathematical
calculation written on the label stuck on the tool upper surface, to know the
temperature in C presents inside the analysis rotor. The value must be between 36 38
C.
Xxxx - Read value

C=
Xxx
Rv 37 C= xxxxx
TEMPERATURE PROBE
P/N70954-00
The procedure to use this tool is very easy but its important pay attention to follow all
the steps.
1 Turn On the Instrument and wait at least 20 minutes.

2 Checks in the Temperature Control menu that the Rotor Holder Temperature
is within range 38 39 C.
3 Place the Temperature Probe on the Rotor Holder as a normal analysis rotor.
4 Wait at least 15 minutes then using your DVM read the resistance of the
thermistor on the upper surface of the tool and calculate the corresponding
temperature.

Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit (P/N 97580-50)
Purpose:
This kit allows the checking of the performance of the Coagulimetric Channel (see sub-
section 7.2.2).
Description:
The kit contain four different concentration levels of Wash-Reference Emulsion for a
total of 50 ampoules distributed as follows:
13 ampoules of 2
19 ampoules of 1
12 ampoules of 0.5
6 ampoules of 0.25
Chromogenic Optic Test Kit (P/N 97579-50)
Purpose:
This kit allows the checking of the performance of the Chromogenic Channel (see sub-
section 7.3.2).
Description:
The kit contain four different concentration levels of a yellow solution
(ParaNitroAniline, PNA) for a total of 50 ampoules distributed as follows:
13 ampoules of 160
19 ampoules of 80
12 ampoules of 40
6 ampoules of 20
Graduated Capillary Kit (P/N 82589-00)
Purpose:
This tool allows the checking of the Sample and Reagent Dilutor lines aspiration and
dispensation (see sub-section 7.8.2).
Description:
The kit contains 3 capillaries.

Troubleshooting
Upper Reference lines
Lower Reference lines
GRADUATED CAPILLARY
RS 232 C Interface Check Connector (P/N 99211-01) and

RS 232 C Interface Check Connector Adapter (P/N 71467-70)
Purpose:
These tools can be plugged together on serial lines ports (Modem, Mouse and Host
communication ports) present on the rear Instrument Interface Board in order to allow
the checking of them through the relevant Service program (see section 7.13).
Description:
Following is the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector drawing in order to make it if
its not available.
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
RS 232 C INTERFAC E C HEC K C O NNEC TO R

P/N 99211-01

The RS 232 C Interface Check Connector Adapter is a standard PC adapter 25/9 Pin
Female/Female.
Following is the drawing of a serial customised 9 Pin Check Connector Male (for the
Bar Code Port) or Female (for Host, Mouse and Modem Port) in order to make it if
the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available.
TX RX
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
DTR DSR
CTSRTS

Troubleshooting
Needles Position Tool (P/N 181039-41)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to carry out the alignment of the Needles Block in respect to
the analysis rotor position (see sub-section 7.7.4).
Description:
The tool is a plastic block that has to be properly snapped on the Rotor Holder with
the A face up. The side A of the tool has two Reference Points in order to allow
the proper alignment of the Needles Block tips.
Re fe re n c e Dots
4.3 mm
NEEDLES PO SITIO N TO O L
P/N 181039-41

Sample Arm Centring Tool (P/N 190513-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Sample Arm Movement Assy in respect to the
Fluidic Plate (see sub-section 7.7.1).
Description:
The tool has a simple cylindrical shape that fits between the Sample Arm Movement
Assy shaft and its Fluidic Plate hole.
13,6 m m 19,6 m m
66 mm
SAMPLE ARM C ENTRING TO O L

P/N 190513-00

Troubleshooting
Rotor Arm Centring Tool (P/N 190503-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Rotor Arm in respect to the Rotor Transport (see
sub-section 7.7.6).
Description:
The tool has a simple cylindrical shape that fits between the Rotor Arm central finger
and the Rotor Transport central hole.
9 mm 12 mm
ROTO R ARM C ENTRING TO O L

P/N 190503-00

Needles Waste Centring Tool (P/N 190515-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Needles Block (and the Sample Arm) in respect
to the Needles Waste/Rinse position on the Fluidic Plate (see sub-section 7.7.1).
Description:
The tool has a shape very similar at the normal Waste Adapter with the addition of 2
tubes that fits in the 2 holes for the Needles.
9 mm 12 mm
NEEDLES WASTE C ENTRING TO O L

P/N 190515-00
Peltier Centring Tool (P/N 190507-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to center the Peltier Assy in respect to its holes in the Fluidic
Plate (see sub-section 4.1.2).
Description:
The tools have a simple cylindrical shape that fits into the reagents adapter holes of the
Peltier.

Troubleshooting
28,3 mm 29,8 mm
32 mm
PELTIER C ENTRING TO O L
P/N 190507-00
Touch Screen Calibration Tool (P/N 190574-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used during the Touch Screen Calibration test (see section 7.12).
Description:
The tools have a simple pencil shape with a rounded tip.
TO UC H SC REEN CALIBRATION TO O L
P/N 190574-00

Rotor Cover Motor Centring Tool (P/N 190510-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used when is needed to put in tension the Belt of the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy before the final fixing with the 3 screws (see sub-section 7.6.2).
Description:
The tool has a simple flat shape that fits into the niche between the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy and the support. This tool assures the horizontally of the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy.
ROTO R C O VER MOTO R C ENTRING TO O L

P/N 190510-00
Rotor Cover Encoder Centring Tool (P/N 190575-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used for centre the Encoder Disk position when the Rotor Cover
Movement Assy is replaced (see sub-section 7.6.2).
Description:
The tool has a simple pencil shape with a thread (M3) at the tip that fits into the
setscrew hole.
M3
ROTO R C O VER ENC O DER C ENTRING TO O L

P/N 190575-00

Troubleshooting
Rotor Stack Centring Tool (P/N 190501-01)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used for centre the Rotor Stack in respect to the Rotor Transport
(see sub-section 7.7.5).
Description:
The tools have a simple shape that fits into the Rotor Stack and at the bottom fits into
the Rotor Transport central hole.
Sample Tray Centring Tool (P/N 190520-00)
Purpose:
This tool has to be used to adjust the Sample Tray position in respect to the Needles
Block on the Sample Arm (see sub-section 7.7.2).
Description:
The tool has a simple cylindrical shape with a central hole that fits on Sample Tray.

6.3 Standard Tools

This section provides suggestions about the standard tools equipment of the Service
Engineer required to perform a replacement or an adjustment on the ACL 9000.
Following is the list of the standard tools.
Set of metric Hexagonal Allen Screw Driver

In particular: 1.5 mm
2 mm
2.5 mm *
3 mm *
5 mm
Set of metric Monkey Wrench and/or Socket Wrench Driver

In particular: 5 mm
5.5 mm
6 mm
7 mm
Flat Screw Driver
Phillips Screw Driver
* Note: A special flexible version of these two screw driver are both available in
the kit 2.5/3 mm Flex Allen Screw Driver P/N 99208-10

7 Checkout & Adjustment
This section is designed to allow at the Service Engineer to perform a thorough check
out of the whole Instrument.
The Service software incorporates proper utilities for the entire checkout and
adjustment needed.
Following are the specific sections with the check out procedures.
7.1 Quick Reference Guide to Electronic Adjustment

7.2 Coagulimetric Channel
7.3 Chromogenic Channel
7.4 Liquid Sensor
7.5 Optic Sensor
7.6 Motors Adjust
7.7 Modules Positioning
7.8 Dilutors Module
7.9 Magnetic Sensor
7.10 Rotor Waste Presence Switch
7.11 Switching Power Supply check out & Adjustment
7.12 Touch Screen Calibration
7.13 Interface Test
7.14 Temperature Control
7.15 Floppy Disk Drive Test
7.16 Software checking & loading

Checkout & Adjustment
7.1 Quick Reference Guide for Electronical Adjustment

This section is designed to help the expert service engineer to remember the set value
and the conditions to perform the main electronical adjustment.
This section is not completely availeble in this version of the manual.
Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board #3)
Coag. Ch. Chrom. Ch.
Trimmer Function Condition Reading Point Set Value (V)

RV1 Off-Set Coag. Ch.
RV2 Gain Coag: Ch.
RV3 Gain Chrom. Ch.
RV4 Off-Set Chrom. Ch.
RV5 Rotor Cover Sensor
RV6 Autosamp. Middle Ring

Optic Sensor
RV7 Autosamp. Inner Ring
Optic Sensor
RV9 Wash-R Level Sens.
RV10 Autosamp. Outer Ring

Optic Sensor
RV11 Reagent Level Sens.
RV12 Sample Level Sens.

Rotor Exchange Module Board (Board #4)
Trimmer Function Condition Reading Point Set Value (V)

PT1 Rotor Stack Optic
Sensor
PT2 Rotor Transport Optic
Sensor
PT3 Rotor Waste Optic
Sensor

7.2 Coagulimetric channel

Several tests are available to troubleshoot or verify the Coagulimetric Channel.
These tests allow verification of electronic circuits (PCB) and optical components
(light source and optic fibre). The tests used to verify the Coagulimetric Optical
Channel are:
Test Name Purpose See section

Coagulimetric Channel Sets the reading value and the peak of 7.2.1
check out and adjustment the bell shaped signal of data acquisition.
Performance check out Verifies that precision and linearity are 7.2.2
within specs.
Light source (LED) Performs match of electronic signals to 7.2.3
verification actual performance of the light source.
Optic fibre check out and Optimises optic performance. 7.2.4
adjustment procedure
7.2.1 Coagulimetric Channel check out and adjustment
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Brand new rotors.

- Wash-Reference Emulsion.
- 200l micropipette.
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been switched ON for at least 20 minutes (warm-up
of light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure.
1 Enter the service program menu.

2 Thoroughly clean the twenty optical path (holes) of the Rotor Holder with distilled
water and a cotton swab. Clean also the optical sensor window and the optic fibre
of the Coagulimetric Channel. Do not use metal forceps with gauze as this may
scratch the rotor holder generating possible stray light affecting the proper system
performance.

3 On the windows like menu enter Service then A/D Converter Test. The instrument
displays the screen below.
4 Rotate the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment to lock the LED light optic
pathway. Lower the analysis compartment cover then locate the trimmer RV1 (on
Board # 3) see figure below.
5 Adjust RV1 to read between 2 and 20 mV on screen. Then touch V to exit.

6 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Curve
Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below:
7 Load 200l of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor.

8 Place the prepared rotor on the Rotor Holder.
9 Select Coagulimetric Channel, set rotational speed to 1200 rpm and touch Start.
The instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle, scroll the table of values and delays still you find the delay corresponding to
value of 1000.
10 Update, if necessary the current delay, keying in the new value on the window
Select Delay.
11 Change now the rotational speed from 1200 to 600 rpm, and touch Start. The
instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition cycle
scroll the table of values and delays still you find the delay corresponding to value
of 1000.
12 Update the delay by keying it on the window Select Delay only if necessary.
Touch now V to exit, so the new settings will be saved.
13 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Acquisition
Adjustment.
14 Leave the rotor previously loaded in place and touch Start (if the rotor loaded is in
place than more of 3 minutes loading a new one).
15 Adjust RV2 (on board # 3, see figure on previous page) until to read 2.7 Vdc on
the Coagulimetric Channel line (accept any value from 2.6 to 2.8Vdc). Once
adjusted touch Stop, then V to exit.
16 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Fibre
Adjustment. Wait for the motor initialisation, then remove the rotor from the
analysis compartment. Touch Start and verify that (without a rotor in place) no
cuvette reads higher than 80 mV. Should this test fail, perform the fibre
adjustment as described in sub-section 7.2.4. If the test pass then touch Stop and
insert a new rotor into the analysis compartment. Touch Start and verify that
cuvette readings are above 140 mV and do not exceed 1500 mV. Touch Stop and
then X to exit.

7.2.2 Performance checkout
These two tests are designed to verify the overall performance of the Coagulimetric
Channel:
Coagulimetric Precision Test

Coagulimetric Linearity Test
The Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit P/N 97580-50 is necessary to perform both tests.
The kit consists of 50 vials (2 mL each):
13 vials 2
19 vials 1
12 vials 0.5
6 vials 0.25
Warning: If one of the tests fail then is required to perform all the other check out test
of this 7.2 section.
Coagulimetric Precision Test

- Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit
P/N 97580-50
- Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial or other
suitable container
1 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Channel
Optic Test.
2 Select in sequence Channel type: Coagulimetric; Test Type: Precision Loading
Type: Reagent. The instrument shows the screen below:

3 Put the content of two vials (4ml) labelled 1 (taken from the kit P/N 97580-50)
into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with its Dark Blue adapter.
Note: For this test is possible use the Wash-Reference Emulsion in substitution of the
Silicon Emulsion labelled 1.
4 Position the 4 mL reagent vial with the adapter onto the reagent position R1.
5 Load 200l of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor
before place the rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
6 Touch Start in Manual Rotor Loading. The instrument will load the rotor
cuvettes picking the Silicon Emulsion from the reagent vial using the reagent
probe.
7 Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify the following parameters :
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 18) :<=5

CV% (Reference) :<=3
Mean Reference : 2.2 V to 3.0 V
Note: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading from the Loading
Type window.
8 Touch V twice to exit.
Coagulimetric Linearity Test

- Coagulimetric Optic Test Kit
P/N 97580-50.
- Clean, empty reagent vial or other
suitable container.
Optic Test.

2 Select in sequence Channel type: Coagulimetric; Test Type: Linearity Loading

3 Put the content of two vials (4ml), of each level (1, 0.5 and 0.25 from the kit P/N
97580-50) into three clean, empty 4 mL reagent vials with their Dark Blue
adapters.
4 Position the 4 mL reagent vials with the adapters on the reagent tray as follows:
Rgt position Level Volume

1 1 4 ml
2 0.5 4 ml
3 0.25 4 ml
5 Load 200l of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor

before place the rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
cuvettes aspirating silicon emulsions from the reagent vials using the reagent probe.
7 Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify the following parameters:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) :<=4

CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) : < = 4.5
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) :<=5
R2 : >= 0.996
Note: Acquisition cycle only can be repeated selecting Skip Loading from the
Loading Type window.

7.2.3 Light source (LED) verification
These two tests are designed to verify the overall performance of the Coagulimetric
Channel LED with fibre:
Coagulimetric Channel LED efficiency Test

Coagulimetric Channel LED with Fibre replacement
Coagulimetric Channel LED efficiency Test
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Brand new rotors

- Wash-Reference Emulsion
- 200 l micropipette
Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below.
2 Load 200l of Wash-Reference Emulsion in cuvette number 20 of a new rotor.

3 Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.
4 Locate the trimmer RV2 (on Board # 3) see figure below.

5 Touch Start and then turn RV2 fully clockwise until to read as low as possible on
the Coagulimetric Channel line.
6 Check that in the above conditions the value displayed on the screen is higher than
250 mV. If test fails replace the Coagulimetric Channel LED with fibre assy (see
next sub-section). If test passes then adjust RV2 to read 2.7 V on the screen.
7 Touch Stop and V to exit.
Coagulimetric Channel LED with Fibre replacement

If the LED is replaced follow the procedure here below to adjust the amplifier circuit
and the optic fibre.
Adjustment. The instrument shows the screen below.
2 Load 200 l of Wash-Reference Emulsion inside cuvette number 20 of a new

rotor.
3 Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment, and then
touch Start.

4 Locate the trimmer RV2 (on Board # 3) see figure below.
5 Adjust RV2 to read 2.7 V on screen.

6 Loosen the setscrew, which locks the sleeve with the optic fibre into the socket.
Optic fibre
Loose this
set screw
Sleeve
7 Move the optic fibre upward to obtain the maximum voltage reading on the
Coagulimetric Channel line then tighten the setscrew.
8 Adjust by means of RV2 the reading to 2.7 V.
9 Touch Stop then V to exit.
7.2.4 Optic fibre check out and adjustment procedure
1 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module and Fibre
Adjustment.
2 Wait for the initialisation of the motors then empty the analysis compartment from
any rotor.

3 Touch Start and verify that (without any rotor in place) no cuvette reads a value
higher than 80 mV. See screen below:
Warning: If this test fails then follow these few points:
Loose the setscrew that holds the Optic Fibre in place on the Rotor Holder side.
Rotate the Optic Fibre CW or CCW (max. 90) until a reading lower than 80 mV is
obtained.
Tighten the setscrew to lock the Optic Fibre back in place (the Optic Fibre must be
placed in the bottom).
4 Touch Set envelope mode.

5 Wait for about 30 seconds and verify that for no cuvette the MIN-MAX reading
value is higher than 50 mV. If not then perform the test in the sub-section 7.2.3
paying attention to the reading oscillations on Coagulimetric Channel (higher then
50 mV). Then perform the procedure in the sub-section 7.2.1.
6 If OK touches Stop. Raise the Rotor Holder Cover and load a new rotor on the
Rotor Holder.
7 Touch Start and check that all cuvettes values reads are higher than 140 mV and
dont exceed 1500 mV. If exceed 1500 mV then check for rotor integrity.
8 Touch Stop and then X to exit.

7.3 Chromogenic channel

Several tests are available either to troubleshoot or verify the Chromogenic Channel.
These tests allow verification of electronic circuits (PCB) as well as optical
components (light source and optic fibre).
The tests that achieve verification of the Chromogenic Optical Channel are:
Test Name Purpose See section

Chromogenic Channel Sets the read value and the peak of the bell 7.3.1
check out and adjustment shaped signal of data acquisition.
Channel performance Verifies that precision and linearity are 7.3.2
check out within specs
Light Source (Halogen Performs match of electronic signals to 7.3.3
Lamp) verification actual performance of light source
7.3.1 Chromogenic Channel check out and adjustment

Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been switched on for at least 20 minutes (warm-up
of light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure:
1 Enter to the service program menu.

2 Thoroughly clean the twenty optical path (holes) of the Rotor Holder with distilled
water and a cotton swab. Clean also the optical sensor and the Optic Fibre
windows of the Chromogenic Channel. Do not use metal forceps with gauze as this
may scratch the rotor holder generating possible stray light affecting the proper
system performance.

3 On the windows like menu enter Service then A/D Converter Test. The instrument
4 Rotate the Rotor Holder on the analysis compartment to lock the Halogen Lamp
light optic pathway. Lower the analysis compartment cover, then locate the
trimmer RV4 (on Board # 3), see figure below:
5 Adjust RV4 to read between 2 and 20 mV on screen. Then touch V to exit.

6 Load 200 l of distilled water in cuvette number 6 of a new rotor.
7 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Curve
Adjustment. Place the loaded rotor on the Rotor Holder in the analysis
compartment.

8 Select Chromogenic Channels, set rotational speed at 1200 rpm and touch Start.
The instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition
cycle scroll the table of values and delays still you find the delay corresponding to
the value of 1000 (see example below).
9 Check that the delay does not to far than 100 sec. from the current delay
displayed on the window Select Delay.
10 Change now the rotational speed from 1200 to 600 rpm and touch Start. The
instrument performs an acquisition cycle. Upon completion of the acquisition cycle
scroll the table of values and delays still you find the delay corresponding to the
value of 1000.
11 Check that the delay is not too far than 100 sec. from the current delay
displayed on the window Select Delay
12 On the windows like menu enter Service then Optical Module Test and Acquisition
Adjustment. Touch Start, then adjust RV3 (on board # 3, see figure on previous
page) until to read 8.0 Vdc on the Chromogenic Channel line (accept any value
from 7.9 to 8.1Vdc). Once adjusted touch Stop.
13 Load a new rotor with 200 l of Wash-Reference Emulsion on cuvette # 6. Place
the loaded rotor in the analysis compartment.
14 Touch Start and verify that the reading on Chromogenic Channel line does not
exceed 3.5 Vdc. Otherwise replace the 405 nm Optical Filter and repeat the test.
15 Touch V to exit

7.3.2 Performance checkout
These three tests allows to verify the overall performance of the Chromogenic
Channel:
Chromogenic Precision test

Chromogenic Linearity Test level 80
The Chromogenic Optic Test Kit (P/N 97579-50) is necessary to perform both tests.
The kit incorporates 50 vials (2 mL each), having the following concentration of PNA
(ParaNitroAnyline):
13 vials 160 mol/L

19 vials 80 mol/L
12 vials 40 mol/L
6 vials 20 mol/L
Chromogenic Precision Test

- Chromogenic Optic Test Kit
P/N 97579-50
- Clean, empty reagent vial, or other
suitable container.
Optic Test.
2 Select in sequence Channel type: Chromogenic; Test Type: Precision Loading

3 Put the content of two vials (4ml) of PNA (ParaNitroAnyline) concentration 80

mol/L (taken from the kit P/N 97579-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
with its Dark Blue adapter or other suitable container.
4 Position the 4 mL reagent vial with the adapter onto the reagent position R1.
5 Pour at least 4 mL of distilled water onto a clean, empty reagent vial or other
suitable container.
6 Position the reagent vial with the distilled water onto reagent position R4.
7 Take a new rotor and place it in the analysis compartment.
cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vials using the reagent probe.
9 Wait for the acquisition cycle, then verify that the following parameters:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 18) :<=2

CV% (Reference) : < = 0.5
Type window.
10. Touch V twice to exit.

P/N 97579-50
suitable container.
Optic Test.

2 Select in sequence Channel type: Chromogenic, Test Type: Linearity and Loading
3 Put the content of two PNA vials (4mL), of each level (80, 40 and 20 from the kit
P/N 97579-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with their Dark Blue
adapters, or other suitable container.
4 Position the reagent vials on the reagent tray as follows:
Rgt position Material Volume

1 80 mol/L 4 ml
2 40 mol/L 4 ml
3 20 mol/L 4 ml
5 Place a new rotor in the analysis compartment.

cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vials using the reagent probe.
7 Wait for the acquisition cycle then verify that the following results are obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) : < = 1.5

CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) :<=3
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) :<=5
R2 : >= 0.996
Type window.


P/N 97579-50
suitable container.
Optic Test.
2 Select in sequence Channel type: Chromogenic, Test Type: Linearity and Loading
3 Put the content of two PNA vials (4 mL), of each level (160, 80 and 40 from the
kit P/N 97579-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with theirs adapters or
other suitable container.
4 Position the reagent vials onto reagent tray according to the following scheme:
Rgt position Material Volume

1 160 mol/L 4 ml
2 80 mol/L 4 ml
3 40 mol/L 4 ml
4 Distilled Water 4 ml
5 Place a brand new rotor into the analysis compartment.

cuvettes aspirating the PNA from the reagent vial using the reagent probe.

7 Wait for the acquisition cycle, then verify that the following results are obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) : < = 1.5

CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) :<=3
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) :<=5
R2 : >= 0.996
Type window.
7.3.3 Light source (Halogen Lamp) verification
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Distilled Water

- Brand new rotors
Adjustment. Wait for motors initialisation then the instrument shows the screen
below.
2 Load 200 l of distilled water inside cuvette number 6 of a new rotor.

3 Place the loaded rotor onto the Rotor Holder in the analysis compartment.

4 Touch Start then locate RV3 on the Acquisition board (board # 3), see figure
below.
5 Turn RV3 fully clockwise until to read as low as possible.

6 Check that in the above condition the value displayed on the screen is in the range
890 to 4150 mV. If test fails replace the Halogen Lamp Socket Assy and perform
the Chromogenic Channel check out & adjustment as described in the sub-section
7.3.1. If test passes then adjust RV3 to read 8.0 V on the Chromogenic Channel
line.
7 Touch Stop and V to exit.

7.4 Liquid sensors

These two tests are designed to troubleshoot and verify the liquid sensors. They are
available via Service then Sensors Test.
7.4.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume Test

7.4.2 Needle sensor Test
7.4.1 Wash-Reference Emulsion Volume test
This procedure allows the adjustment of the reference solution sensor circuit that shall
determine the volume of the solution left in the bottle.
1 Prepare a Wash-R Solution bottle with 500 ml of solution. If a graduated container

is not available then use the marks on the side of the bottle paying attention to the
horizontal position of the bottle.
2 Install the bottle on board and corks it completely with the Reference Emulsion
Sensor.
3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Flush Volume test.
The system displays the screen below:
4 Verify that Flush volume is 500 mL ( 10mL).

5 Adjust if necessary RV9 located on the Acquisition & Sensor Board (Board # 3).
See figure below.
6 Press V to exit.
7.4.2 Needles sensor test
This test allows functional verification of the circuitry that fulfils the task of liquid
detection through both the sample and reagent probes.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Distilled water

- Micropipette 100 1000 l
- Clean, empty 4 ml reagent vial.
Warning:
Prior starting procedures execute one or more priming cycles following the route
Diagnostic then Priming. Perform these operations until are confident that the fluidic
path is completely filled and without air bubbles.
Verify also that the fluidic lines are smooth and without bad corners.
1 On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensors Test and Needle Sensor
Test.

2 Press Start. The Sample Arm moves across the default test positions (1, 2 and A1
on the Sample Tray positions then R1, R5 and R7 on the Reagent Tray) and stops
on the waste position. The system displays the screen below:
3 Verify on the current screen that the value presented on the window Reference
value is in the range 4.000 6.000 V.
Note: If its out of range then perform the procedure Wash-Reference Emulsion
Volume Test to adjust the Flush Volume value at 500 mL. If the problem persist then
replace the Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board #3).
4 Prepare and position the suitable containers with distilled water or Wash-R
Solution as for the table below then press Start. The Sample Arm will scan the
positions and system will refresh screen with updated values.
5 Verify that the windows SENSOR RESULT display LIQUID. In addition check
that the windows LSLIQ display values according to table below. Adjust if
necessary and repeat the test many time as needed.
Position Container Volume Probe LSLIQ Sensor Trimmer

Result to Adjust
Sample tray 500 L 150 L SPL 4.2 V Liquid RV 12
#1 Disposable ( 200 mV)
cup
Reagent tray 4 mL 1.5 mL RGT 4.2 V Liquid RV 11
R1 Reagent vial ( 200 mV)
+ Adapter

6 Locate trimmer position on Acquisition & Sensors Board (Board # 3) as per figure
below.
7 Repeat the test with the containers positioned and filled as indicated in the table
below then check the results. Its possible perform this test using the two already
loaded containers, repeating two or more time the test.
Position Container Volume Probe LSLIQ Sensor

Result
Sample tray # 2 500 L Disposable cup 150 L SPL > 2.5 V Liquid
Sample tray A1 500 L Disposable cup 150 L SPL >3.0 V Liquid
+ Adapter
Reagent tray R5 4 mL 1.5 mL RGT > 3.0 V Liquid
Reagent vial + Adapter
Reagent tray R7 4 mL 1.5 mL SPL > 3.0 V Liquid
Reagent vial + Adapter
Note: If the LSLIQ value is correct but the Sensor Result is Air the meaning is
that the liquid level in this position is low. This should be for bad assembly of the
Sample Arm and/or of the Needles Block.
This happen when the Needle have touch the liquid (LSLIQ value in range) but the
mechanical stop have blocked the Sample Arm before that the Needle enters for 2mm
into the liquid for confidence (Sensor Result Air).
To solve the problem corrects the Sample Arm assembly then repeats this procedure.
This condition of liquid low level may be present also during the analysis. In this case
perform this test (using the specific test quantity of liquid) to clarify if the liquid is
really insufficient and if the sensors is working properly.

8 Repeat the test with the containers empty and positioned as indicated in the table
below then press Start and check the results.
Position Container Volume LSLIQ Sensor Offset

Result
Sample tray # 1 500 L disposable cup None < 2.2 V Air < 300 mV
Sample tray # 2 500 L disposable cup None < 2.4 V Air < 300 mV
Sample tray A1 500 L disposable cup None < 2.4 V Air < 300 mV
+ Adapter
Reagent tray R1 4 mL Reagent vial + None < 0.8 V Air < 300 mV
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
9 Verify that all windows SENSOR RESULT now display AIR.

10 Check also that on each of the six small windows presents an offset below 300mV.
The offset is a reading taken on the sensor once the Sample Arm reaches each
given position prior to lower (circuit autozero).
Note: If the Offset is too high (over 700 mV) we have Sensor Fail. To solve Offset
problem its advisable check for liquid on the Needles, dirt and/or insulating lost in the
Needles Block.
11 Press X to exit.
7.5 Optic sensor test

Specific optical sensors are located in the Autosampler with the porpoise to detect the
presence of cups, primary tubes and auxiliary materials on the Sample Tray.
Other optical sensors are located in the R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) with the
purpose to detect for rotor presence. The sensors check for rotors presence in different
points along the route followed by the rotors when are displaced for normal
operations.
Following are the specific sub-sections divided for optical sensors location.
7.5.1 Rotor Stack.

7.5.2 Rotor Waste container.
7.5.3 Autosampler housing.

7.5.1 Rotor Stack
The Rotor Stack is actually equipped with two optical sensors that have the purpose of
detect the presence of:
- Lowest rotor in the Rotor Stack.

- Rotor on the Rotor Transport ready to be displaced on the Rotor Holder.
The two sensors are identified in the system as follows.
Rotor Stack (Storage)

Rotor Transport (Slider)
Rotor Stack (Storage)
1 Empty the rotor feed stack from any rotor.

2 Locate inside the Rotor Stack the window of the Optical Sensor Rotor Stack
Upper. The sensor is located just above the mechanism that holds the whole pile
of rotors when loaded.
3 Check that the sensor is properly faced to its slot. This is to prevent mechanical
jam (if too close) or detection problem (if too far).
4 Access to the Service ambient then follows the route: Service, Sensor Test and
Optic Sensor Test. The instrument will initialise motors then the screen below is
presented.
5 Manually load one new rotor and leave it seated at the lower position of the Rotor
Stack lined up to the Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Upper.

6 Check that the voltage being displayed with the rotor in place is 5.00 V (higher
than 5 Vdc on the DVM). In the meanwhile a flag on the screen shall indicate for
the presence of the rotor. Should above reading be less than 5.00 V adjust,
proceeding as follows.
7 Locate in the system Card Housing the R.E.M. Board (Board #4).
8 Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP1 (signal) as shown in the figure
below.
9 Adjust PT1 until the DVM reads 10.000 mVdc.

10 Manually remove the rotor and observe voltage value reported on the screen to
drop at less than 1V. The flag that indicates the presence of the rotor shall also
disappear. In case the value read is higher than 1.00 V check for sensor position
and cleanness.
11 Manually move the rotor in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as rotor is being moved in
and out.

Rotor Transport (Slider)
1 Empty the Rotor Stack from any rotor.

2 Locate the Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Lower at the bottom of the Rotor Stack
lined up with the Rotor Transport.
3 Check that the sensor is properly faced to its slot. This is to prevent mechanical
jam (if too close) or detection problem (if too far).
4 Manually load a new rotor on the Rotor Transport.
5 Access the Service software environment then follows the route: Service, Sensor
Test and Optic Sensor Test. The screen shown below is presented.
6 Check that the voltage being displayed, with the rotor in place is 5.00 V (higher
than 5 Vdc on the DVM). In the meanwhile a flag on the screen shall indicate for
the presence of the rotor. Should above reading be less than 5.00 V adjust,
proceeding as follows.
8 Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP2 (signal) as shown in figure below.
9 Adjust PT2 until the DVM reads 10.000 mVdc.

10 Manually remove the rotor and observe the voltage value reported on the screen to
drop at less than 1V. The flag that indicates the presence of the rotor shall also
disappear. In case the read remains above 1.00 V then check for sensor position
and cleanness.

11 Manually move the rotor in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as rotor is being moved in
and out.
7.5.2 Rotor Waste container
The Rotor Waste container can accommodate up to twelve used rotors (240 tests).
Following are the two conditions detected by the Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full:
- Rotor Waste container available (until eleven rotors pile-up in the Rotor Waste
container).
- Rotor Waste container full (when twelve rotors pile-up in the Rotor Waste
container).
The system provides appropriate warning messages to the User any time that the full
condition is met.
1 Access the Service environment, then follow the route: Service, Sensor Test and
Optic Sensor Test. The instrument will initialise the motors then the screen shown
below is presented.
2 Gain access to the Rotor Waste compartment by lowering the door in bottom front
of the instrument (this test needs to be performed with the Front Cover and the
Lower Support Plate assembled).
3 Remove the Rotor Waste Container from its housing.
4 Fill the waste rotor bag with eleven rotors.
5 Accommodate the Rotor Waste Container back into its compartment.
6 Check that, in this condition, the voltage being displayed is 4.000V (accept any
value in the range 3.500 to 4.500). Should above reading be out of the specified
range then adjust, proceeding as follows.

8 Connect a DVM between TP0 (GND) and TP3 (signal), as shown in figure below.
9 Turn PT3 until the DVM reads 4.000 mVdc.

10 Manually insert another rotor in the pile. Now 12 rotors are the waste container.
11 The System shall detect the Rotor Waste full condition and flag it on the screen
as appropriate.
12 Check that the voltage being displayed, with the 12 rotors in place is 5.00 V on the
screen (higher than 10Vdc on the DVM).
13 Manually remove two rotors from the pile and leave now 10 rotors in the waste
container.
14 Check that, in this condition, the voltage being displayed drops to nearly 0V.
Accept any value below 1.00 V, the flag that indicates the presence of the rotor
shall also disappears. In case reading remains above 1.000 mV check for sensor
position and cleanness.
15 Manually move the rotors in and out a few times and assess for proper rotor
detection. Check also that the flag toggles on the screen as the rotors are being
moved in and out.
7.5.3 Autosampler Housing
The Autosampler Housing is equipped with two optical sensors used to detect for
presence on the Sample Tray of primary tubes, cups, reagents or calibrators vials. Its
also equipped with the internal Barcode Assy, used to read the Patient ID labels
present on the primary tubes. Perform the two following procedure is required to
completely Check out & Adjustment the Autosampler Housing.
Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment.

Autosampler / BCR Test.

Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust the sensitivity of the optical sensors
located on the Sample Tray compartment, which detect for presence of cups / primary
tubes or other containers.
The positions on Sample Tray covered by each sensor are as follows.
Position Name on LCD screen Function

Located on the external Cups (1st and 2nd ring) Checks for presence on the outer
wall of the sample tray (1st) and mid (2nd) rings of cups
housing or tubes on the Sample Tray.
Located below the Cups (3rd ring) Checks for presence of any
Sample Tray grey Flange container on the innermost (3rd)
Adjustable. ring on the Sample Tray.
Note: Prior starting verifies that the Autosampler Movement Assy with its grey Flange
Adjustable is properly aligned (see sub-section 7.6.5 and 7.7.1).
1 Take a Sample Tray with all the positions free and place:
- On a odd position (1st , outer ring) a new 2 mL cup

- On a even position (2nd , middle ring) a new 2 mL cup
- On a aux. ring position (3rd , innermost ring) a new bottle without label
Note: Make sure that the cups are really new and free from any scratches.
2 Access the Service environment, place the prepared Sample Tray in its
compartment then enter Service, Sensor Test and Optical Sensor test. The system
display the screen below:

3 On the window SELECT RING TO TEST set the appropriate ring.
Note: Before test the 2nd ring because the adjustment made on the trimmer RV6 takes
effect also on the reading on the 1st ring. The Acquisition & Sensors Board set through
RV6 the maximum quantity of current in the Outer Sensor, that is used for both the
rings and with RV10 set the gain of the reading circuit for the 1st ring.
4 Manually rotate C.W. the Sample Tray positioning the cup (placed in the ring you
want to test) in front of the sensor.
5 Fine tune position, acting manually on the Sample Tray, to obtain the maximum
reading on the screen. In this condition system shall read according to table below.
Sample tray ring Sample tray pos. Container Value Adjust

1st outer ring Any even position Cup 2 mL > 3.50 V RV 10
no-scratches
2nd middle ring Any odd position Cup 2 mL > 2.80 V RV 6
no-scratches
3rd inner ring Any position New Bottle > 4.00 V RV 7
Without label
Note: If necessary use to adjust the sensor the most critical container found locally.
6 If not adjust using the specified trimmers located on the Acquisition & Sensors
Board (see figure below), to obtain the specified value. Make sure that the Sample
Tray does not lose its position (at maximum reading) while adjusting.
7 Manually rotate the Sample Tray so that no cups are presented in front of the
Optical Sensors.
8 Verify that the screen display values as the table below.
Sample tray ring Sample tray pos. Container Value

1st outer ring Any even position No container < 1.00 V
2nd middle ring Any odd position No container < 1.00 V
3rd inner ring Any position No container < 1.50 V

To thoroughly assess the proper functioning of sensors through all available positions
of the Sample Tray, it is advisable to perform the Autosampler / BCR test. This is
the next test described in this sub-section.
Autosampler / BCR test
The Autosampler / BCR (Bar Code Reader) test is designed to verify the proper reads
of Autosampler Optical Sensors and BCR under dynamic conditions.
These conditions replicate the real use during the analysis cycles. Specific Offset can be
entered to triggers an early/late reading on the optical sensors. This will compensate
for some mechanical play that may produce a small shift of the Sample Tray during
rotation.
1 On the windows like menu enter Service then Autosampler / BCR test. The system
shows the screen below and positions at home the Sample Tray.
2 Prepare a Sample Tray with all the even positions (2nd, middle ring) loaded with
new empty 2 mL cups. Make sure that the cups are really new, free from any
scratches. Place the prepared Sample Tray onboard.
3 Touch key START WITHOUT BCR. The system will perform a complete turn of
the Autosampler reporting on the screen cups presence (1 present; 0 not present)
and position.

Note: There are also other 3 columns in the result area of the screen.
The first is the Offset column.
In this SW release the algorithm used to calculate the Offset column is WRONG. At
the moment DONT use this column and sets the offset value using only the ADC
Value and the Presence columns.
The second is the ADC Value column, read on each position during the test (using
the current offset).
The last is the Bar Code Values column where is reported the value read by the BCR
on the Patient ID Barcode Label. This column is compiled only when the test starting
by touching the button START WITH BCR.
4 Assess that all the even positions on the screen report 1 for presence.
5 If any position fail then checks that the relevant cup is in good conditions, replace
the cup and repeats test. Checks also in the ADC Value column that the highest
value read for this position is close to the set point of the sensor (see the test
Autosampler Sensors Check out & Adjustment described above in this sub-
section).
6 If the problem persist then enter on the window CENTRAL RING OFFSET a
new value close to zero (the value suggested are 5 to +5) and repeat the test few
time until confident that the proper value is find.
Once achieved, unload cups from mid ring, place them on outer ring and perform this
test for the outer ring. In the end install as well bottles without label on Auxiliary Ring
(inner ring) and performs the test again.
Test functionality of the internal Bar Code Reader performing the following procedure.
1 On the windows like menu enter Service then Autosampler / BCR test. The system
shows the screen below and positions at home the Sample Tray.

2 Prepare a Sample Tray with all the even positions (2nd, middle ring) loaded with
primary tubes equipped with Bar Code Label. Make sure that the labels are valid,
in good conditions (see also Appendix B Bar Code Label specification) and
positioned toward the Bar Code Reader.
3 Place the prepared Sample Tray onboard.
4 Touch key START WITH BCR. The system will perform a complete turn of the
Autosampler reporting on the Bar Code Values column the value read by the
BCR on the Patient ID Barcode Label.
5 Assess that all the even positions on the screen report 1 for presence.
6 If any position fail then checks that the relevant primary tube label is in good
conditions, replace the primary tube and repeats test.
7 If the problem persist then enter on the window BCR OFFSET a new value and
repeat the test (move the Offset value + or 1 at any repetition). Perform any
attempts until is confident that the BCR reads correctly all primary tubes labels.
Once achieved, unload primary tubes from mid ring, place them on outer ring and
perform this test again.
Never perform the test on the two rings together or may be that a wrong offset induces
the system to assign the value of the label in position #1 to the position #2 or #40.
Note: The value reported in the Offset column is WRONG and relative to the
presence Optic Sensors and NOT to the BCR reading (see note and explanation
above).

7.6 Motor adjust

This service program sub-menu includes the utilities designed to allow stepping motors
phase adjustments and/or check out of the Optical Sensors (Dual/Single Channel
Optical Switch) functionality.
Following are the stepper motors check out procedures:
7.6.1 Rotor Motor

7.6.2 Rotor Holder Cover Motor
7.6.3 Sample Arm Motors: - Horiz. Sample Arm Motor
7.6.4 - Vert. Sample Arm Motor
7.6.5 Autosampler Motor
7.6.6 Dilutors Motors: - Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motor
7.6.7 Slider Motor
7.6.8 Rotor Arm Motors: - Horiz. Rotor Arm Motor
7.6.9 - Vert. Rotor Arm Motor
Operator interface for each motor adjustment screens is very similar. Some exceptions
exist for the Rotor Holder Cover Motor. The functionality of the commands available
and of the most common dynamic labels is described in the following sub- section.
Most common commands

The following section provides a description of the commands whose functionality is
replicated in each of the motor adjust screens.
Rotation C.W. Arrow/Rotation C.C.W. Arrow

Allows the clockwise/counter clockwise stepping of the motor. The number of step
executed for each command is in accord with the current STEP INCREMENT value
present in the windows.
Next C.W. Position / Next C.C.W. Position

Steps the motor to the next meaningful positions in the clockwise/counter clockwise
direction that can be reached from the current motor position. At each touch the
system will update values on the following labels on the screen:
PRESENT PHASE
COVER SENSOR
HOME SENSOR
POSITION SENSOR
STEP DONE

The following meaningful positions can be achieved:
Motor Meaningful position

Rotor Motor 20 Rotor cuvette positions (Home Position is with cuvette
#20 in front of the Optical Fibre).
Rotor Holder Cover 3 Positions:
Closed.
Intermediate. Utilised only for automatic rotor exchange.
Opened (Home Position).
Sample Arm Motor 13 Positions:
Horizontal 3 Over the Sample Tray (Home Position is over A1).
4 Over the Peltier reagent tray.
1 Over the waste/wash reservoir.
4 Over the room temperature reagent tray.
1 Over the Rotor Holder position.
Sample Arm Motor 3 Positions:
Vertical Rotation (Home Position).
Reagent picking / (Sample/Reagent) delivery.
Sample picking.
Autosampler Motor 20 Positions (Home Position is with A1 in the direction of
the Sample Arm). Which achieve through the outer, middle
and inner ring access to 50 positions.
Dilutor Motors 2 Positions:
Fully upward (Home Position).
Fully downward.
Slider Motor 2 Positions:
(Transport Motor) Under the Rotor Stack (Home Position).
Rotor Arm picking.
Rotor Arm Horizontal 2 Positions:
On the Rotor waste / picking (Home Position).
On the Rotor Holder.
Rotor Arm Vertical 2 Positions:
Rotation (Home Position).
Rotor picking/delivery.
Home position
Brings the stepper motor to the Encoder Home Position.
Motor Off
De-energises the motor. The motor status reported on the relevant window MOTOR
STATUS change from Energised to De-energised.
Store phase / Store step

This command allows saving of a new stepper motor phase (or step) that best fits the
Optical Sensor with the optical window on the encoder.

Cautions !
Operating within the Service environment no verifications are made concerning
illegal operations (e.g. conflicts with other modules), safe movements have to be
verified prior activating any key.
Most common dynamic labels
Listed are descriptions of the dynamic labels that are available inside each of the
Motors Adjustment screens.
Motor Name Range Meaning

of the label
All Present phase 0 15 Shows the motor phase currently in
use.
Stored phase 0 15 Show the motor phase stored at
Home Position.
All Motor status Energised De- Energised: Stepping motor windings
energised powered (motor tensioned).
De-energised: Stepping motor
windings not powered (motor de-
tensioned).
All Cover sensor On / Off Replicates status of the magnetic
sensor that detects the Rotor Cover
position.
All Home sensor On / Off Replicates status of the optical sensor
that detects the home position of the
current motor.
Position sensor On / Off Replicates status of the optical sensor
that detects the position of the current
motor (e.g. 20 cuvettes position on
the rotor holder).
All Steps Done Xxxx Number of steps performed when the
motor is being operated in the service
program. The steps increment (or
decrement) from the Home Position
(considered step 0)

7.6.1 Rotor motor
This procedure is designed to verify and adjust (if required) the central phase of the
Home Position of the motor. This is to match the motor phases with the optical sensor
reading on the encoder disk. Its also possible use it to verify the functionality of the
stepper motor and of the optical sensor.
1 Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Rotor Motor. The
system displays the screen below.
3 On the tool bar touch the small icon of the analysis compartment cover to raise the
cover (the icon acts as a toggle switch to raise/lower the Rotor Cover).
4 Home the Rotor Motor by touching the Home Position button on the screen. The
system moves to the Home Position the Rotor Motor. The Rotor Holder cuvette
#20 is in front of the Coagulimetric Channel Optic Fibre.
5 Verify that the dynamic labels HOME SENSOR and POSITION SENSOR are
both ON.
6 With the Step Increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw arrow (or ccw arrow) button
on the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the
actual condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
7 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until both the status changes from light to
dark then reverse motion by touching the opposite key until the status of optical
sensors becomes dark again after the light window.
8 It is now possible to determine the width of the optical window (notch on the
encoder disk).
9 Pressing on the cw (or ccw) arrow keys move to the middle of the window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
10 Check that the present phase matches the stored phase on the dynamic labels. If
phases are equal then the Rotor Motor is centred on the encoder and the test is
over. Press V to exit.

11 Else, press STORE PHASE if active. Unavailability of the STORE PHASE key
indicates an illegal condition of the Rotor Motor phase exist. Touch the cw (or
ccw) arrow key to restore a legal motor phase condition.
12 Visually inspect the Rotor Holder and confirm that the middle of the cuvette
position #20 is in front of the coagulation optic fibre.
13 If yes and if the present and stored phase are still in disagreement, touch STORE
PHASE.
14 Press V to return to the Service main menu.
7.6.2 Rotor Holder Cover Motor
2 If the Rotor Cover Movement Assy was replaced or in any case removed and then
assembled, verify that when the Cover is closed the Encoder is the position
reported in the following drawing. If the Encoder isnt in the right position then
adjust it by loosing the two setscrews that fix the Encoders support.
Note: The upper side of the encoder have to be about 1 mm above the upper side of
the Dual Channel Optical Switch Sensor. If available use the Rotor Cover Encoder
Centring Tool P/N 190575-00.
Dual Channel
Optical Switch

3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Rotor Holder
Cover. The system displays the LCD screen below.
4 The Rotor Holder Cover sets to its intermediate position (automatic loading
position).
5 Touch the HOME POSITION key, and the Cover Motor Open the Cover until
the 36 Step.
6 Touch the STEP UP key more time until the Home and the Position Sensor are
ON (+ on the relevant status bar).
7 Continue to touch the STEP UP key and verify that the Home and the Position
Sensor going to OFF (- on the relevant status bar) at least for 2 to a maximum of 5
steps before the mechanical stop.
Note: If the steps in the OFF condition are less then 2 probably the movement of the
Rotor Cover Motor fail during the Home Position operation. That because the
Software cant recognise the end of the Home Position Windows on the Encoder.
If the steps in the OFF condition are more then 5, the Rotor Covers Home Position
is too low and is possible that during the Needles Position test the Sample Arm hits
the Rotor Cover opened. In both this two wrong conditions is needed to repeat the
procedure since the point 2.
8 Touch the HOME POSITION key and then the NEXT CW POSITION key.
9 By means of the cw arrow key, lower the cover (set Step Increments to 10 might
be appropriate initially), until it is fully closed (reduce step increments to 1 when
getting closer to the lowest position).
10 Once closed verify that the position sensor is ON (+ on the relevant status bar). It
is not necessary to set in the middle of the optical window.
11 Touch the STORE STEP key, the system will update the value.
12 Touch once the NEXT CCW POSITION to raise the cover back to the
intermediate position.

13 Once the intermediate position is reached verify that the dynamic label STEP
DONE sets to value of 0. The dynamic labels of cover, home and position sensor
should be set as specified (see table below).
Cover Position Cover Sensor Home Sensor Position Sensor Step Done
Status Status Status
Fully Open OFF ON ON -36
Intermediate OFF ON OFF 0
Closed ON OFF ON Steps Stored
14 Touch any time the NEXT CCW POSITION and the NEXT CW POSITION
until confidant that the adjustment is acceptable.
15 Touch V to return at the Service main menu screen.
7.6.3 Sample Arm horizontal motor
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Sample Arm
Motors and Horiz. Sample Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Manually Raise the Sample Arm to the rotation height.

4 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Sample Arm
Horizontal Motor until to place the Sample Arm (if assembled) over the
Autosampler housing (position A1 on the Sample Tray).
5 Verify that both the HOME SENSOR and POSITION SENSOR are ON.

6 With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw arrow (or ccw arrow) button
on the screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the
condition of optical switch (+: light; -: dark).
7 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until status changes from light to dark, then
reverse motion by touching the opposite key until the status of optical sensors
becomes dark again after the light window.
encoder disk).
9 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the position in the middle of the window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
phases are equal then the Sample Arm Horizontal Motor is centred on the encoder
and the test is over. Press V to exit.
11 If not press STORE PHASE if active. Unavailability of the STORE PHASE
key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch cw (or
ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition, then touch STORE
PHASE.
7.6.4 Sample Arm vertical motor
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Sample Arm
Motors and Vert. Sample Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Manually moves the Sample Arm over the waste/wash position.

4 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Sample Arm
Vertical Motor until the rotation position.
both in ON condition.
6 Touch the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the Sample Arm to the Reagent
picking / (Sample/Reagent) delivery position.
respectively in OFF and ON conditions.
8 Touch once the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the Sample Arm to the
Sample picking position.
respectively in ON and OFF condition.
Note: The Sample Arm Vertical Motor doesnt require phases to be stored.
7.6.5 Autosampler motor
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Autosampler
Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the
Autosampler motor until the Home Position is achieved.

5 With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw (or ccw) arrow button on the
screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the actual
6 Continue to press cw (or ccw) until status changes from light to dark, then reverse
motion by touching the opposite key until the status of the optical sensors becomes
dark again after the light window.
encoder disk).
8 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the middle of the optical window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
phases are equal then the Autosampler Motor is centred on the encoder and the
test is over. Press V to exit.
key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch once cw
(or ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition and then touch STORE
PHASE.

7.6.6 Sample / Reagent Dilutor motor
1 Turn the Instriment On. Then access the Service program main menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Dilutor Motors
and Sample / Reagent Dilutor Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the
Sample/Reagent Dilutor Motor fully upward.
4 Verify that the dynamic labels that the HOME SENSOR is in ON condition.
5 Touch the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the Sample/Reagent Dilutor
Motor to the full down position.
6 Verify that the dynamic labels that the HOME SENSOR is in OFF condition.
Note: The Sample/Reagent Dilutor Motors dont require phases to be stored.

7.6.7 Transport motor
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Slider Motor. The
3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system moves the Rotor
Transport under the Rotor Stack.
both in the ON condition.
5 Touch the NEXT CCW POSITION to move the Rotor Transport to the left
(rotor picking position).
Note: The Transport Motor doesnt require phases to be stored.

7.6.8 Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Arm
Motors and Horiz. Rotor Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Manually raise the Rotor Arm to the rotation height.

4 Touch on the tool bar the small icon of the analysis compartment cover to raise the
cover (the icon acts as toggles switch to raise/lower the cover).
5 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. System moves the Rotor Arm
Horizontal Motor over the rotor picking/waste position.
7 With the step increment set to 1, repeatedly press cw (or ccw) arrow button on the
screen. The status bars of both the home and position sensors show the actual
8 Continue to press cw (or ccw) arrow until status changes from light to dark (use
for reference only the home sensor windows), then reverse motion by touching the
opposite key until the status of the optical sensor becomes dark again after the light
window.
9 It is now possible to determine the width of the home sensor optical window
(notch on the encoder disk).
10 Press the arrow keys cw (or ccw) to set the middle of the optical window
(- - - - + + + + + - - - -).
phases are equal then the Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor is centred on the encoder
and the test is over. Press V to exit.


key indicates an illegal condition of the current motor phase exist. Touch the cw
(or ccw) arrow key to restore legal motor phase condition and then touch STORE
PHASE.
7.6.9 Rotor Arm vertical motor
1 Turn the Instument On. Then access the Service program main menu.
Motors and Vert. Rotor Arm Motor. The system displays the screen below.
3 Touch the Home Position button on the screen. The system raises the Rotor Arm
to the rotation height.
5 Touch the NEXT DOWN POSITION to lower the rotor arm to the bottom
position.
Note: The Rotor Arm Vertical Motor doesnt require phases to be stored.

7.7 Module positioning

This service program sub-menu includes the utilities designed to allow matching of the
major system modules. Following are the relevant assemblies.
Autosampler assy.
Sample Arm assy.
Rotor Holder assy.
Rotor Arm assy.
Rotor Transport assy.
The Module Positioning Tests options are available under the service programs main
menu. On the windows like menu, the sequence Service - Module Positioning Test
gives access to the following operational tests:
ST SA RH Test
RA SL Test
RA RH Test
RA SL RH Test
All above modules have to properly match to each other to guarantee proper picking
and delivery of samples and reagents as well as rotors for the analysis. Should any
module loose its pre-set position (e.g. due to the fact it was dismantled and re-fitted
for service purposes) it has then to be re-adjusted to best fit. The following table
provides a summary of test to be done based upon module that was
misplaced/replaced, to restore the proper working conditions.
Module replaced Mechanical Adjustment / Verification Refer to

reference to Test section
point/assembly
Sample Arm assy Needles ST SA RH Test 7.7.1
Wash/Waste Pot
Autosampler Assy Sample Arm ST SA RH Test 7.7.2
Rotor Holder assy Sample Arm ST SA RH Test 7.7.3
Needles Block Assy Rotor Holder Needles Position 7.7.4
Rotor Stack Assy Rotor Transport RA SL RH Test 7.7.5
Rotor Arm assy Rotor Transport RA SL Test 7.7.6
R.E.M. (Rotor Rotor Holder RA RH Test 7.7.7
Exchange Module) Snap
centring
Rotor Tilt Adjust. Fluidic Plate RA RH Test 7.7.8
R.E.M. Self Test RA SL RH Test 7.7.9

7.7.1 Sample Arm assy
The Sample Arm must be aligned with respect to the needles Wash/Waste Pot and
represents the mechanical reference to the other major assemblies. It is recommended
to verify the proper positioning of the Sample Arm prior starting any position
adjustment on other modules.
In case the Sample Arm module was misplaced/replaced the following procedure needs
to be completely carried out, in other case follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Needles Waste Centring Tool
P/N 190515-00
- Sample Arm centring tool
P/N 190513-00
- Needles Position Tool
P/N 181039-41
1 Position the Sample Arm module in place from the bottom of the system and
secure it by using the 3 black columns but without tightens.
2 Re-connect cables as required.
3 Insert the Sample Arm Centring Tool P/N 190513-00 on the shaft of the Sample
Arm Movement assy, between the shaft and the Fluidic Plate hole.
4 Tighten the 3 black columns making sure that the Sample Arm Movement shaft is
in the middle of the Fluidic Plate hole.
5 Remove the Sample Arm Centring Tool P/N 190513-00.
6 Carefully tilts up the Instrument by holding the keyboard drawer guides fold back
the two stands off then put it on the bench.
7 Replace the needles Wash/Waste Pot adapter with the Needles Waste Centring
Tool P/N 190515-00.
8 Turn On the Instrument then access at the Service program main menu.
9 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module positioning test and (ST
SA RH Test). Upon entry the system performs motors initialisation and displays
the screen below.

10 Put the Sample Arm on the Sample Arm Movement shaft (at the bottom) paying
attention to dont lose the current shaft position.
11 Manually move the Sample Arm (with the needle block assembled) over the
needles Waste/Rinse Reservoir.
12 Fine tunes in vertical position the Needles Block.
13 Adjust the Sample Arm to match the 2 needles with the 2 reference points on the
Waste Centring tool.
Note: Use the 2 screws located on the top of the aluminium support to set the depth of
the Needles Block assy (if required).
14 Sweetly tighten the 3 setscrews located at 120 on the aluminium support those
hold the Sample Arm in place.
15 Place the Needles Position Centring Tool P/N 181039-41 on the Rotor Holder.
16 Touch the key NEXT POSITION, the Sample Arm moves over the Rotor
Holder and lower to dispensing position.
17 Adjust the Needles Block height by setting the needles tip on the 2 white points of
the Needles Centring tool surface.
Note: Loose and secure the Needles Block by using the white knob located on the rear
of the Sample Arm. If during this check out is necessary moves the Rotor Holder
module position then perform the R.E.M. module positioning as described in the
section 7.7.7.
18 Remove the Wash Centring tool from the Wash/Waste Pot and refit the
Waste/Rinse Reservoir.
19 Touch the key NEXT POSITION, the Sample Arm raises, moves over the
Autosampler and lowers on the position #1 of the Sample Tray.
20 Remove the Needles Position Tool P/N 181039-41 from the Rotor Holder.
21 Touching the key NEXT POSITION the Sample Arm raises, moves over the
Rinse Waste Pot and lowers on the Rinse Waste Reservoir.
22 Visually inspect that needless are centred with respect to the Rinse Waste
Reservoir.
23 Touch the icon STOP and then Ok to return at the Service main menu.
Note: Before resume normal operation it is advisable to perform a Needle Sensor Test
as detailed in section 7.4.1.

7.7.2 Autosampler assy
The Autosampler must be aligned with respect to the Sample Arm. It is recommended
If the Autosampler module was misplaced/replaced the following procedure needs to
be completely carried out, in other case follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - 0.5 mL disposable sample cups or
primary tubes
- Sample Tray Centring Tool
P/N 190520-00
1 Position the Autosampler assy in place from the bottom of the system. Secure it by
using the 4 black column but without tightens.
2 Re-connect cables as required.
3 Tighten the 4 black columns making sure that the Autosampler shaft is in the
middle of the fluidic plate hole.
4 Install the inner ring optical sensor and lock it in place.
6 Put the grey Flange Adjustable in place on the top of the Autosampler movement.
Secure it by the 2 screws but without tighten (it shall still be possible to turn it by
hand).
SA RH Test). Upon entry the system performs modules initialisation and displays
the screen below.
9 Touch the key NEXT POSITION, the Sample Arm moves over to the Rotor

10 Load the Sample Tray with the Sample Tray Centring Tool P/N 190520-00 in the
position #1 (if not available use a 0.5 mL cup). Put it on the Flange Adjustable.
11 Touch the key NEXT POSITION again, the Sample Arm raise, move over to the
Autosampler housing and lower on the position #1 of the Sample Tray.
12 Visually inspect that Sample Needle is centred in the cup. If off-center gently turn
the Sample Tray to achieve best fit.
Note: May be that the Sample Needle is not in the middle of the cup but is close to the
cup surface (on the left/right side).
In this case is required to adjust the Autosampler Movement position by loosing the 4
black columns, move the Autosampler to achieve best fit and then tighten the 4 black
columns again.
Visually inspect that (with the Sample Tray inside) the distance between the Sample
Tray and the external wall of the Autosampler housing never change along the
circumference (about 2mm).
Its also advisable to test the middle and inner rings positions (#2 and A1) by using
together the Motor Adjust options for the Autosampler and for the Sample Arm
Horizontal Motor. During this test on #1, #2 and A1 is not possible align the entire 3
positions perfectly, so is enough find a proper position that fits correctly.
The following positions may also be tested.
Sample tray Outer Ring Mid Ring Inner Ring

rotation
0 - 360 (Home) 1 2 A1
90 11 12 None
180 21 22 A6
270 31 32 None
13 Touch the toggle key TO RAISE / LOWER ARM, the Sample Arm moves up
and down. Repeat the operation to verify proper centring.
14 With the Sample Arm fully raised and paying attention that you are not moving the
Flange Adjustable from current position, remove the Sample Tray and tighten the
two fixing screws.
15 Refit the Sample Tray with the cup in position #1 and assess that Sample Needle is
centred (if uncensored repeat last few operations).
16 Once proper matching is achieved touch the icon STOP and then Ok to return
at the Service main menu.

7.7.3 Rotor holder assy
The Rotor Holder must be aligned with respect to the Sample Arm. It is recommended
If the Rotor Holder module was misplaced/replaced the following procedure needs to
be completely carried out, in other case follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Needles Position Tool P/N 181039-41
- Disposable rotor
1 Put the Rotor Holder assy in place from the bottom of the system. Secure it by
using the 3 black columns but without tighten.
2 Re-connect cables and optic fibres as required.
SA RH Test). Upon entry the system performs the modules initialisation and
6 Place the Needles Position Tool P/N 181039-41 on the Rotor Holder.
7 Touch the key NEXT POSITION, the Sample Arm raise, moves over the Rotor
8 Adjust the Rotor Holder position to achieve best fits between the needles tip and
the 2 white points on the Needles Centring tool surface then tighten the 3 black
columns.
9 Touch the toggle key TO RAISE / LOWER ARM, the Sample Arm will move up
and down. Repeat this operation to insure proper centring.
10 Once proper matching is achieved Touch the icon STOP and then Ok to
return at the Service main menu.

Note: Once Rotor Holder has been centred with respect to the Sample Arm then
perform verification against the R.E.M. (see sub-section 7.7.7. for the details).
Before resume normal operation it is advisable to perform a Needle Sensor Test as
detailed in the sub-section 7.4.1 and a Needles Block Assy positioning test available in
the Diagnostic menu using a plastic rotor (see sub-section 7.7.4).
7.7.4 Needles Block Assy
This test has the purpose of Adjust/Verify the Needles Block Position every time that
is needed (Replacement, Maintenance, accidental hit or for service action).
Materials / tools necessary: - Needles Position Tool P/N 181039-41

- Brand new rotor.
WARNING !
on this area.
1 Turn the Instrument On. Then access the Analytical Main Program.
2 On the tool bar touch the small icon of the Analysis Compartment Cover to
raise the cover (the icon acts as a toggle switch to raise/lower the Rotor
Cover).
3 On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Needles Position. The system
initialises the Sample Arm, the Rotor Holder and displays the screen below.
4 Pushing the Rotor Holder Snap Button, properly insert the Needles Centring
Tool with the side A facing up.

Re fe re n c e Dots
A
5 Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is lowered over the Rotor Holder.
6 Using the knob located on the rear of the Sample Arm adjust the height of the
Needles Block so that the needles tip come in touch with the upper surface of
the Needles Position Tool. During this operation pay attention to put them in
vertically position.
7 Secures the Needles Block by tightening the relevant knob without lose the
current position.
8 Make sure that the needles tip match with the 2 reference dots of the tool. If
the needles tip dont match then verify the Sample Arm and the Rotor Holder
positioning as described in the section 7.7.
9 Once the Needles Block adjustment with the tool is achieved, press the
Raise/Lower Arm button. The arm is raised and so its possible remove the
Needles Centring Tool.
10 Pushing the Rotor Holder Snap Button, properly insert a brand new plastic
rotor.
11 Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is lowered over the plastic rotor on
the Rotor Holder.
12 Visually inspect for the proper position of the needles in the centre of the 2
holes of the cuvette.
13 Press Raise/Lower Arm. The Sample Arm is raised so that by touching the
Rotate button (now active) the plastic rotor on the Rotor Holder is rotated (90
for each touch).
14 Its advisable repeat the 3 last steps to be sure that in the 4 main test position
(cuvette 1,6,11 and 16) the Needles Block adjustment is acceptable.
Note: The needles alignment may not be identical in the 4 rotor cuvettes. If while
carrying out the previously steps the needles not enter a port of the rotor or if Sample
Needle was found to the right of the centre in any one cuvette (see example C in figure
below), it must be readjusted.

A B C
Sample probe centred
or biased Left
15 When confident in a good needles adjustment press the red Stop icon on the
tool bar and confirm the operation with OK to end the test.

7.7.5 Rotor Stack assy
The Rotor Stack must be aligned with the Rotor Transport. Both the Rotors Stack and
the Rotor Transport are sub-assemblies of the R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module). The
R.E.M. itself is aligned with the Rotor Holder assy.
This procedure is designed to center the Rotor Stack to the Rotor Transport.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Rotor Stack Centring Tool
P/N 190501-01
- Disposable rotor
1. Turn On the Instrument then access the Service program main menu.
2. Fill the Rotor Stack with new rotors.
3. On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test.
4. During the test visually inspect for the proper fitting of the following rotors from
the Rotor Stack on the Rotor Transport.
5. If the Rotor Transport results not aligned then loosen the 3 locking screws that
secure the Rotor Stack (located below the R.E.M. support Plate).
6. Gently move the Rotor Stack assembly to obtain best alignment using the Rotor
Stack Centring Tool P/N 190501-01 (if available).
7. Secure the Rotors Stacks in place by tighten the 3 locking screws again.
8. Verify the proper position of the Rotor Stack repeating the test until confidant that
adjustment is acceptable.
Note: The Rotor Stack Cover Sensor needs to feel the presence of the magnet in the
cover to perform the test correctly (use an external magnet).
7.7.6 Rotor Arm assy
The Rotor Arm assy must be aligned with respect to the Rotor Transport assy. Both
the Rotor Arm assy and the Rotor Transport are sub-assemblies of the R.E.M. (Rotor
Exchange Module). The R.E.M. must be aligned to the Rotor Holder assy.
If the Rotor Arm was misplaced/replaced the following procedure needs to be
completely carried out, in other case follow it only for verification.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Rotor Arm Centring Tool
P/N 190503-00
- Disposable rotor
1 Turn On the Instrument and access at the Service program main menu.
2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust and Slider Motor.
Touch in sequence Home Position then Next CCW Position. Touch V to
return at Service main menu and touch NO on the dialog box De-energise
motor?
3 Put the Rotor Arm alignment bushing on Rotor Transport.

4 On the windows like menu perform the sequence Service Motor Adjust Rotor
Arm Motors Rotor Arm Horiz. Motor. Touch in sequence Home Position,
then touch V to return to service main menu and NO on the dialog box De-
energise motor?.
Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. The system displays the screen below.
6 Touch the key Home Position .Now both the Rotor Arm and the Transport
motors are initialised.
7 Install now the Rotor Arm on its shaft (do not tight the 3 setscrews). Raise the
analysis compartment cover by touching the relevant icon on the screen tool bar.
8 Touch on the current value of the window Chose Step Increment. The value
goes in reverse video.
9 Press Canc on the main keyboard to delete the value. Key in 50 as new value.
10 Press the cw arrow in the left bottom side of the screen. The Rotor Arm will lower
by 50 steps.
11 Repeat last operation as many times as necessary to lower the Rotor Arm to the
Rotor Arm alignment bushing (in the meantime visually inspect for best fit, if
necessary manually guide the Rotor Arm paying attention to dont move the shaft
from the previously set position).
12 Once the Rotor Arm is lowered and matching achieved tight the 2 screws on the
Rotor Arm aluminium support.
13 Gently tight the 3 setscrew paying attention to dont move the shaft from the
previously set position.
Note: Its important that the 3 setscrews arent tighten too much (use only 2 fingers
tips) or is possible that any problem comes out the next time that is needed remove the
Rotor Arm.
Its also advisable tight only 1 or 2 setscrews at the moment enough to fix the Rotor
Arm position.

14 The adjustment is now complete, press V to return to service main menu. Touch
YES on the dialog box De-energise motor?
15 Remove the alignment bushing and place a new rotor on the Rotor Transport.
16 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test and RA
SL Test.
17 The instrument exercises the Rotor Arm and Rotor Transport in sequence. Let the
system operate for a suitable number of cycles and verify for proper matching,
touch Abort once confident that adjustment is acceptable.
7.7.7 R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) centring
The Rotor Exchange Module is a major assembly that incorporates Rotor Stack, Rotor
Transport and Rotor Arm assy. The R.E.M. must be aligned with respect to the Rotor
Holder.
This procedure is designed to center the R.E.M. to the Rotor Holder.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Disposable rotor
Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. Touch Home Position, and then touch V
to return to service main menu. Touch NO on the dialog box De-energise
motor?
3 Raise the Rotor Cover by touching the relevant icon on the screen tool bar.
4 On the windows like menu enter Service then Motor Adjust then Rotor Motor.
Touch Home Position, and then touch V to return to service main menu.
Touch NO on the dialog box De-energise motor?
Motors and Rotor Arm Horiz. Motor. Touch in sequence Home Position, Next
CCW Position. Touch V to return to service main menu. Touch NO on the
dialog box De-energise motor?

Motors and Rotor Arm Vert. Motor. The system displays the screen below.
7 Touch Home Position and then on the current value of the window Chose Step
Increment. The value goes in reverse video.
8 Press Canc. on the main keyboard to delete the value. Key in 50 as new value.
9 Press the cw arrow in the left bottom side of the screen. The Rotor Arm will lower
by 50 steps.
10 Repeat last operation as many times as necessary to lower the Rotor Arm down
until it actuates the Rotor Holder Snap mechanism located in the center of the
Rotor Holder. Visually inspect for best matching.
11 If off center loosen the 5 R.E.M. locking screws located over the Fluidic Plate,
gently move the whole R.E.M. assembly to obtain the best matching then secure
the R.E.M. in place again.
12 The adjustment is now complete, press V to return to service main menu. Touch
YES on the dialog box De-energise motor?.
13 Manually load a new rotor on the Rotor Holder.
14 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module Positioning Test and RA
RH Test.
15 The instrument exercises the Rotor Arm performing repeated picking/loading of
rotor from/to the Rotor Holder. Let the system operate for a suitable number of
cycles and verify for proper operation, touch Abort once confident that
adjustment is acceptable.
Note: While performing RA-RH test check that rotor is carried freely to/from the
Rotor Holder. Should the rotor touch the fluidic plate during the motion then follow
the Rotor Arm Tilt Adjustment procedure as detailed in section 7.7.8.

7.7.8 Rotor Arm tilt adjustment
If during the Rotor Arm movement the rotor carried touch the Fluidic Plate, is needed
to repeat the Rotor Arm Centring procedure as described in the sub-section 7.7.6 with
an additional operation at the point 13. Before tighten the 3 setscrews put the
aluminium support at the top of the shaft housing (about 2 mm over) to lift up the
Rotor Arm.
If the problem persists it can be solved also with the tilt up of the Rotor Arm through
the setscrew located below the electromagnet pin.
To tilt up the Rotor Arm proceed as follows:
1 Remove the Rotor Arm Electro-Magnet.

2 Locate the setscrew which allows tilt adjustment (see figure below).
Se tscrew
located under
electromagnet shaft
3 Loosen a little the 2 cap screws that hold the Rotor Arm in place.
4 Turn cw the setscrew to raise the Rotor Arm and obtain best condition (inserting a
rotor in the Rotor Arm and then, with the vertical motor raised, inspecting the
distance from the bottom of the rotor and the Fluidic Plate).
5 Tighten the 2 cap screws that hold the Rotor Arm on the aluminium support.
6 Replace the Rotor Arm Electromagnet paying attention to the distance of the
magnet and the run of the pin (too close dont open enought; too far jam and dont
close).
7 Perform the R.E.M. self test as detailed in section 7.7.9. to insure proper fit.

7.7.9 R.E.M. (Rotor Exchange Module) self test
The Rotor Exchange Module is a major assembly that incorporates the Rotor Stack,
Rotor Transport and Rotor Arm. The R.E.M. must be aligned to the Rotor Holder.
The procedure is detailed in section 7.7.7.
This test is designed to verify the proper alignment of the major sub-assembles of the
Rotor Exchange Module and the Rotor Holder.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Disposable rotors
2 Load a stack of 10 new rotors in the Rotor Stack.
3 Empty the Rotor Waste container and place it back onto its housing.
4 On the windows like menu enter Service then Module positioning test and RA
SL RH test.
5 The instrument initialises the motors of the R.E.M., the Rotor Holder and the
Rotor Cover.
6 Once initialisation is completed the system starts loading / unloading rotors until
the stack of rotors is exhausted.
Note: If the R.E.M. cover is open or is out of place then the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
detects this conditions and the system, for safety purposes, dont allows opening at the
Rotor Stack Upper Electro-Magnet. To obviate at this situation and achieve a good
visual inspection without the R.E.M. Cover, put a little magnet on the magnetic sensor
(try both the 2 sides of the magnet to find the proper polarisation).
7 Visually inspect for proper movement of rotors. If any problem is present then
perform the relevant check out and adjustment procedure.

7.8 System Dilutors Test

This service program sub-menu includes two different options, these are available via
Service then Dilutors Test:
7.8.1 Dilutor Test

7.8.2 Volume Check
7.8.1 Dilutor Test
This test is designed to verify the overall system precision. The test is automatically
performed by the instrument by performs three series of six replicates each solution at
three different concentrations (undiluted, diluted 1/2 and diluted 1/4).
CV % are then calculated for each series, and reported on the screen. The test can be
configured for one Channel (Coagulimetric / Chromogenic) and one dilutor (sample /
reagent) at a time. Any imprecision of the system could be generated either by the
fluidics system (Fluidic parts obstruction, Electro-Valves, air bubbles and/or dilutors
compensation value) or by the optical system (light sources and/or detectors).
Note: Should this test fail, it would be advisable to perform the Optical channel
check out and adjustment procedure to verify the system optics. If the system optics
pass the tests then troubleshoot the fluidic system.
Following are described the procedures to test the Reagent Dilutor with both the
Coagulimetric and Chromogenic Channels.
Reagent Dilutor Test with Coagulimetric Channel.

Reagent Dilutor Test with Chromogenic Channel.
Note: To test the Sample Dilutor with both Channels, sets the Loading Type with
Sample Dilutor. The only additional operation required is to exchanges temporary
(only for the duration of the test with the Sample Dilutor) the two fluidic tubes that are
connected to the Needles Block.

Reagent Dilutor Test with Coagulimetric Channel

- Wash-Reference Emulsion.
- Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been turned On for at least 20 minutes (warm-up of
light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure:
1 Gain access to the service program menu.

2 Thoroughly clean, use distilled water and a cotton swab, the optical path (holes) of
the Rotor Holder, as well as the optical sensor window and optic fibre of the
Coagulimetric Channel.
3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Dilutors Test and Dilutor Test. The
system presents the screen below.
4 Select on the screen Coagulimetric on the left window and Reagent Dilutor on
the right window.
5 Load 4 ml of Wash-Reference Emulsion into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and
places it with its adapter in the reagent position R1.
6 Load 4 ml of distilled water into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and places it with
its adapter in the reagent position R4.
7 Place a brand new rotor into the analysis compartment.
8 Press Start in Manual Rotor Loading. The instrument will load the rotor cuvettes
picking the Wash-Reference Emulsion and the distilled water from the reagent vials
by using the reagent needle and the Reagent Dilutor.

9 Wait for the completion of rotor loading and acquisition cycle then verify that the
following results are obtained.
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) :<=4

CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) : < = 4.5
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) :<=5
R2 : >= 0.996
10 Press V twice to exit.
Reagent Dilutor Test with Chromogenic Channel

P/N 97579-50
- Clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial
Precaution
Make sure that the instrument has been turned On for at least 20 minutes (warm-up of
light source and thermoregulation) prior going through the following procedure:

2 Thoroughly clean, use distilled water and a cotton swab, the optical path (holes) of
the Rotor Holder, as well as the optical sensor window and optic fibre of the
Chromogenic Channel.
3 On the windows like menu enter Service then Dilutors Test and Dilutor Test. The
system presents the screen below.

4 Select on the screen Chromogenic on the left window and Reagent Dilutor on
the right window.
5 Take the content of two vials (4 mL) with PNA concentration 160 mol/L (taken
from the kit P/N 97579-50) into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial with their Dark
Blue adapters and place it in reagent position R1.
6 Load 4 ml of distilled water into a clean, empty 4 mL reagent vial and places it with
its adapter in reagent position R4.
7 Place a new rotor into the analysis compartment.
8 Press Start in Auto Rotor Loading. The instrument will load the rotor cuvettes
picking the PNA and the distilled water from the reagent vials, by using the reagent
needle and Reagent Dilutor.
9 Wait for the completion of rotor loading and acquisition cycle, then verify that the
following results are obtained:
CV% (cuvette # 1 to # 6) : < = 1.5

CV% (cuvette # 7 to # 12) :<=3
CV% (cuvette # 13 to # 18) :<=5
R2 : >= 0.996
10. Press V twice to exit.
7.8.2 Volume Check
This test is designed to verify and/or adjust the overall accuracy of the dispensation of
the dilution system. The accuracy of the dispensation is verified by means of a special
tool called Graduated Capillary. It allows a visual verification of the volumes being
delivered.
The test can be performed using distilled water, however as the results are based on
visual inspection of liquid being actually drawn into the capillary, a dye based aqueous
material works better. If an inaccuracy is found a correction can be made through the
system software introducing either a positive or a negative offset.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Graduated Capillary Kit P/N 82589-00
- Small beaker (10 ml) or other suitable
container.
- Distilled water (or dye based aqueous
solution).
1 Prepare a small beaker with a few ml of either distilled water or a dye based
aqueous solution (if available).
3 On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Priming. The system performs a
fluidic priming cycle.

4 Once the priming is over go through the sequence Service then Dilutors Test then
Volume Check and Sample Dilutor/Reagent Dilutor. The system presents the
screen below.
5 Disconnect the Sample/Reagent needle tubing (the tubes on the Needles Block)
and connect it to a Graduated Capillary (connect the capillary to the upper tubing
to test the Sample Dilutor line or to the lower tubing to test the Reagent Dilutor
line).
6 While holding the capillary above a small beaker out of the liquid press Start.
The system will perform a short prime cycle (to fill the capillary) followed by a re-
aspiration. At this time an air bubble is withdrawn in the Graduated Capillary and a
dialogue box is presented on the screen
7 Deeps the Graduated Capillary into the distilled water then presses OK.
8 The system aspirates about 10 L of water or a dye based aqueous solution (if
available) into the capillary. Verify that the head of the liquid sets between the two
upper marks of the Graduated Capillary.
9 After 10 seconds the instrument will automatically deliver most of the content out
of the Graduated Capillary.
10 Check that liquid remains sets between the two lower marks of the Graduated
Capillary (more closed to the middle as possible). In this condition (dispensed
volume within range) no adjustments are needed, but if the liquid sets above or
below the two lines then a correction is required. The correction can be entered in
the window Select Correction Value.
11 Increase value if too much water stays in the Graduated Capillary at the end of step
9 (dispensed volume insufficient), while decrease value if the water is too close or
below the lowest mark on the Graduated Capillary (dispensed volume too high).
12 Repeat test to assure that entered value achieves proper volume dispensing.
13 If value has changed with respect to the original setting, record the new value on
the paper label located on the right side of the instrument.
14 Press V to exit, remove the Graduated Capillary and refit tubing to the
Sample/Reagent needle.

Following are the Graduated Capillary conditions during the test:
Up p e r Re fe re n c e lin e s
Lo w e r Re fe re n c e lin e s
A sp ira tio n Le v e l
D isp e n se d D isp e n se d D isp e n se d .

Vo lu m e Vo lu m e Vo lu m e
IN SUFFIC IEN T W ITH IN R A N G E TO O H IG H

7.9 Magnetic Sensors

Specific Magnetic sensors are located under the Fluidic Plate and on the Rotor Stack
with the purpose to detect for Rotor Holder and Rotor Stack Covers positions.
Following are the two sensors check procedures.
7.9.1 Rotor Holder Cover Sensor

7.9.2 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
7.9.1 Rotor Holder Cover Sensor
This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Holder Cover
Sensor.
1 Gain access to the Service program menu.

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then A/D Converter Test. The system
presents the screen below:
3 Close manually or with the relevant button the Rotor Cover.

4 Check that the value read on the Cover Sensor (Hall) line is at 2.700 V (200
mV). If necessary adjusts thought RV5 on the Acquisition and Sensors Board
(Board #3).
5 Open manually or with the relevant button the Rotor Cover.
6 Check that the value read on the Cover Sensor (Hall) line is lower of 2.100 V.
7 Press V to exit.
Note: To work properly, this sensor needs correct assemblies and the presence of its
permanent magnet. This is placed inside the Rotor Cover Assembly and must be
correctly polarised.

7.9.2 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor
This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Stack Cover Sensor.

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensor Tests and Optic Sensor Test.
The system presents the screen below:
3 Open the Rotor Stack Cover.

4 Check that on the Rotor Storage Sensor Open line there is displayed a V.
5 Close the Rotor Stack Cover.
6 Check that on the Rotor Storage Sensor Open line is disappeared the V.
7 Press V to exit.
Note: To work properly, this sensor needs the presence of a permanent magnet. Its
placed inside the Rotor Stack Cover and must be correctly polarised.
This sensor doesnt need adjustments because works with a digital output signal (On
or Off).

7.10 Rotor Waste Presence Switch

This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Rotor Waste Presence
Switch.

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Sensor Tests and Optic Sensor Test.
The system presents the screen below.
3 Open the Rotor Waste compartment door and verify the presence of the Rotor
Waste Container (if absent put it in place) then close the door.
4 Check that on the Rotor Waste Presence Switch line there is displayed a V.
5 Open the Rotor Waste compartment door and remove the Rotor Waste Container
then close the door.
6 Check that on the Rotor Waste Presence Switch line is disappeared the V.
7 Press V to exit.
Note: This sensor doesnt need electronic adjustments because works with a digital
output signal (On or Off).
In the first software revision this option is not available and the check is made directly
on the WASTE status displayed in the Material Map screen during the analysis.
WASTE Open meaning that the Rotor Waste Container is not present, WASTE
Full or not Full meaning that the Container is present and its status full/available).

7.11 Switching Power Supply Check Out and Adjustment

This procedure is designed to verify the functionality of the Switching Power Supply
Board.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - DVM
Note: Prior starting procedures its advisable remove the Metallic Drain located
between the Dilutors Module and the Switching Power Supply.
1 Turn On the Instrument.

2 Gain access to the service program menu. This turn On the Halogen Lamp.
3 Set the DVM to reads direct voltages.
4 Connect the ground cable of the DVM to the Test Point TP9 on the Switching
Power Supply.
5 Check that on the other Test Point the values reads are in according with the table
below.
Test Point Names Voltages Output Acceptable Trimmers for

Set Values (V) Ranges (V) Adjustments
TP1 +70VPW 68.5 3.5 -
TP2 +12VPW 12 0.6 -
TP3 +9VPW 9 0.5 -
TP4 15VANA -15 0.1 RV5
TP5 +15VANA +15 0.1 RV4
TP6 +6VLAMP 6 0.1 RV2
TP7 +5VDGT 5.1 0.1 RV3
TP8 +12VDGT 12 0.1 RV6
Note: The trimmers are located on the Switching Power Supply in the zone under the
CPU Master Board. To gain access to them is required the Instrument Turn Off and
the removal of the entire CPU Master package (CPU Master, PC104 and HDD).
6 If there are voltages Out of Range, try to check the S.P.S. Board without loads. If
without loads the problem persists then replace the S.P.S. Board.
Note: The S.P.S. Board has many protection circuits on board (see sub-section
3.3.10). When one of them is activated the S.P.S. enter in Protection Mode (Turn
Off all the voltages and put the LED DL1 On).

7.12 Touch Screen Calibration

This procedure is designed to calibrate the parameters in the Touch Screen Control
Board in respect to the physical dimension of the Touch Screen surface.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Touch Screen Calibration Tool
P/N190574-00
Note: If the Touch Screen Calibration Tool is not available then its advisable use an
object with the tip rounded. Dont use any object that can damage the Touch Screen
surface.

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Touch Calibration.
3 A window appears with inside the information that The current Touch Screen
calibration will be lost. The operation cannot be reverted. Its OK to proceed?
4 Press OK.
5 A window appears with inside the instruction Please touch into red rectangle 1.
6 In the upper left corner of the screen a red rectangle has appeared. Touch it with
care using the Touch Screen Calibration Tool.
7 Repeat the same operation with the red rectangle 2 located on the lower right of
the screen.
8 In order to verify the calibration repeat the operation also the check red rectangle
3.
9 A window appears with inside the information that Touch Screen successfully
calibrated. Save the calibration?
10 Press OK to save the calibration and exit.
Note: During the calibration procedure any error may occur or the time out to touch
the proper red rectangle on the screen has expired (15 seconds). In this case a windows
appears with inside the information that the touch screen calibration is aborted. In this
condition the Touch Screen is out of order and is needed to use the TAB key (or the
mouse if available) to select the Retry button and then press the Enter key. Repeat the
entire procedure until the Touch Screen is successfully calibrated.

7.13 Interfaces Test

This section provides information in order to verify through the Interfaces test the
proper functionality of the interfaces relevant circuitry.
Following are the specific procedures to test the proper functionality of each circuit.
7.13.1 RS 232 Modem HW loop

7.13.2 RS 232 Mouse HW loop
7.13.3 RS 232 Host HW loop
7.13.4 RS 232 Bar Code HW loop
7.13.5 Parallel Printer
7.13.1 RS 232 Modem HW loop
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Modem interface serial port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
P/N 99211-01
- RS 232 C Interface Check Connector
Adapter P/N 71467-70
Note: If the RS 232 C Interface Check Connector and its Adapter are not available
then its advisable use the customised 9 Pin Check Connector (Female) as reported in
the section 6.2 Service Tools.

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Interfaces Test. The instrument
shows the screen below.

3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the RS 232
Modem HW loop option.
4 Press Continue.
5 A window appears with inside the instruction Please install RS 232 Check
Connector on Modem serial port.
6 Properly install the RS 232 C Check Connector with the RS 232 C Check
Connector Adapter on the Modem serial port.
7 Press Start.
8 The next window with the results may be Test Passed or Test Failed. In
case that the test is failed then is needed to troubleshoot the Modem serial
line.
9 Press OK to exit.
Note: In case of the result Test Failed then investigates on the Interface Board, the
Flat Cable and on the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.
7.13.2 RS 232 Mouse HW loop
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Mouse interface serial port.
P/N 99211-01


3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the RS 232 Mouse HW
loop option.
4 Press Continue.
Connector on Mouse serial port.
Connector Adapter on the Mouse serial port.
7 Press Start.
8 The next window with the results may be Test Passed or Test Failed. In case
that the test is failed then is needed to troubleshoot the Mouse serial line.
9 Press OK to exit.
7.13.3 RS 232 Host HW loop
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Host interface serial port.
P/N 99211-01


3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the RS 232 Host HW
loop option.
4 Press Continue.
Connector on Host serial port.
Connector Adapter on the Host serial port.
7 Press Start.
that the test is failed then is needed to troubleshoot the Host serial line.
9 Press OK to exit.
7.13.4 RS 232 Bar Code HW loop
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Bar Code interface serial port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Tested External Bar Code Reader
Note:The External Bar-Code Reader is NOT AVAILABLE in this SW release.
Connect the External Bar Code reader to the relevant port on the rear of the
instrument then use it to compile a new Loadlist.
If a Tested External Bar Code Reader is not available then its advisable use the
customised 9 Pin Check Connector (Male) reported in the section 6.2 Service Tools
and follow the procedure below.

3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the RS 232 Bar Code
HW loop option.
4 Press Continue.
Connector on Bar Code serial port.
6 Properly install the customised RS 232 C Check Connector.
7 Press Start.
that the test is failed then is needed to troubleshoot the Bar Code serial line.
9 Press OK to exit.
7.13.5 Parallel Printer
This test is designed to verify the functionality of the Parallel Printer interface parallel
port.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - External Printer Cable P/N 84864-50
- PC Standard Parallel Printer
(ESCP2 / PCL5 Protocols compatible)
Before turn on the Instrument connect through the External Printer Cable the PC
Standard Parallel Printer.
1 Turn on the Instrument then gain access to the Service program menu.

3 Touch the little arrow on the side of test name then select the Parallel Printer
option.
4 Press Continue.
5 A window appears with inside the instruction Please connect an external printer
on the parallel printer port.
6 Turn on the printer and verify the presence of the paper inside then put the printer
On Line.
7 Press Continue.
8 The next window with the results may be Printer Test Passed or Printer Test
Failed. In case that the test is failed then is needed to troubleshoot the Parallel
Printer line.
9 Visually inspect the print out of the External Printer in order to detect data
transmission problem.
10 Press OK to exit.
Note: In case of the result Test Failed or Wrong print out then investigates on the
Interface Board, the Flat Cable and on the CPU Master & PC104 Boards.

7.14 Temperature Control

This section provides information in order to verify all the temperature of the device
onboard the Instrument as well as all the other temperature over heating protection
checks. More information on the instrument assemblies temperatures and the internal
cooling system are also provided in the drawing Operating Temperature and Internal
Ventilation reported in the figure 7.14 Drawing 1 of the section 10 Drawings.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Temperature Probe P/N 70954-00
Note: Before perform this check procedure make sure that the Instrument is turn on at
least for 30 minutes.

2 On the windows like menu enter Diagnostic then Temperature Control. The
instrument shows the screen below.
3 Verify that all the devices are in the proper range of Temperature.
Note: If the System detects a temperature out of range, after few seconds raise a
warning and the temperature is displayed in red colour. If the Instrument is Turn on
only from few minutes or there is a problem on a specific device then the temperature
may be far in respect to its range.
In this case the temperature is displayed with when is too low or with * * *
when is too high in respect to its working range.
4 In order to troubleshoots the device with a temperature problem, verify the

reading of the temperature sensor (thermistor) by touching with the hand the
device (Ex: Rotor Holder at room temperature and * * * on the display).

Important: May be that analytical problem, relevant with the Rotor Holder
temperature occurring. In this case using the Temperature Probe P/N 70954-00 is
possible to check the truthful temperature inside the analysis plastic rotor. The relevant
test is described with the tool in the section 6.2 Service Tools.
The Instrument is provided of internal cooling system. This is composed by the

Instrument Fan Assy, located on the rear-right side of the Instrument, that force
airflow inside the instrument and cleans it from dust through the Air Filter.
A Secondary Fans system, located on the left side of the Instrument, forces the heated
air outside.
A specific Fan Control Board with onboard a temperature detector is also present. This
board provides power to the Peltier Fan that is always working and turns on the
Auxiliary Fan when the temperature of the air around the board exceed the 36 C (over
36 C turn on the Auxiliary Fan, under the 34 C turn off the Auxiliary Fan).
The functionality of this board may be tested using a hair-drier.
The maintenance of the Air Filter is very important for the maximum efficiency of the
internal air cooling system.
Note: The inefficiency of the internal air cooling system may be critical for the
Switching Power Supply Board. That is provided of a temperature control circuit
which raise before a temperature warning (over 60 C) and then shut down the
Instrument if the temperature exceed the 75 C.
7.15 Floppy Disk Drive Test

This section provides information in order to verify through the Floppy Disk Drive
Test the proper functionality of the Floppy Disk Drive and its relevant circuitry.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - 1,44 MB Floppy Disk formatted
Note: If a 1,44 MB Floppy Disk formatted is not available its possible format a new
one with a Personal Computer with standard operative system (DOS / Windows).

2 On the windows like menu enter Service then Floppy Disk Drive Test. The
instrument shows the screen below.
3 At the beginning of the floppy presence test verify that there arent floppy disk
in the Floppy Disk Drive (or remove if needed).
4 Press Continue.
5 A window appears with inside the message Operation in progress. Please
wait.
6 In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message Disk present
in drive. Extract floppy before proceed.
7 At the beginning of the floppy write protected test insert a write protect floppy
disk in the Floppy Disk Drive.
8 Press Continue.
wait.
10 In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message The inserted
Floppy disk is not write protected.
11 At the beginning of the floppy usability test insert a formatted empty floppy
disk in the Floppy Disk Drive.
12 Press Continue.
wait then another window with the test progress bar is displayed. In the end
another window appears with inside the message Floppy disk drive test
successfully completed.
14 In case of test failure, a window appears with inside the message Usability
floppy disk test failed (on creating file)!.
15 Press OK and then Cancel to exit.
Note: In any case of tests failure result then investigates on the Floppy Disk Drive, the
Flat Cable and on the CPU Master Board.

7.16 Software checking & loading

This section provide information in order to complete explain the upgrade procedure
of the software in the system. The software is stored in the Hard Disk Drive and in the
Flash Memory Chips on the boards.
Following are the specific procedures.
7.16.1 Software Identification

7.16.2 Software Upload & Upgrade
7.16.3 Databases Check
7.16.4 Backup / Restore of the system configuration
7.16.5 Upgrade IL Library
7.16.1 1 Software Identification
1 Gain accesses to the Service program menu.

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software and Software Identification.
The instrument shows the screen below.
3 Verify that all the Software releases are in the last versions available.
4 Press V to exit.
Note: The Master and the IL Library software release displayed are the current stored
in the HDD, while the Slave and the REM software release displayed are relevant to
the software stored in the boards memories (Boards #2 and #4).
If for troubleshooting purposes the current Slave Board #2 or REM Board #4 are
replaced its required to perform the Upgrade procedure. Thats in order to program
the new board memories with the last software revision that is Uploaded in the Hard
Disk Drive. Only after the Upgrade procedure then the last software revision will
working in the boards.

If a new software revision is available then follow the Upload and the Upgrade
procedure in order to replace (before in the HDD with the Upload and then on the
Board with the Upgrade) the old software present in the instrument with the brand new
one in the Upgrade Kits. Thats for the 3 main software (Master, Slave and REM)
while to upgrade the IL Library software follows the upgrade procedure described in
7.16.2 Software Upload & Upgrade
This sub-section clarifies the sequence of operation required to perform the Upload
and Upgrade for the Master, Slave and REM software.
The system is provided with a Hard Disk Drive where during the Upload is stored the
software loaded from the floppy disks.
Then during the Upgrade procedure the loaded software replaces the old one and
become operative at the next turn on.
Note: Its very important that each procedure is individually performed. Perform all the
3 Uploads and then select all the 3 Upgrades may generate confusion in the sequence
with the results that any software will not upgraded.
Following are the specific software upgrade procedure.
Software Master
Software Slave
Software REM
Software Master
This procedure is designed to install a new Master software release for the Instrument.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Software System Disk Kit
P/N 181812-75

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software, SW Upgrade, SW
Master and Upload.
3 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote Upload Master code
selected. Do you confirm?. Press Yes to continue.
4 As required Insert the first floppy disk. in the floppy drive then press OK.
5 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote Upload in progress and
an operation in progress bar.
6 When the progress bar is full the instrument shows a window where the system
require to Insert another disk.. Insert the next disk and press OK.
7 Repeat last few steps until all the Master floppy disks are uploaded.

8 The Upload procedure is ended and the instrument shows a window with inside
wrote, Upload code completed. To continue the Upgrade software, please
select the Upgrade option.. Press OK to continue.
9 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software, SW Upgrade, SW
Master and Upgrade.
10 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote, Upgrade Master code
selected. Do you confirm?. Press Yes to continue.
11 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote Upgrade in progress
and an operation in progress bar.
12 When the progress bar is full the instrument shows a window where with inside
wrote, Upgrade code completed. To continue switch the system Off, wait few
seconds and switch it back On.. Now, the software is freeze and the only
possible operation is to switch Off and then On the Instrument.
13 After the turn On, verify the new software release follows the software
identification procedure.
Software Slave
This procedure is designed to install a new Slave software release for the Instrument.
P/N 181812-75

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software, SW Upgrade, SW Slave
and Upload.
3 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote, Upload code selected. Do you
confirm?. Press Yes to continue.
4 As required Insert disk. in the floppy drive then press OK.
5 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote Upload in progress and an
operation in progress bar.
6 When the progress bar is full the Upload procedure is ended and the instrument
shows a window with inside wrote, Upload code completed. To continue the
Upgrade software, please select the Upgrade option.. Press OK to continue.
7 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software, SW Upgrade, SW Slave
and Upgrade.
8 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote, Upgrade code selected. Do
you confirm?. Press Yes to continue.
9 The instrument shows for few seconds a window with inside wrote, Upgrade in
progress.
10 After the instrument shows a window with inside wrote, The device is ready to
receive the code, please Logout. Switch the system Off, wait few seconds and
switch it back On, to continue the Upgrade.. Logout, Switch Off and then On the
Instrument to continue.
11 When during the Init System the system shows a window with inside wrote Init
System in progress Please wait! and an operation in progress bar, then the

system test the Slave software with the result that it is invalidate. So the system
proceed to replace it with the new one uploaded in three steps.
12 The first step to upgrade the software on the Slave Board #2 is show in the
window Erase Flash Memory in progress Please wait! with the relevant
13 The second step show in the window Upgrade Slave code in progress Please
wait! with the relevant operation in progress bar.
14 The third and last step shows in the window Init Slave code in progress Please
wait!. After that the Init System continue normally without other interruption.
15 After the Log-In verifies the new software release follows the software
Software REM
This procedure is designed to install a new REM software release for the Instrument.
P/N 181812-75

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software, SW Upgrade, SW REM
and Upload.
3 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote, Upload code selected. Do you
confirm?. Press Yes to continue.
4 As required Insert disk. in the floppy drive then press OK.
5 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote Upload in progress and an
6 When the progress bar is full the Upload procedure is ended and the instrument
shows a window with inside wrote, Upload code completed. To continue the
Upgrade software, please select the Upgrade option.. Press OK to continue.
7 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Software, SW Upgrade, SW REM
and Upgrade.
8 The instrument shows a window with inside wrote, Upgrade code selected. Do
you confirm?. Press Yes to continue.
9 The instrument shows for a second a window with inside wrote, Upgrade in
progress.
10 After the instrument shows a window with inside wrote, The device is ready to
receive the code, please Logout. Switch the system Off, wait few seconds and
switch it back On, to continue the Upgrade.. Logout, Switch Off and then On the
Instrument to continue.
11 When during the Init System the system shows a window with inside wrote Init
System in progress Please wait! and an operation in progress bar, then the
system test the REM software with the result that it is invalidate. So the system
proceed to replace it with the new one uploaded.
12 To upgrade the software on the REM Board #2 the system shows in a window
REM code Upgrade in progress Please wait! with the relevant operation in
progress bar. After that the progress bar is full then the Init System continue
normally without other interruption.

13 After the Log-In verifies the new software release follows the software
7.16.3 DataBases Check
This sub-section is designed to clarify the action that is possible do in case that is
present an issue on databases as well as to perform Databases checks.
If the Checking Database during the Init System phase (at Turn On) detects a problem
then the system shows the following menu.
Database check reported some errors. Please select one of these options.
1 Restore last saved Database (on Date and time)
If this option is selected then the system proceeds with the restore of the last valid
database saved.
Caution! That means that all the data and modification stored from the last self-backup
(on date and time) to now will be lost!
2 Power off and call service
If this option is selected then the system proceeds showing the message System
halted. You can safely turn off ACL.
3 Ignore error and proceed with Init
If this option is selected then the system proceeds with the Init System.
Caution! Is possible that after the Init System the instrument is halted with a database
failure message. This depends from a big problem in the instrument database and the
access to the Operator Main Program is denied. In this case the only chance is turn off
and then on again the instrument, and chose 1 (Restore last saved database) in the
menu.
Caution! If, after the Init System, is possible gain access to the Service Program then
its advisable try to perform an Archive of all the data not saved yet (QC, AR,
Calibrations and Patient data) and also a Backup of the system configuration (if an
other one is not available) as described in the sub-section 7.16.4.

After this, on the windows like menu enter Service then DataBases Check.
The system shows a window where is possible select one of the four following option.
- Restore whole Database

- Restore Setup and Calibration Database deleting other data
- Restore Setup Database deleting other data
- Ignore error
If also through this menu its impossible recover Data and/or Setup configuration then
Log-Out, switch off and then On the Instrument and in the menu select the option 1
Restore last saved Database.
7.16.4 Backup / Restore of the system configuration
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the Backup / Restore of the
system configuration.
The following procedure allows to the service engineer to save on a floppy disk the
current configuration of the instrument with the purpose to create a backup copy that
may be restored in the future on the same but also on other instruments.
The databases that will be saved contain information about the setup of:
Liquids
Tests
Profile
QC
AR
Interface configuration
System configuration
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - Available Floppy Disk

1,44 MB formatted.
1 Gain access to the Analysis / Service program menu.

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Backup / Restore.
3 The instrument shows a window with inside 3 choice buttons.
4 Touch Backup. The system takes few minutes to prepare the data for the backup
displaying the message Backup of database in progress, please wait.
5 When required insert the floppies disk in the Floppy Drive and press OK.
6 The system writes the data on the disk displaying a progress bar.
7 Finished the operation extracts the floppy disk and put on an identification label.

Following is the procedure is to restore the backup data file on the instrument.

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Backup / Restore.
3 The instrument shows a window with inside 3 choice buttons.
4 Touch Restore. The system displays a choice box with the message Restoring
the saved instrument configuration some results in the databases could be erased
then presses Yes.
5 When required inserts the proper floppies disk in the Floppy Drive and press OK.
6 The system reads the data on the disk displaying a progress bar and then takes few
minutes to restore the data.
7 Finished the operation confirms and extracts the floppy disk.
Touching the button View Backup Date is also possible check the date of the
Backup file on the disk without proceed with the Restore.
7.16.5 Upgrade IL Library
This sub-section is designed to provide information about the Upgrade of the IL

Library.
The following procedure allows to the service engineer to perform the IL Library
Upgrade.
The databases that will be updated contain information about:

New Liquids
New Profiles
New Interference Table
New Tests
For all the tests updated in the databases with a new revision the calibration, AR, QC
and patients data will be lost. In the end of the operation the system provide to the
service engineer / customer the list of all the data erased.
Materials / tools necessary for the test: - IL Library Upgrade Disk

2 On the windows like menu enter Utility then Upgrade IL Library.
3 The instrument shows a window with the message Load DB file from floppy disk
then touch continue.
4 Insert the first disk as required and touch OK.
5 The system takes few minutes to read the data and Upgrade the libraries.
6 When finished extract the floppy disk in the Floppy Drive and press OK.

8 System Interfacing
This section provides the main information related to the configuration of the
instrument interface for the communication with external devices.
The devices that are possible connecting to the instrument are following.
8.1 Keyboard
8.2 External Parallel Printer
8.3 Network
8.4 Modem
8.5 Mouse
8.6 Host Computer
8.7 External Bar Code Reader

System Interfacing
8.1 Keyboard
On the windows like menu select Setup then Interfaces and Keyboard. The
The window in this screen allows configuring the ACL 9000 PC standard keyboard for
the language and layout used. Also the enabling of the on-screen keypad is
configurable by selecting:
KEYBOARD TYPE: English

French
German
Spanish
Italian
United States
NUMERICAL KEYPAD: Disabled

All numerical fields
All numerical fields and Sample ID

8.2 External Parallel Printer

On the windows like menu select Setup then Interfaces and Printer. The system
The window in this screen allows configuring of external printer selecting:
PRINTER PROTOCOL: ESC/P2 (for Epson-like printers)

HP-PCL (for HP-like printers)
PAPER DIMENSION: A4 (210 x 297 mm.)

Letter (216 x 280 mm.)
PAPER FORMAT: Single sheet

Continuous sheet
REPORT TYPE: Cumulative

Sample Report
PRINTED SAMPLES: Any (all the analysed)

Completed
AUTOMATIC PRINT OUT: Checked (Enable)

Empty (Disable)
SAMPLE REPORT DATA: Instrument Name (Checked Enable)

Normal Ranges (Checked Enable)
Date/Time (Checked Enable)
CUSTOMISE HEADER: Enter in the Custom Header screen.

System Interfacing
8.3 Network
Not supported in this Software Revision.
8.4 Modem
Not supported in this Software Revision.
8.5 Mouse
The mouse may be used as a selecting device in place of touching the screen.
At the turn on, during the Init. System phases, the instrument checks on the proper
serial port also for the presence of standard serial mouse.
If the mouse is detected then the relevant arrow appears on the display.
If the mouse is connected after the Init. System phases then the instrument will not
detected it until the next turn on.
8.6 Host Computer

On the windows like menu select Setup then Interfaces and Host. The system

The window in this screen allows configuring of Host Computer interface selecting:
BAUD RATE: 2400

4800
9600
19200
38400
AUTOMATIC DATA TX (TRANSMISSION): Not Required

Patient Samples Only
QC, AR and Patient Samples
HOST QUERY: Checked (Enable)

Empty (Disable)
DELETE AUTOMATICALLY AFTER TX (TRANSMISSION): Checked (Enable)

Empty (Disable)
UNIQUE INSTRUMENT ID: Checked (Enable, from 1 to 9)

Empty (Disable)
Information about the Host Communication Protocol is detailed in the section 12

Appendix A of this manual.
The ACL to Host Computer Interconnect Cable is P/N 181812-74.
The following table provides information regarding the wiring of the interconnection
cable between the ACL and Host Computer.
ACL Side Host Computer Side
Interface Type: DTE Interface Type: DTE

9 Pin Female Delta Connector 9 Pin Female Delta Connector
PIN DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION
1 N.C. 1 N.C.
2 TXD 2 RXD
3 RXD 3 TXD
4 DTR 6 DSR
5 Signal GND 5 Signal GND
6 DSR 4 DTR
7 RTS 8 CTS
8 CTS 7 RTS
9 N.C. 9 N.C.
Shield to connector shell Shield to connector shell

System Interfacing
8.7 External Bar Code Reader

On the windows like menu select Setup then Interfaces and Barcode. The
The first step is enable (Checked) the Internal and/or External Barcode Reader.
The four fields visible on the screen correspond to the four families of barcodes that
may be activated on the ACL, along with their corresponding subtypes of barcodes.
Choose for each field one of the options below according to the laboratorys needs.
CODABAR: Disabled
No Checksum
AIM Mod 16
NW7 Mod 11
NW7 Mod 16
CODE 39: Disabled

No Checksum
Mod 43
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5: Disabled
No Checksum
USS Mod 10
OPCC Mod 10
CODE 128: Disabled

No Checksum
Note: The External Bar Code Reader is not supported in this Software Revision.

9 Part List
This section contains information about the service parts as well as the expendable
materials that are available for use with the ACL 9000 System. A large number of the
expendable materials are shipped in the Startup Kit included with the ACL 9000
system. These items may be ordered using their Part Numbers as shown in the tables.
9.1 Startup Kit

9.2 Expendable Materials
9.3 Service Parts List

Part List
9.1 Startup Kit

The following expendable materials are contained in the Startup Kit that is shipped
with the ACL 9000 System.
Sample Trays
Three types of sample trays are available as shown below. The startup kit includes two
of them, chosen by the user according to the desired system configuration.
Tray type Used for

3 mL Primary tube, 3 or 3.5 mL total volume (13x75 mm)
5 mL Primary tube, 5 mL total volume (13x75 or 13x100 mm)
S 11.5 Sarstedt type tube, 3 mL (11.5x66 mm) or 5 mL (11.5x92 mm)
Sample Tray Adapters for plastic cups - 4 pieces

for 4 mL glass vials - 6 pieces
Reagent Vial Adapters for 10 mL vials, reagents requiring magnetic

stirring (grey) - 4 pieces
for 10 mL vials, reagents not requiring magnetic
stirring (light blue) - 6 pieces
for 4 mL vials, reagents not requiring magnetic
stirring (dark blue) - 4 pieces
Magnetic Stirrers for reagent stirring - one package containing 6

pieces
Small Sample Cups 0.5 mL sample cups - one package containing

1000 pieces
Large Sample Cups 2.0 mL sample cups - one package containing

1000 pieces
Diluent/Buffer/Reagent Cups 4.0 mL cups, with labels - one package

containing 100 pieces
Diluent/Buffer/Reagent Glass Vials 10 mL glass vials - one package

containing 10 pieces
Needles Block Assy an assembly consisting of an acrylic block with

the sample and reagent needles and their
associated liquid sensors
Sample and Reagent Tubing 1.5 meter piece of tubing to be cut and used as
needed

Insertion Tool for Tubing a tool to be used when replacing sample and
reagent tubing
Wash/Reference Emulsiona 1-liter bottle of Emulsion
Rinse/Waste Reservoir a reservoir for needles rinse and liquid waste
Waste Bottle a 5-liter bottle to collect ACL waste
Waste Tubing a 1.5 meter piece of tubing to be used for

collection of liquid waste
Adjustment Tool for Needles a tool to be used for adjusting the position of the
needles in the arm
Rotors 20-Cuvette Rotors - package containing 100

pieces
Rotor Insertion Tool a tool used for inserting rotors into the system
Rotor Waste Container a removable container used inside the system to

hold the used rotors
Moulded Air Filter One air filter for the analyser body
Fuses 6.3 AT 2 fuses for the system
Power Cord a power cord for the system: the cord included is
consistent with the voltage with which the
system will be used
External Printer Cable a cable to connect the optional external printer
Host Computer Cable a cable to connect the optional host computer
Software System Disk Kit kit containing the main system software
Test Library Disk Kit kit containing the test library software
Operators Manual the Operators Manual for use of the ACL 9000
system
Compliance Certificate a specific system compliance certificate

Part List
9.2 Expendables Materials

Following are the expendable materials available for the ACL 9000 System.
Part Number Item Description # Pieces in

Package Unit
181812-80 Sample Tray for 13x75 mm, (3-3.5 mL) tubes 1
181812-79 Sample Tray for 13x75 & 13x100 mm, (5 mL) 1
tubes
181812-85 Sample Tray for Sarstedt 11.5x66 mm (3 mL) 1
& 11.5x92 mm (5 mL) tubes
181812-68 Sample Tray adapter for plastic cup 1
181812-69 Sample Tray adapter for 4 mL vials 1
181812-65 Adapter for 10 mL reagent vials with magnetic 4
stirring (grey)
181812-66 Adapter for 10 mL reagent vials without magnetic 6
stirring (light blue)
181812-67 Adapter for 4 mL reagent vials without magnetic 4
stirring (dark blue)
097466-06 Magnetic Stirrer 6
189241-00 Glass Vials, 10 mL 10
067992-00 Sample Cups, 0.5 mL 1000
055751-00 Sample Cups, 2 mL 1000
067994-00 Cups, 4 mL, plus Labels 100
068000-00 Rotors - 20 cuvettes 100
181812-77 Rotor Refill Tool 1
181812-73 Rotor Waste Container 1
181108-43 Needles Block 1
181039-41 Needles Adjustment Tool 1
073289-01 Sample and Reagent Tubing, 1.5 m 1
181080-65 Sample and Reagent Tubing Extractor Tool 1
181812-72 Rinse/Waste Reservoir, for needles wash 1
181057-69 Liquid Waste Bottle 1
099095-03 Waste Tube, 1.5 m 1
181812-71 Air Filter, moulded 1
068931-02 Fuses 6.3 AT 2
084853-00 Power Cord, 100-115 V 1
071992-00 Power Cord, 220-240 V 1
084864-50 External Printer Cable 1
181812-74 Host Computer Cable (9 pin 9 pin) 1
200024-00 Wash-Reference Emulsion, 1 litre 1
181812-75 Software System Disk Kit 1
181812-76 Test Library Disk Kit 1
097627-50 Compliance Certificate 1
080961-01 Operators Manual, English version 1

9.3 Service Parts List

The following Service Parts are available for the ACL 9000 System.
Part Number Item Description Area
182352-10 CPU Master Board #1 PCB

182355-30 Slave Board #2 PCB
182355-40 Acquisition & Sensors Board #3 PCB
182356-00 Rotor Exchange Module Board #4 PCB
182355-50 Motors Board #5 PCB
182355-60 Photometric & Temp. Control Board #6 PCB
182355-20 PC104 Board PCB
182356-60 Switching Power Supply Board PCB
182355-70 Mother Board PCB
182355-00 Interface Board PCB
182355-80 Modules Interconnection Board PCB
182356-30 Photometer Interface Board PCB
182356-50 Needles & Wash-R Sensor Interconnection Board PCB
182356-10 REM Upper Interconnection Board PCB
182356-20 REM Lower Interconnection Board PCB
070908-00 Dual Channel Optical Switch PCB
182356-80 Dual Channel Optical Switch Flat PCB
182356-90 Fan Control Board PCB
181105-70 Display Assembly Miscellaneous
084869-11 Display Cable Miscellaneous
069454-18 LCD Touch Screen Control Board PCB
182355-10 LCD Video Board PCB
182353-50 Speaker Miscellaneous
065011-10 Floppy Disk Drive Miscellaneous
065033-00 Hard Disk Drive Miscellaneous
181108-26 Instrument Fan Assy Miscellaneous
181108-27 Secondary Fan Assy Miscellaneous
181108-28 Peltier Fan Assy Miscellaneous
181108-29 Auxiliary Fan Assy Miscellaneous
181108-30 Autosampler Movement Assy Mech. Assy.
084869-38 Autosampler Internal Ring Sensor Optics Assy
084869-39 Autosampler External Rings Sensor Optics Assy
181108-33 Barcode Assy Optics Assy
181108-34 Peltier 1 Assy Mech. Assy.
181021-28 Peltier Temperature Sensor Miscellaneous
181108-35 Stirrer Motor Mech. Assy.
181108-36 Dilutor Assy Mech. Assy.
181108-37 Dilutor Chamber Miscellaneous
181108-38 Dilutor Electro-Valve 3 Way Miscellaneous
070907-00 Single Channel Optical Switch PCB

Part List
074068-00 T Connector Fluidic Assy

073289-01 Tubing (mt.) Fluidic Assy
181108-40 Reference Emulsion Sensor Miscellaneous
181108-41 Sample Arm Movement Assy Mech. Assy.
181108-42 Sample Arm Mech. Assy.
181108-43 Needles Block Mech. Assy.
182356-40 Liquid Level Detection Board PCB
084869-12 Liquid Level Detection Cable Miscellaneous
181108-46 Rotor Cover Assy Mech. Assy.
082627-00 Chrom Sensor Board Optics Assy
089721-00 Filter Optical 405 nm Optics Assy
084869-44 Chrom Coaxial Cable Optics Assy
181108-47 Rotor Cover Movement Assy Mech. Assy.
066675-60 Rotor Cover Belt Mech. Assy.
190656-00 Rotor Cover Sensor PCB
181108-50 Rotor Holder Movement Assy Mech. Assy.
181024-43 Brushes Assy Miscellaneous
181102-10 Rotor Holder Snap Mech. Assy.
084869-46 Coagulimetric Sensor w/cable Optics Assy
181025-15 Coagulimetric Channel LED w/Fibre Optics Assy
181021-95 Optical Collimator Assy Optics Assy
181021-81 Halogen Lamp Socket Assy Optics Assy
181108-53 Rotor Exchange Module Assy (Basic) Mech. Assy.
181108-54 Rotor Arm Movement Assy Mech. Assy.
181108-55 Rotor Arm Mech. Assy.
181103-06 Spring for Rotor Arm Mech. Assy.
181108-57 Rotor Transport Mech. Assy.
082433-00 Rotor Transport Motor Mech. Assy.
181108-59 Rotor Stack assy Mech. Assy.
181108-60 Electro-Magnet Miscellaneous
181103-22 Spring for Rotor Stack Mech. Assy.
182356-70 Rotor Stack Cover Sensor PCB
084869-36 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Upper Optics Assy
084869-37 Optical Sensor Rotor Stack Lower Optics Assy
084869-47 Optical Sensor Rotor Waste Full Optics Assy
084869-60 Rotor Waste Presence Switch Miscellaneous
190693-00 ACL 9000 Preventive Maintenance Kit Miscellaneous

10 Drawings
This section is designed to groups all the main drawings related to the specific sections
included in this service manual. The drawings are organised by number of section
where are explained and then for number of drawing used in the same section.
Following is the index of the drawings.
2.5.1 Drawing 1 Analysis Windows Like Menu Bar Expanded Diagram

2.5.2 Drawing 1 Service Windows Like Menu Bar Expanded Diagram
3.1.2 Drawing 1 Instrument Fluidic System Cycles Diagram
3.3.1 Drawing 1 Mother Board & Interconnections General Block Diagram
3.3.3 Drawing 1 Quick Reference Board Functions Diagram
3.3.4 Drawing 1 CPU Master Board General Block Diagram
3.3.4 Drawing 2 PC104 Board General Block Diagram
3.3.5 Drawing 1 Slave Board General Block Diagram
3.3.5 Drawing 2 Slave Board Communication Section
3.3.5 Drawing 3 Slave Board Memory Section
3.3.5 Drawing 4 Slave Board Main Logic Section
3.3.6 Drawing 1 Acquisition & Sensors Board General Block Diagram
3.3.6 Drawing 2 Acquisition & Sensors Board Multiplexer &
Acquisition Section
3.3.6 Drawing 3 Acquisition & Sensors Board Channel Amplifier
Section
3.3.6 Drawing 4 Acquisition & Sensors Board Sample Tray Detectors
Emitter Section
3.3.6 Drawing 5 Acquisition & Sensors Board Sample Tray Detectors
Receiver Section
3.3.6 Drawing 6 Acquisition & Sensors Board Needles Sensors Section
3.3.6 Drawing 7 Acquisition & Sensors Board Reference Emulsion
Presence Sections
3.3.6 Drawing 8 Acquisition & Sensors Board Analysis Compartment
Cover Sensor Section
3.3.7 Drawing 1 Rotor Exchange Module Board General Block Diagram
3.3.7 Drawing 2 Rotor Exchange Module Board Transport Motor Section
3.3.7 Drawing 3 Rotor Exchange Module Board Rotor Arm Motors
Section
3.3.7 Drawing 4 Rotor Exchange Module Board Memory &
Communication Section
3.3.7 Drawing 5 Rotor Exchange Module Board Infra Red Sensors Section
3.3.7 Drawing 6 Rotor Exchange Module Board Electro Magnet Control
Section

Drawings
3.3.8 Drawing 1 Motors Board General Block Diagram

3.3.8 Drawing 2 Motors Board Autosampler Motor
Section
3.3.8 Drawing 3 Motors Board Sample Arm Motors
Section
3.3.8 Drawing 4 Motors Board Dilutors Motors Section
3.3.8 Drawing 5 Motors Board Magnetic Stirrer Motors
Section
3.3.9 Drawing 1 Photom & Temp Control Board General Block Diagram
3.3.9 Drawing 2 Photom & Temp Control Board Rotor Motor Section
3.3.9 Drawing 3 Photom & Temp Control Board Analysis Compartment
Cover Motor Section
3.3.9 Drawing 4 Photom & Temp Control Board Rotor Thermoregulation
Section
3.3.9 Drawing 5 Photom & Temp Control Board Peltiers Thermoregulation
Section
3.3.9 Drawing 6 Photom & Temp Control Board Rotors Transport & Feed
Stack Section
3.3.10 Drawing 1 Switching Power Supply Board General Block Diagram
3.3.11 Drawing 1 Instrument Ground Circuit
4.1.5 Drawing 1 Rotor Exchange Module Replacement
4.2 Drawing 1 Instrument Covers
7.14 Drawing 1 Operating Temperatures & Internal Ventilation

3.3.3 Drawing 1 Quick Reference Board Functions Diagram
Hard Disk Drive & Floppy Disk Drive
Power (MB)
LCD Board LCD
Speaker
CPU MASTER
Mouse
BOARD # 1
Parallel Printer
Internal Bus
Ethernet
Interface Board
Keyboard
Power Modem & Host
PC104 BOARD External Bar Code Reader
Touch Board Touch Screen

Arcnet Connection
Power (MB)
SLAVE Internal Bar Code Reader
16 Bit
BOARD # 2
Coagulimetric & Chromogenic Optic Channels

16 Bit
Autosampler Optical Sensors
ACQUISITION & SENSORS
LLD Board Needles Sensor
BOARD # 3
Power (MB) Wash-R Emulsion Sensor
Rotor Cover Sensor
Rotor Arm Horizontal Motor 24Vdc

Serial Line (MB)
Rotor Arm Vertical Motor 24Vdc
Rotor Transport Motor 24Vdc
REM Motors Dual Channel Optical Switch

ROTOR EXCHANGE MODULE
BOARD # 4
Rotors Stack & Rotors Waste Full Optical Sensors
Rotor Arm & Rotor Stack Electro-Magnet
Bus Slave
Power (MB) Rotors Stack Cover Sensor
Rotor Waste Presence Switch
Autosampler Motor 12Vdc

8 Bit
Sample Arm Horizontal Motor 12Vdc
Sample Arm Vertical Motor 26Vdc
Reagent Dilutor Motor 12Vdc

MOTORS
Sample Dilitor Motor 12Vdc
BOARD # 5
Magnetic Stirrer Motors 26Vac
Sample & Reagent Dilutor Electro-Valves 12Vdc
Power (MB) Coagulimetric Channel LED 12Vdc
Motors Dual Channel Optical Switch (W/O REM Motors)
Rotor Holder Motor 70Vdc

8 Bit
Rotor Cover Motor 12Vdc
Rotor Holder Temperature

PHOTOMETRIC & TEMPERATURES
CONTROL BOARD # 6 Peltier 1 Temperature
Peltier 2 Temperature (Not installed on ACL 9000)
Power (MB) Rotor Transport Temperature
Rotor Stack Temperature

12 Appendix A
ACL 9000
Host Communication Protocol

(Revision 0.2)
Instrumentation Laboratory 12.1 A

Appendix A
1.0 Index
1.0 Index
2.0 Revision History
3.0 Introduction
3.1 Purpose
4.0 General Description
4.1 Product Perspective
5.0 Specific Requirements
5.1 Protocol Specification
5.2 Low Level Interface
5.3 Data Link and Logical Layer
5.4 Sessions
5.4.1 Message Header and Message Terminator Records
5.5 Test Order Downloading
5.5.1 Receive Session from DMS
5.5.1.1 Test Request Message
5.5.1.2 Test Order Message
5.5.1.2.1 Patient Information Record
5.5.1.2.2 Test Order Record
5.5.2 Host Query
5.5.3 Test Request Message
5.5.4 Test Order Message
5.6 Rejected Test Order
5.7 Downloading Session Volumes
6.0 Test Results Uploading
6.1 Test Result Message
6.1.1 Patient Information Record
6.1.2 Test Order Record
6.1.3 Result Record
6.1.4 Comment Record
6.1.5 Error Codes
6.2 Uploading Session Volumes
7.0 Not Supported Records
8.0 Transmission Abort
9.0 Appendix - ACL 9000 Test Codes
10.0 Appendix - ACL 9000 Supported Characters
10.1 Supported Characters for Sample ID
10.2 Supported Characters for Patient name and Department
10.3 Supported Characters for delimiters
11.0 Appendix - ACL 9000 Supported Units
12.2 A Instrumentation Laboratory

Revision History
Revision History
Revision Modifications
0.0 First released document
0.1 Test order record: removed the field Laboratory Field NO. 3.
This field does not exist in ASTM specifications.
0.2 Error codes updated for comments record

Test codes added
3.0 Introduction
3.1 Purpose
This document is a guide to integrate a Laboratory Information Management system

with the Instrumentation Laboratory ACL 9000 family instruments using the ASTM
(American Society for Testing and Materials) specification to transfer information
between clinical instruments and computer systems.
ASTM specification E-1394-91 Standard Specification for Transferring Information

between Clinical instruments and Computer Systems and E-1381-91 Standard
Specification for the Low Level Protocol to transfer Messages between Clinical
Laboratory Instruments and Computer Systems have been used as standard to develop
ACL6000/7000 Host Communication Protocol.
Specification E-1394 defines the logical layer of ASTM standard; all significant
information for ACL 9000 instruments application can be found in chapters Specific
Requirements and following.
Specification E-1381 refers to low level protocol; significant information for ACL
9000 family instruments application can be found later on in this document.

Appendix A
4.1 Product Perspective
Communication sessions with host computer can be started on ACL 9000 family
instruments by operator request or automatically at session completion.
If the operator requires starting manually a download session the instrument will open
the communication with the host computer that will provide to transmit all test orders.
If the operator requires to start an upload session, the instrument will transmit a subset
of sample results (identified by the user) stored in the instrument patient database or
QC database or Analytical Reference database.
If the instrument is properly configured also automatic downloading or uploading

session can be started by ACL 9000 instrument.
The first condition will happen at session starting if host query is configured. In this
condition the instrument will require test orders for specific sample Ids recognized on
the sample tray.
The second condition will happen, if automatic uploading has been required, at session
completion.
In case the communication session is not generated from the instrument any host
computer message is ignored.
All information received by the host computer must be associated with a Sample ID
that is the primary key of the database. In addition to programmed tests a certain
amount of information can be associated to a Sample ID (patient data) and stored in
ACL 9000 database. This information is optional.
The sample ID is the primary key to access information in the database.

If the checks fail, any downloading operations will be aborted. See Test Order
Downloading section.
At most 1000 samples can be stored in ACL 9000 database; each sample can have a
maximum of 30 tests associated (double tests are considered as 3 tests).
The system behavior when these limits are exceeded is explained in paragraph Test
Order Downloading.
The test ordering operation, to identify the type of ordered test, by host computer must
refer to a computer code that is instrument specific. Refer to Test Order Downloading
for further details and to the Appendix at the end of this document for the test codes
table.

5.0 Specific Requirements
5.1 Protocol Specification
5.2 Low Level Interface
Low level interface conforms to ASTM specification E-1381-91. The following

characteristics are supported and are configurable by Operator Interface:
Baud Rate 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38600
Character Length 8 bit
Parity No parity
Stop Bits 1
5.3 Data Link and Logical Layer
For the Data Link and Logical Layer the ASTM specification E-1381-91 has been
maintained as a reference. Protocol limits and constraints are those declared by the
standard.
To mention some of them, the data part of the frames exchanged between the
instrument and the host computer cannot exceed 240 bytes. As a consequence during
transmission sessions specific routines provide the ability to divide large records into
multiple frames and during a reception session they re-build partial frames in a single
record. The application level has no evidence of this mechanism.
According to ASTM standard the following characters cannot be part of data records:
<SOH>, <STX>, <ETX>, <EOT>, <ENQ>, <ACK>, <DLE>, <NAK>, <SYN>,
<ETB>, <LF>, <DC1>, <DC2>, <DC3>, <DC4>.
Timeout and retry logic are those specified by the standard; the Low Level Clinical
Message State Diagram representing the implemented automatic is the reference.
In interrupt request status the instrument accept remote EOT.

Appendix A
5.4 Sessions
There are two types of sessions that the instrument handles with the ASTM interface:
the test orders download and the test results upload. These sessions can be initiated by
the operator or automatically activated by the instrument.
When the user/operator requests a download operation (Receive Command), the

instrument will send a request to the host for available test orders (all) or for test
orders requested for specific samples, and the host will answer with the test orders
available for the instrument.
Test results upload (Transmit Command) are initiated by the user or automatically by
the instrument at the same way. The host is not allowed to transmit unsolicited
messages, any type of inquiries or test orders not explicitly required by the instrument.
5.4.1 Message Header and Message Terminator Records
Following ASTM specification, each type of transaction between the instrument (DTE)
and the host computer (DTE) has two common records that are the Message Header
record and the Message Terminator record. These records open and close data
transmission between ACL 9000 instruments and host computer.
Their fields are described in the following:
Message Header Record
Record Type ID Always set to H

Delimiter Definition The 5 ASCII characters composing this field
define the type of delimiters will be used in
the following records. See Appendix B for
supported delimiters.
Message Control ID Not provided
Access Password Not provided
Sender Name or ID Set to ACL9000 when transmitting to host
or receiving. It is also supported, as an
optional, the possibility to identify univocally
the instrument by means of an extension to
the instrument name: the name syntax
becomes ACL9000-xx where xx is a two
digits code in the range 01-99.
The extension to the instrument name is user
configurable in the set-up environment.
Sender Street Address Not provided
Reserved Fields Not provided
Sender Telephone Number Not provided
Characteristics of Sender Not provided

Receiver ID Must be set to ACL9000 when receiving

from host. Also in this case is supported,
depending on the instrument set-up, the
possibility to identify univocally the
instrument by means of the extension to the
instrument name: the name syntax becomes
ACL9000-xx where xx is a two digits code
in the range 01-99.
If the ID is different from the expected one
the session is interrupted.
Comment or special Instructions Not provided
Processing ID Always set to P meaning Production
Version No. Set to the current ASTM standard version =
1
Date and Time of Message Format is YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
Message Terminator Record
Record Type ID always set to L

Sequence Number always set to 1
Termination Code set to N for normal termination and to E
for abnormal termination while transmitting
to host;
not considered for received data
5.5 Test Order Downloading
Test order downloading is used to request test orders available on the host and to have
them on the instrument. This operation can be obtained in two way: opening manually
a downloading session from the DMS environment or enabling on the instrument the
host query function.
In the first case the host will have to transmit to the instruments all pending test
requests, in the second case the instrument will require automatically specific
information for the samples placed on the sample tray and without any test requests.
Details for both modalities are explained in Receive Session from DMS and Host Query
paragraphs.

Appendix A
5.5.1 Receive Session from DMS
The operator initiates manually the test order downloading from the DMS
environment.
The host will provide to the instrument all available test requests. The host can send
zero or more test orders in one or more messages, but all messages will be part of the
same transmission session.
During a transmission session more test orders can be required for the same sample.
The host sends usually all test orders for which it has not yet received results even if
they have been previously transmitted.
ACL 9000 instruments will process each received test order validating fields
supported; some information will be extracted from the received record while other
information will be ignored.
Only test orders related to patient samples are considered, if the required sample ID
does not exist already in the patient database and the required sample ID is not used in
the QC database a new record is created. If the database is full the transmission session
will be aborted.
If the test orders are for a sample already existing in the sample data base the new
orders will be added to the existing tests but all tests already ordered or performed will
remain unchanged.
If a test order with more than the maximum number of programmable tests is sent the
request is rejected. The limit is 30 single tests or 10 double tests.
If the test order is not recognized as one of those supported by ACL 9000 family
instruments it is rejected. The instrument will inform the host computer using a record
containing the list of rejected test orders.
During a downloading session the listed error conditions can be detected, the
associated instrument behavior and actions are listed as well:
Error Condition Action User Message
Sample ID used in the QC data Abort communication Sample ID already

base used in the QC data
base
Bad Sample ID (long, Abort communication Invalid Sample ID
unsupported characters)
Data base full Abort communication Patient data Base is
full
Patient record has no associated Abort communication Not identified sample
test order record ID for patient data
Test order has no associated Abort communication No patient record for
patient record ordered tests
Instrument Identifier different Abort communication Invalid instrument
from ACL9000 or extended name identifier

Too much test requests for the Reject test order -

same sample ID
Unknown test request Reject test order -
Bad Test Reject test orders -
Illegal record format Abort communication Incorrect record

format in host
messages
All abort conditions imply that ACL 9000 family instruments will send to the host
computer a message with the reason of transmission interruption (see Reject Test
Order) while a message is presented to the user on the instrument. When transmission
abort is not implied, at transmission completion one or more records will follow (see
Reject Test Order) with an indication of rejected test orders.
Information rejected is typically unknown test requests or test requests exceeding the
sample record size in ACL 9000 Data Management System. It must be observed that if
any of this information is rejected, it does not imply that the sample data at all have
been rejected.
On the contrary the set of legal test requests are normally stored while the illegal
requests for the same sample ID will be rejected.
It also must be underscored that ACL 9000 limits the size of handled records
(independently from the record type supported by ASTM) to 1024 byte during
downloading session.

Appendix A
5.5.1.1 Test Request Message
The Test Request Message is used by ACL 9000 to start the test order download
session. It is composed from a Message Header record, a Request Information record
and a Message Terminator record.
The Request Information record requests to the host ALL test orders available for
the specific instrument.
Following the ASTM specification the fields composing the Request Information are
described in the following.
Request Information Record
Record Type ID always set to Q

Sequence Number as defined by the standard set to 1
when query is sent
Starting Range ID Number set to the string ALL
Ending Range ID Number not provided
Universal Test ID not provided
Nature of Request Time Limit not provided
Beginning request Results Date not provided
and Time
Requesting Physician Name not provided
User Field #1 not provided
Request Information Status always set to O (requesting test orders
Code and demographics only)
An example for the complete message (composed by header message, request

information record and message terminator record) is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19960210103227<CR>
Q|1|ALL||||||||O<CR>
L|1|N<CR>

5.5.1.2 Test Order Message
To answer to the ACL 9000 Test Request Message the host computer sends the Test
Order Message. It contains the records specifying which tests are being requested for
each specified sample. The host computer may answer with one or more message each
one contains one or more test order specifications. The test order specification consists
of a Patient Information record followed by one or more Test Order records.
The host can send for the same sample ID a Patient Information record followed by
many Test Order records or, for each test to be ordered, a pair composed by the
Patient Information record followed the Test Order record.
Comment Record messages during downloading operations are ignored by ACL 9000.
5.5.1.2.1 Patient Information Record
The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following:
Patient Information Record
Record Type ID Must be P

Sequence Number Must begin with 1 and then must
increment by one for each new Patient
Information record
Practice Assigned Patient ID Ignored
Laboratory Assigned Patient ID Stored, if available, as a string in the
Patient ID field of the sample record.
No checks are performed for this field
and the string will be truncated to 15
chars.
Patient ID #3 Ignored
Patient Name Stored, if available, as a unique string in
the name field of sample record
considering only the first two sub fields
in this data field (second and first name).
The string will be truncated to 30
characters. If a character not supported is
found (see Appendix for supported
characters) the patient name and all the
other strings in the same patient record
will be ignored.
Mothers maiden Name Ignored
Birth date Stored, if available. The data will be
converted and displayed in the following
in according to ACL 9000 supported
format.
Expected format, conforming to ASTM
standard, is YYYYMMDD
Patient Sex Stored if available. Allowed characters

Appendix A
are M, m, F, f, U, u; any other

char is interpreted as U.
Patient Race-Ethnic Origin Ignored
Patient Address Ignored
Reserved Field Ignored
Patient Telephone Number Ignored
Attending Physician ID Ignored
Special Field #1 Ignored
Special Field #2 Ignored
Patient Height Ignored
Patient Weight Ignored
Patients Known or Suspected Ignored
Diagnosis
Patient Active Medications Ignored
Patients Diet Ignored
Practice Field #1 Ignored
Practice Field #2 Ignored
Admission and Discharged Ignored
Dates
Admission Status Ignored
Location Stored if available as a free string in the
department field of sample record. The
string will be truncated to 30 characters.
See Appendix B for supported
characters.
Nature of Alternative Ignored
Diagnostic Code and Classifiers
Alternative Diagnostic Code Ignored
and Classifiers
Patient Religion Ignored
Marital Status Ignored
Isolation Status Ignored
Language Ignored
Hospital Service Ignored
Hospital Institution Ignored
Dosage Category Ignored

5.5.1.2.2 Test Order Record
Test Order Record
Record Type ID Must be O (letter)

Sequence Number Must begin with 1 and then must
increment by one for each new test order
record for the same patient
Specimen ID This is the ACL 9000 sample ID; the
field must be less than or equal to 15
characters and must be consistent with
rules on sample ID (ID already in use for
QC database are not legal). Non
conforming sample IDs will cause an
abort of the download process.
See Appendix B for ACL 9000
supported characters.
Instrument Specimen ID Ignored
Universal Test ID The field is composed of 4 parts; only the
Manufacturers Code component is used
as a 4 character code (user configurable
on board); unknown test ID will be
rejected
Priority If the field contains in any of the sub
fields the S char the sample ID will be
considered a priority sample; any
additional flag will be ignore. If the field
does not contain the S char or it is empty
the sample will be identified as a routine
sample.
Requested/Ordered Date and Ignored
Time
Specimen Collection Date and Ignored
Time
Collection End Time Ignored
Collection Volume Ignored
Collector ID Ignored
Action Code Ignored
Danger Code Ignored
Relevant Clinical Information Ignored
Date and Time Specimen Ignored
Received
Specimen Descriptor Ignored both fields
Ordering Physician Stored if available as a free string in the

physician field of sample record. The

Appendix A
string will be truncated to 30 characters.

See Appendix for supported characters.
Physicians Telephone Number Ignored
User Field #1 Ignored
User Field #2 Ignored
Laboratory Field #1 Ignored
Laboratory Field #2 Ignored
Date/time Results Reported or Ignored
Last Modified
Instrument Charge to Ignored
Computer System
Instrument Section Ignored
Report Type Set to O (letter); other codes will cause
records rejection
Reserved Field Ignored
Location of Ward of specimen Ignored
Collection
Hospital Information Flag Ignored
Specimen Service Ignored
Specimen Institution Ignored
An example for a complete test ordering is given by:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19982110134700<CR>
P|1||PTNT1||ROSSI^MARIO^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP 1||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP01||^^^001|S||||||||||^|DR. VERDI||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|5|SMP02||^^^001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|6|SMP03||^^^001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|7|SMP04||^^^001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|8|SMP05||^^^001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
P|2||PTNT2||GIALLI^GIANLUCA^^^||19551028|F||||||||||||||||||DEP 2||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP10||^^^001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|2|SMP10||^^^005|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|3|SMP10||^^^009|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
O|4|SMP10||^^^022|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
P|3||PTNT3||VERDI^P.^^^||19580821|U||||||||||||||||||DEP 3||||||||||<CR>
O|1|SMP11||^^^001|||||||||||^|||||||||||O||||||<CR>
L|1|N<CR>

5.5.2 Host Query
The host query is automatically activated by the instrument each time the system is
properly configured and starting the pre-analysis phase of a single test or profile or test
group one or more samples have not any type of test requests associated.
The instrument will send, using the requested information record, the sample IDs
requiring test programming and will accept only test orders for those sample Ids. It has
to be underlined that the instrument will accept for the queried samples any test orders
independently by the type of test will be executed in the starting session.
The mechanism supported by ASTM requires sending to the host a Request

Information record for each sample Id or send to the host a range of queried sample
IDs. The mechanism supported by ACL 9000 is the first one so to be independent by
the sorting system used by instrument or host computer on the samples.
As a consequence the instrument will send a query for the first sample, will wait for the
host information and will send later a new query for the next samples (if any). All the
host query session will be organized in the described way.
Because the instrument is asking information for a specific sample Id it will reject any
type of information associated to different sample IDs.
The host will provide to the instrument all available test requests. The host can send
zero or more test orders in one or more messages, but all messages will be part of the
same transmission session.
During a transmission session more test orders can be required for the same sample.
ACL 9000 will process each received test order validating the fields that ACL 9000
supports; some information will be extracted from the received record while other
information will be ignored.
If the test order is not recognized as one of those supported by ACL 9000 it will be
rejected. The instrument will inform the host computer using a record containing the
list of rejected test orders.

Appendix A
During a downloading session the listed error conditions can be detected, the associate
ACL 9000 action is listed as well:
Error Condition Action User Message
Sample ID used in the QC data Abort communication Sample ID already

base used in the QC data
base
Bad Sample ID (long, Abort communication Invalid Sample ID
unsupported characters)
Data base full Abort communication Patient data Base is
full
Patient record has no associated Abort communication Not identified sample
test order record ID for patient data
Test order has no associated Abort communication No patient record for
patient record ordered tests
Instrument Identifier different Abort communication Invalid instrument
from ACL9000 or extended name identifier
Too much test requests for the Reject test order -
same sample ID
Unknown test request Reject test order -
Bad Test Reject test orders -
Illegal record format Abort communication Incorrect record

format in host
messages
All abort conditions imply that ACL 9000 family instruments will send to the host
computer a message with the reason of transmission interruption (see Reject Test
Order) while a message is presented to the user on the instrument. When transmission
abort is not implied, at transmission completion one or more records will follow (see
Reject Test Order) with an indication of rejected test orders.
Information rejected is typically unknown test requests or test requests exceeding the
sample record size in ACL 9000 Data Management System. It must be observed that if
any of this information is rejected, it does not imply that the sample data at all have
been rejected.
On the contrary the set of legal test requests are normally stored while the illegal
requests for the same sample ID will be rejected.
It also must be underscored that ACL 9000 limits the size of handled records
(independently from the record type supported by ASTM) to 1024 byte during
downloading session.

5.5.3 Test Request Message
The Test Request Message is used by ACL 9000 to require information for each
specific sample that has no test orders into the instrument database. It is composed
from a Message Header, a Request Information and a Message Terminator record.
The Request Information record requests in this case information for a specific ID at
time. The ASTM protocol limits the number of Request Information record to one. As
a consequence the instrument will wait the host answer before sending a second
Request Information record for a second sample.
Following the ASTM specification the fields composing the Request Information are
described in the following.
Request Information Record
Record Type ID always set to Q

Sequence Number as defined by the standard set to 1
when query is sent
Starting Range ID Number set to the specific sample ID to require
information on; the meaningful
component is the second one
Ending Range ID Number not provided
Universal Test ID not provided
Nature of Request Time Limit not provided
Beginning request Results Date not provided
and Time
Requesting Physician Name not provided
Request Information Status Code always set to O (requesting test orders
and demographics only)
An example for the complete message (composed by header message, request

information record and message terminator record) is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19960210103227<CR>
Q|1|^S001^||||||||O<CR>
L|1|N<CR>
5.5.4 Test Order Message
As an answer to the ACL 9000 Test Request Message the host computer sends the
Test Order Message. It contains the records specifying which tests are being requested
for the queried sample Id.
See Test Order Message for details.

Appendix A
5.6 Rejected Test Order
At completion of downloading operations, or at completion of the downloading

operation for a single sample in the host query mechanism, ACL 9000 can transmit a
message to inform host computer about rejected test order and sample or about the
reasons of transmission interrupt.
The Rejected Test Order Message consists of a Message Header record followed by
one or more Comment records and completed by the Message Terminator Record. A
comment record will be transmitted for each rejected information.
It must be observed that if a no legal information has been received, the download
process is interrupted and the rejected test order message will signal the reason for the
interruption.
If the download process has been normally completed, the possible following rejected
test order message will report no legal test orders.
Comment Record structure is described in the following table:
Record Type ID Always set to C

Sequence Number Must begin with 1 and then it will increment by one for
each new comment record
Comment Source Always set to I
Comment Text This field indicates the reason of the test order rejection.
It is a string with two components, each one can assume
the reported values:
Rejection Reason:
BAD_TEST: the transmitted test code is invalid
QC_MA_ID: the specified ID is already used as a
material in the QC data base
BAD_S_ID: the specified ID is invalid
WRONG_ID: the host is sending information for a
sample ID different from the expected one
PDB_FULL: patient data base is full
M_TEST_E: more tests than expected
UKNOWN_T: unknown test requested
INSTR_ID: invalid instrument identifier
NO_TESTS: no test ordered for patient record
NO_PATIE: no patient record for ordered test
BAD_RECO: incorrect record format
Identification: this string contains the identification of

the sample causing the problem; if a test order caused
the problem the sample ID and test ID are transmitted
sequentially. The character used to separate the
rejection reason, and the two strings used for the
identification field is |.
Lacking information will be signaled as UNKNOWN.

If BAD_RECO is the reason of the rejection the field

will contain the record number and the field number
caused the failure.
Comment Type Always set to I
To summarize the possible values for the rejection reason and identification fields are
reported in the following table:
Rejection Transmission Identification: first Identification: second

Reason Interrupted sub_field sub_field
QC_MA_ID yes sample ID (causing the UNKNOWN

problem)
BAD_S_ID yes sample ID (causing the UNKNOWN
problem)
PDB_FULL yes sample ID (causing the test_ID
problem)
NO_TESTS yes UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
NO_PATIE yes sample ID (causing the test_ID
problem)
INSTR_ID yes UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
M_TEST_E no sample ID test ID (causing the
problem)
UNKWOWN no sample ID test ID (causing the
_T problem)
BAD_TEST no sample ID test ID (causing the
problem)
BAD_RECO yes Record No. (debug Field No. (debug purpose)
purpose)
An example for a complete rejection phase is given by:
H|\^&|||ACL9000|||||||P|1|19982110103227<CR>
C|1|1|M_TEST_E|SMP01 ^010|I<CR>
C|2|1|BAD_TEST|SMP01 ^000|I<CR>
L|1|N<CR>

Appendix A
5.7 Downloading Session Volumes
Approximate data volumes for downloading sessions is provided as a guide for

estimating the time required completing typical sessions. Obviously, system latencies
(both in ACL 9000 and host computer) are not considered.
The minimal session would occur if the host has no test orders available for ACL 9000.
In this condition ACL 9000 sends the test request message, the host would respond
with a message containing no test orders (only message header and message terminator
record).
In conditions in which the host has test orders for the instrument, the estimated data
volume is:
Test Request Message = Message Header (41) +17 + Message Terminator Record (6)
= 64
Test Order Message = Message Header (41) +

Number of patient records (82 + 55 *number of ordered test)
+ Message Terminator Record (6)
Test Order Rejected = Message Header (41) +

+ 41 * number of rejected records
+ Message Terminator Record (6)
So considering the following situation: the host has 50 sample ID to be download and
each one with 4 tests and considering 10 rejected records the data volume can be
estimated in:
Test Request Message = 64

Test Order Message = 41+ 50 (82 + 55 *4) + 6 = 15147
Test Order Rejected = 41 + (41 * 10) + 6 = 457
Total = 15668 characters
At 9600 baud rate and with no system overhead it would take approximately 17
seconds and considering a system efficiency of 60% it becomes about 27 seconds.
All estimations have been done using for string fields the maximum expected length.

6.0 Test Results Uploading
Test Result Uploading allows transmission of results of the tests performed on ACL
9000 to the host computer. Results, related to patient, QC samples and Analytical
Reference materials, are transmitted on explicit user request or automatically at session
completion.
In the first case the user must require the transmission command in the DMS or in the
QC or in the AR environment, select the patient samples or QC samples or AR set of
data to be transmitted (in according with one of the supported selection criteria) and
start operation.
In the second case the transmission will happen automatically at session completion
and the instrument will provide to upload patient and/or QC samples data and/or AR
data.
The type of data to be transferred during an automatic upload session are depending
upon the instrument set-up (the automatic data transmission can be set to patient
samples only or QC and patient samples or QC and AR patient samples).
If upload is manually requested all data are transmitted independently from the
transmission flag.
Otherwise if transmission is performed automatically at session completion the
instrument will upload for patient samples all the data available for the sample IDs just
analyzed and will upload, for QC data, the results just obtained.
From a general point of view the automatic data transmission of the patient samples is
equivalent to the manual data transmission, requested in DMS, of patient samples
belonging to a specific load-list. While the automatic data transmission of the QC data
or AR data is equivalent to the manual data transmission, requested in QC data base or
AR data base, of the data in a specified interval for the QC material present in the load-
list.
Considering that ACL 9000 fills the strings used for Sample ID, department and
patient name with space characters (to align data), the host computer must ignore
space characters on the right of these fields.
For patient, QC samples and AR data if uploading is completed successfully the

transmission flag associated to the single record will be updated from L to T
(transmitted).
It must also to be underscored that on ACL 9000 modifications to sample data already
transmitted (such as adding of a new test result or modifications of sample data) cause
the transmission flag to change from T to L.
It does not apply to QC or AR data because the only modification the user can request
on these data is to omit or to clear statistic. The effect of omit operation is to exclude
the data from the statistic but the data is not modified.
Modifications in the set-up values and note field do not modify the transmission status
of QC data and AR data.
While transmission is in progress the user will be updated on the number of the sample
being transmitted.
ACL 9000 does not accept inquiries for test results.

Appendix A
6.1 Test Result Message
The Test Result Message is used by ACL 9000 to transmit any available test results for
a sample. All available test results will be transmitted for patient samples even if data
have been already transmitted partially.
The message is composed by a Message Header record, a Patient Information record,
one or more pair Test Order records followed by one or more Results records
(depending upon the number of available test results and the number of results for each
specific test).
The Result record can be completed with a Comment record containing flags
associated to the executed test.
Tests are uploaded using the same sorting used on board. The complete set of available
test results is globally uploaded to the host computer independently by the set of
results defined as to show in the sample list.
In some conditions, depending by the instrument status (i.e. calibrated, not calibrated,
AR used, etc.) only a subset of the results supported by the test will be transmitted to
the host computer.
The Message Terminator record completes the transmitted data.
The same structure is used also to upload QC and AR data. In the following
paragraphs any differences in the way to treat patient, QC and AR data will be
underlined.
6.1.1 Patient Information Record
This information is transmitted to the host only if available on the instrument. The
Patient Information structure is:
Patient Information Record
File Type Patient Sample QC Sample or AR
Record Type ID Must be P must be P

Sequence Number Must begin with 1 and must begin with 1 and
then must increment by then must increment by
one for each new Patient one for each new
Information record Patient Information
record
Practice Assigned Not provided not provided
Patient ID
Laboratory Assigned Provided if defined as a not provided
Patient ID string containing up to 15
characters.
Patient ID #3 Not provided not provided

Patient Name Provided if known as a not provided

single string containing up
to 30 characters.
Mothers maiden Not provided not provided
Name
Birth date Provided if known as a not provided
single string without any
checks
Patient Sex Provided if known as a not provided
single character
Patient Race-Ethnic Not provided not provided
Origin
Patient Address Not provided not provided
Reserved Field Not provided not provided
Patient Telephone Not provided not provided
Number
Attending Physician Not provided not provided
ID
Special Field #1 Not provided not provided
Special Field #2 Not provided not provided
Patient Height Not provided not provided
Patient Weight Not provided not provided
Patients Known or Not provided not provided
Suspected Diagnosis
Patient Active Not provided not provided
Medications
Patients Diet Not provided not provided
Practice Field #1 Not provided not provided
Practice Field #2 Not provided not provided
Admission and Not provided not provided
Discharged Dates
Admission Status Not provided not provided
Location Provided if known as a 30 not provided
characters free string
Nature of Alternative Not provided not provided

Diagnostic Code and
Classifiers
Alternative Not provided not provided
Diagnostic Code and
Classifiers
Patient Religion Not provided not provided
Marital Status Not provided not provided
Isolation Status Not provided not provided
Language Not provided not provided
Hospital Service Not provided not provided

Appendix A
Hospital Institution Not provided not provided

Dosage Category Not provided not provided
6.1.2 Test Order Record
Test Order Record
File Type Patient Sample QC Sample or AR data
Record Type ID Must be O Must be O

Sequence Number Must begin with 1 and Must begin with 1 and
one for each new test one for each new test
order record for the same order record for the same
patient patient
Specimen ID Provided, is the ACL Provided, is the ACL
9000 sample ID. 9000 QC material ID for
See Appendix for ACL QC data; or is the AR
9000 supported keyword for AR data.
characters. See Appendix for ACL
9000 supported
characters.
Instrument Not provided Not provided
Specimen ID
Universal Test ID The field is composed of The field is composed by
4 parts, only the 4 parts, only the
Manufacturers Code Manufacturers Code
component is used as a 4 component is used as a 4
character code (host characters code (host
codes are user codes are user
configurable on board). configurable on board).
Priority Provided if set as a S Not provided
char for priority samples.
Requested/Ordered Not provided Not provided
Date and Time
Specimen Collection Not provided Not provided
Date and Time
Collection End Time Not provided Not provided
Collection Volume Not provided Not provided
Collector ID Not provided Not provided
Action Code Not provided Set to Q
Danger Code Not provided Not provided
Relevant Clinical Not provided Not provided
Information
Date and Time Not provided Not provided

Specimen Received
Specimen Descriptor Not provided both fields Not provided both fields
Ordering Physician Provided, if available, as Not provided

a string containing up to
30 chars
Physicians Not provided Not provided
Telephone Number
User Field #1 Not provided Not provided
User Field #2 Not provided Not provided
Laboratory Field #1 Not provided Not provided
Laboratory Field #2 Not provided Not provided
Date/time Results Not provided Not provided
Reported or Last
Modified
Instrument Charge Not provided Not provided
to Computer System
Instrument Section Not provided Not provided
Report Type Set to F Set to F
Reserved Field Not provided Not provided
Location of Ward of Not provided Not provided
specimen Collection
Hospital Information Not provided Not provided
Flag
Specimen Service Not provided Not provided
Specimen Institution Not provided Not provided
6.1.3 Result Record
The fields characterizing this record are specified in the following table.
A result record is send to the host computer for each available test result. For double
tests all available single values will be transmitted to the host computer (no mean
values). Each result record will contain one of available test results.
Result Record
File Type Patient Sample QC Sample or AR data
Record Type ID Set to R Set to R

Sequence Number Must begin with 1 and Must begin with 1 and
one for each result one for each result
record for the same record for the same
patient test record for the patient test record for the
same patient record same patient record
Universal Test ID The field is composed of The field is composed of
4 parts, only the 4 parts, only the

Appendix A
Manufacturers Code Manufacturers Code

component is used as a 4 component is used as a 4
character code (host character code (host
codes are user codes are user
configurable on board). configurable on board).
Data or The field contains the The field contains the
Measurement Value obtained numeric value obtained numeric value
or qualitative message or qualitative message
(***, ---, Error xx). (***, ---, Error xx).
Units Provided if the previous Provided if the previous
field is a numeric value; field is a numeric value;
is a free string (see is a free string (see
Appendix C for standard Appendix C for standard
units) maximum number units) maximum number
of characters is 8). of characters is 8).
Reference range Not provided Not provided
Result Abnormal Not provided Not provided
Flag
Nature of Not provided Not provided
Abnormality Flag
Result Status Set to F Set to F
Data of Change in Not provided Not provided
Instrument
Normative Values or
Units
Operator Not provided Not provided
Identification
Date/Time Test Not provided Not provided
Started
Date/Time Test Execution time, string of Execution time, string of
Completed the type the type
YYYYMMDDHHMMS YYYYMMDDHHMMS
S S
Instrument Not provided Not provided
Identification

6.1.4 Comment Record
The Comment record allows integration of the transmitted test results with possible
error messages.
One or more comment records can follow the result records. Fields characterizing this
record are specified in the following.
Comment Record
Record Type ID set to C

Sequence Number must begin with 1 and then must increment by one for
each comment record
Comment Source set to I
Comment Text this field specifies the instrument errors (see table) as a
numeric code (2 characters) plus the associated message
Comment Type set to I

Appendix A
6.1.5 Error Codes
TEMPERATURE WARNING
ROTOR STACK TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 41,

SLIDER TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 43,
REAGENT TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 45,
INCUBATION TEMPERATURE Out of Range = 49,
MECHANICAL WARNING
AUTOSAMPLER WARNING = 50,

ROTOR MOTOR WARNING = 51,
HORIZONTAL MOTOR WARNING = 52,
VERTICAL MOTOR WARNING = 53,
REAGENT DILUTOR WARNING = 54,
SAMPLE DILUTOR WARNING = 55,
PHOTOMETRIC COVER WARNING = 56,
STIRRER1_FAIL = 57,
STIRRER2_FAIL = 58,
STIRRER3_FAIL = 59,
STIRRER4_FAIL = 60,
LIQUID WARNING
LIQUID_SENSOR OFF (SAMPLE) = 73,

LIQUID_SENSOR OFF (REAGENT) = 74,
LIQUID_SENSOR_FAIL (SAMPLE) = 75,
LIQUID_SENSOR_FAIL (REAGENT) = 76,
MATERIAL_SHORT = 77,
MANDATORY_MATERIAL_SHORT = 78,
FLUSH_PRE_WARNING = 79,
FLUSH WARNING = 80,
CLEANING_NOT_PERFORMED = 83,
MISCELLANEOUS WARNING
COVER_OPEN_DURING_LOADING_OR_INCUBATION = 86,
TIMEOUT_EXPIRED_DURING_LOADING = 87,

ERRORS ON RESPONSE
SATURATION_ERROR = 205,
FIRST_THRESHOLD_ERROR = 206,
SECOND_THRESHOLD_ERROR = 207,
DELTA_ERROR = 208,
INITIAL_SLOPE_ERROR = 209,
FINAL_SLOPE_ERROR = 210,
FINAL_REACTION CURVE ERROR = 211,
FIRST_DERIVATIVE_ERROR = 212,
SECOND_DERIVATIVE_ERROR = 213,
FIRST_PART_REACTION CURVE ERROR = 214,
ERRORS ON CALIBRATION CURVES
INSUFFICIENT_STANDARD POINTS IN ONE_SEGMENT = 215,

INVALID CURVE INSUFFICIENT DATA = 216,
NUMBER OF_STANDARD OUT OF RANGE = 217,
INVALID_TRANSLATION_OR_MANDATORY_STANDARD_IN_ONE_SEGME
NT = 218,
INVALID_TRANSLATION_OR_MANDATORY_STANDARD = 219,
INVALID_STD_INSUFFICIENT_REPLICATES = 220,
INSUFFICIENT_REPLICATES = 221,
INVALID_REPLICATES = 222,
CV_OUT_OF_RANGE = 223,
SLOPE OUT OF RANGE FOR ONE SEGMENT = 224,
SLOPE OUT OF RANGE: INVALID CALIBRATION CURVE = 225,
R2_OUT_OF_RANGE = 226,
NO_VALID_SEGMENTS: INVALID CALIBRATION CURVE = 227,
NOT MONOTONIC CURVE = 228,
ERRORS ON ANALYTICAL REFERENCE, QC, RATIO AND NORMALIZED

RATIO
AR_INVALID = 229,
AR_OUT_OF_RANGE = 230,
AR_NOT_CHECKED = 233,
QC_INVALID = 240,
QC_OUT_OF_RANGE = 242,
RATIO_CALCULATION_ERROR = 249,
RATIO_CALCULATION_ERROR: S/Sa out of range = 250,
NORMALIZED RATIO ERROR: AR/Ara out of range = 251,
NORMALIZED RATIO: CALCULATION ERROR = 252,
STD_NOT_FOUND = 253,
AR_NOT_FOUND = 254,
ACTIVATE SAMPLE NOT_FOUND = 255,
ARa_NOT_FOUND = 256,

Appendix A
RATIO_NOT_FOUND = 257,
AR_OUT_OF_RANGE = 258,
AR_NULL = 259,
STD_NULL = 260,
SAMPLE_NULL = 262,
REF_NULL = 263,
AR_RATIO_ NULL_ = 264,
ACTIVATED_AR NULL_ = 265,
NULL_DIFFERENCE = 266,
N.B. Out of range indications referring to normal or test ranges are not transmitted to
the host computer.
An example for a complete test uploading sequence is given by:
H|\^&||||||||ACL9000||P|1|19982110134700<CR>
P|1||PTNT1||BLU^^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP 1||||||||||<CR>
R|1|^^^001|12.8|||||F||||19960119114215|<CR>
C|1|I|31^ Invalid for QC |I<CR>
P|2||PTNT1||Gialli^^^^||19391127|M|||||||||||||||||DEP 1||||||||||<CR>
R|1|^^^001|14.5|s||||F||||19960119114215|<CR>
C|1|I|31^ Invalid for QC |I<CR>
L|1|N<CR>

6.2 Uploading Session Volumes
Approximate data volumes for uploading sessions is provided as a guide for estimating
the time required completing typical sessions. Obviously, systems latencies (both in
ACL 9000 and host computer) are not considered.
The minimal session would occur if ACL 9000 has no test results to be transmitted; no
data is sent and the data volume is zero.
In conditions in which the ACL 9000 has results to be transmitted, the data volume can
be estimated on the Test Order and Test Result record size base.
Test Order Message = Message Header (41) +

Number of patient records (82 + Results) + Message Terminator Record (6)
Results = number of ordered test (55 + 60*number of test result + 56* number of error
messages))
Consider the following situation: ACL 9000 has 50 sample IDs to be uploaded each
with 4 tests, each test with 3 results and each test with 2 flags, the data volume can be
estimated in:
Test Result Message = 41+ 50 (82 + 4(55 + 60*3 + 56*2)) + 6

Total = 69547 characters
At 9600 baud rate and with no system overhead it would take approximately 73
seconds and considering a system efficiency of 60% it becomes about 116 seconds.
7.0 Not Supported Records
The Scientific record and the Manufacturer Information record are not supported by
ACL 9000 protocol.
As a consequence the instrument ignores any type of information they contain.

Appendix A
8.0 Transmission Abort
The download or upload transmission session can be interrupted for an explicit user
request detected on the instrument, because the host computer is not responding or
because the host computer required interruption of the transmission process.
Further, as reported above, the download process can be interrupted because an illegal
sample Identifier has been received. Instrument behavior in this particular condition
was defined in and Reject Test Orders.
ACL 9000 family instruments behavior in each of the listed conditions is described in
the following:
Condition Action
ACL 9000s operator ACL 9000 will signal the end of transmission to the host and
requested to stop will discard any following messages. The host must consider
download process the interrupt request.
It must be emphasized that ACL 9000 will signal the
transmission interruption with a message that is a rejected
test order message if any information has been rejected or
with a message header plus a message terminator record if no
information has been rejected.
ACL 9000 s operator ACL 9000 will complete the message in progress with the
requested stop message terminator and will not transmit any further test
upload process results.
Host computer is not During downloading and uploading session transmission
responding operation by ACL 9000 is stopped. If downloading was in
progress, no rejected test messages will be transmitted.
A message will inform the user that the transmission has been
interrupted: Host Computer not responding
Host computer Both during downloading and uploading session operation by
required EOT ACL 9000 are stopped. If downloading was in progress no
rejected test messages will be transmitted.
It must be emphasized that the host computer must request
the transmission interruption with a message composed by a
message header plus a message terminator record.
A message will inform the user that the transmission has been
interrupted: Host Computer required to interrupt
transmission
Incorrect record Transmission/reception is aborted and the user is informed:
format Incorrect format in host messages

9.0 Appendix- ACL 9000 Test Codes
Test codes are user definable. IL Library proposes the default test codes reported in
the following:
Test Code Test Code for host Test ID Extended Test

1:500 (8 char. max) Name
(15 char. Max)
001 0001 PT PT
002 0002 PT e PT Extended
003 0003 PT d PT Double
004 0004 PT ed PT Ext. Db.
005 0005 PT HS PT HS
006 0006 PT HS e PT HS Extended
007 0007 PT HS d PT HS Double
008 0008 PT HS ed PT HS Ext. Db.
009 0009 PT PLUS PT PLUS
010 0010 PT + e PTPLUS Extended
011 0011 PT + d PT PLUS Double
012 0012 PT + ed PTPLUS Ext. Db.
009 0009 PT R PT Rec.
010 0010 PT R e PT Rec Extended
011 0011 PT R d PT Rec. Double
012 0012 PT R ed PT Rec Ext. Db.
030 0030 FIB_ FIB (PT)

031 0031 FIB FIB (PT)
032 0032 FIB e_ FIB (PT e)
033 0033 FIB e FIB (PT e)
034 0034 FIB d_ FIB (PT d)
035 0035 FIB d FIB (PT d)
036 0036 FIB ed_ FIB (PT ed)
037 0037 FIB ed FIB (PT ed)
038 0038 FIB HS_ FIB (PT HS)
039 0039 FIB HS FIB (PT HS)
040 0040 FIB HSe_ FIB (PT HS e)
041 0041 FIB HSe FIB (PT HS e)
042 0042 FIB HSd_ FIB (PT HS d)
043 0043 FIB HS d FIB (PT HS d)
044 0044 FIBHSed_ FIB (PT HS ed)
045 0045 FIB HSed FIB (PT HS ed)
046 0046 FIB+_ FIB (PT PLUS)
047 0047 FIB+ FIB (PT PLUS)
048 0048 FIB+ e_ FIB (PT+ e)
049 0049 FIB+ e FIB (PT+ e)

Appendix A
050 0050 FIB+ d_ FIB (PT+ d)

051 0051 FIB+ d FIB (PT+ d)
052 0052 FIB+ed_ FIB (PT+ ed)
053 0053 FIB+ed FIB (PT+ ed)
046 0046 FIB R_ FIB (PT Rec.)
047 0047 FIB R FIB (PT Rec.)
048 0048 FIB Re_ FIB (PT Rec e)
049 0049 FIB Re FIB (PT Rec e)
050 0050 FIB Rd_ FIB (PT Rec d)
051 0051 FIB Rd FIB (PT Rec d)
052 0052 FIB Red_ FIB (PT Rec ed)
053 0053 FIB Red FIB (PT Rec ed)
080 0080 APTT Ly APTT Ly

081 0081 APTT Lye APTT Ly Ext.
082 0082 APTT Lyd APTT Ly Db.
083 0083 APTTLyed APTT Ly Ext.Db.
084 0084 APTT-SP APTT-SP
085 0085 APTT-SPe APTT-SP Ext.
086 0086 APTT-SPd APTT-SP Db.
087 0087 APTTSPed APTT-SP Ext.Db.
088 0088 APTT-C APTT-C
089 0089 APTT-C e APTT-C Ext.
090 0090 APTT-C d APTT-C Db.
091 0091 APTT-Ced APTT C-Ext.Db.
120 0120 TT-5 TT 5

121 0121 TT e-5 TT Ext. 5
122 0122 TT d-5 TT Dbl. 5
123 0123 TT ed-5 TT Ext. Dbl. 5
124 0124 TT-8 TT 8
125 0125 TT e-8 TT Ext. 8
126 0126 TT d-8 TT Dbl. 8
127 0127 TT ed-8 TT Ext. Dbl. 8
128 0128 TT-2 TT 2
129 0129 TT e-2 TT Ext. 2
130 0130 TT d-2 TT Dbl. 2
131 0131 TT ed-2 TT Ext. Dbl. 2
150 0150 PCX Pro-IL-Complex

151 0151 HPX Hepatocomplex
152 0152 PClot Ly ProClot Lyo
153 0153 PClot SP ProClot SP
154 0154 PClot C ProClot C
155 0155 PS Protein S
156 0156 APGT APGT

157 0157 LAC-S LAC Screen

158 0158 LAC-C LAC Confirm
198 0198 AT Antithrombin_l

199 0199 AT Antithrombin_l
200 0200 AT_c Antithrombin_c
201 0201 FIB-C_ Fibrinog Clauss
202 0202 FIB-C Fibrinog Clauss
203 0203 FIB-C l_ Fib. Clauss low
204 0204 FIB-C l Fib. Clauss low
205 0205 FIB-C h_ Fib Clauss high
206 0206 FIB-C h Fib. Clauss high
207 0207 APCR-V APCR V
208 0208 Hep UF h Heparin UF high
209 0209 Hep UF l Heparin UF low
210 0210 Hep LMWh Heparin LMWhigh
211 0211 Hep LMWl Heparin LMW low
212 0212 PLG Plasminogen
213 0213 PI Plasmin Inhib.
214 0214 PC Protein C
250 0250 D-Dmix D-Dimer
251 0251 D-D High D-Dimer High
300 0300 VIII Lyo F VIII APTT Lyo

302 0302 VIII SP F VIII APTT-SP
304 0304 VIII C F VIII APTT-C
310 0310 IX Lyo F IX APTT Lyo

312 0312 IX SP F IX APTT-SP
314 0314 IX C F IX APTT-C
320 0320 XI Lyo F XI APTT Lyo

322 0322 XI SP F XI APTT-SP
324 0324 XI C F XI APTT-C
330 0330 XII Lyo F XII APTT Lyo

332 0332 XII SP F XII APTT-SP
334 0334 XII C F XII APTT-C
336 0336 VII PT F VII PT

338 0338 VII HS F VII PT HS
340 0340 VII PLUS F VII PT PLUS
342 0342 VII Rec F VII PT Recomb
350 0350 X PT F X PT
352 0352 X HS F X PT HS

Appendix A
354 0354 X PLUS F X PT PLUS

356 0356 X Rec F X PT Recomb
360 0360 V PT F V PT
362 0362 V HS F V PT HS
364 0364 V PLUS F V PT PLUS
366 0366 V Rec F V PT Recomb
370 0370 II PT F II PT
372 0372 II HS F II PT HS
374 0374 II PLUS F II PT PLUS
376 0376 II Rec F II PT Recomb
10.0 Appendix ACL 9000 Supported Characters
10.1 Supported Characters for Sample ID
Is the ASCII set of characters considered in the decimal range 32 to 126. Because a
Sample ID can be accepted it has to contain at least a character different by space.
10.2 Supported Characters for Patient name and Department
Is the ASCII set of characters considered in the decimal range 32 to 255.
10.3 Supported Characters for delimiters
! # $ %
& ( ) *
+ / : ; =
@ [ \ ] ^
_ { | } ~
ASCII character 127 is not allowed as delimiter.

11.0 Appendix - ACL 9000 Supported Units
Unit Abbreviation
Time s
Activity %
Ratio R
International Normalized Ratio INR
NR
Concentration mg/dL
g/L
ng/mL
U/mL
g/L
mol/L
IU/mL
Delta Optical Absorbance Abs
Delta
Curve behavior offset

min
max
final
user defined free string containing up to 8 chars

12 Appendix B
ACL 9000
Bar Code Label Specification
(REV 0.0)
Instrumentation Laboratory 12.1 B

Appendix B
Index
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Purpose
1.2 Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations
1.3 References
2.1 Supported Codes and Checksum type
2.2 Bar Code Symbol Specifications
2.3 Barcode Parameters
2.4 Barcode Label Positioning
2.5 Barcode Label Dimensions
1.0 Introduction
In the following sections the characteristics of the bar code labels that can be read with
the Welch Allyn SCANTEAM 3700 scanner installed on ACL 9000 family instruments
are described.
1.1 Purpose
Purpose of this document is to give indication of the scanner characteristics in terms of

readable codes, identify the requirements the barcode labels have to satisfy and define
constraints in terms of label positioning within ACL 9000 instrument.
1.2 Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations
WA Walch Allyn SCANTEAM 3700
Near Distance is the nearest distance that a scanner can accurately digitize a
given bar code.
Far Distance is the farthtest distance that a scanner can accurately digitize a
given bar code.
Scan Width is the length of the widest bar code that can be successfully
interpreted by the scanner.
Quiet Zone is the blank area located just before and just after the bar space
pattern.
12.2 B Instrumentation Laboratory

1.3 References
Ref. 1 SCANTEAM 3700 - Technical Manual - Walch Allyn
The WA is a fixed mount CCD bar code scanner with integrated decoder for easy
integration into host equipment (ACL 9000 family instruments in our case).
The 3700 features Walch Allyns time-proven decoding algorithms in a micro-

processor-controlled bar code scanner/decoder and offers configurable operating
parameters.
The following mean features are available with every WA:
High scan rate per second (100 is the standard)

Flexible scan trigger configurations
Decoder configurable for high security
Scan voting to ensure bar code data integrity
Ease of configuration through RS-322 interface
2.1 Supported Codes and Checksum type
Code Type Checksum Type Data Digits

Code 128 No checksum up to 15
Code 39 Modulus 43 up to 15
No Checksum up to 15
Interleaved 2 of 5 USS - Modulus 10 up to 15
OPCC - Modulus 10 up to 15
No checksum up to 15
Codabar AIM - Modulus 16 with start/stop digits up to 15
NW7 - Modulus 11 up to 15
NW7 - Modulus 16 with start/stop digits up to 15
No Checksum up to 15

Appendix B
2.2 Bar Code Symbol Specifications
All bar code symbols have to satisfy the appropriate AIM Uniform Symbology
Specification. In particular the following characteristics have to considered:
Background substrate
The barcode symbol should be printed on a material type that is reflective and has a
matte (not glossy) finish. A background diffuse reflectance of at least 70% to 80% is
suggested for optimum contrast.
Ink colour and type
The ink type has to be compatible with 660 nm LEDs used in the scanner. The barcode
symbols inked bars should not exceed 10% reflectance at 660 nm that is being used for
reading, whether printed with black ink or coloured ink.
Voids and Specks
The code has to be printed clearly, free of voids, specks, blemishes and lines which
could fool the scanner.
Definition
The bars in the barcode symbols should be well defined. Their edges should not be
rough or fuzzy, so that bar and spaces have the proper widths intended for the used
barcode symbology used. Definition should be sharp and consistent.
Tolerance
The ratio of the widths and spaces in a barcode symbol must conform to the
appropriate AIM barcode specifications and can cause problems if not correct
throughout the barcode. Problems can occur if bar edges are smeared or rough, or
when they exhibit voids.

2.3 Barcode Parameters
Parameters have to be considered in that context are:
Density (bar code): refers to the number of cheracters in a linear inch of bar code.
Ratio: refers to the ratio of the nominal wide element width to the nominal narrow
element width.
In order to ensure a good bar code reading (in addition to what indicated in the 2.2
section) the parameters above mentioned should be as follows:
Density: not less 10 Mils
Ratio: not less 2.5
These values are valid for all the above mentioned bar code types.
The relationship between reading distances, scan width and bar code density are
displayed in the following:
Near Far Distance Scan Width Scan Width Density

Distance (near (far (bar code)
distance) distance)
63.5 mm 114.5 mm 101.6 mm 152.4 mm 7.5 MIL
(161.29) (290.83) (258.064) (387.096)
34.3 mm 130.3 mm 82.3 mm 178.3 mm 13 MIL
(87.122) (330.962) (209.042) (452.882)
In Appendix Decoder Zone Map the attached drawing defines the decoder zone map
for the data above displayed. The displayed graph has been experimentally obtained
from Welch Allyn Laboratories because the WA equipped for the IL requirement has
not a standard optics.

Appendix B
2.4 Barcode Label Positioning
In Appendix Barcode Label Dimension the attached drawing defines the barcode labels
dimensions and identifies constraints in positioning labels on vacutainers. The 13x75
vacutainers have been considered. The proposed barcode labels dimension and
positioning apply to all sample tray models. The following measurements are reported:
Barcode label feature Dimension

Maximum label length (global label size) 52.6 mm (2.071)
Maximum barcode length (printed area) 39.6 mm (1.559)
Quite zone (white area before and after the printed area) 6.35 mm (0.256)
Label position (it is identified as the label edge measured 58 mm (2.283)
starting from the vacutainer lower part)
2.5 Barcode Label Dimensions
Label Length 52.6 mm max (2.071)

Quite Zone Quite Zone
Barcode Length 39.6 mm max (1.559)
6.5 mm (.256) 6.5 mm (.256)
Tube L standard - 13x75 mm Vacutainers
Label position 58 mm (2.283)

Acl9000 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Acl9000 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ACL 9000 Service Manual

P/N 00079990-00 Revision 0 October 2000

Instrumentation Laboratory S.P.A Viale Monza 338 20128 Milano (Italia)

The mechanical components (screws, nuts, washer, etc.) are metric.

1 General Information 1.1

1.1 Product Use 1.2

2 Operator Interface Description 2.1

2.1 Screen Areas and Main Commands Description 2.1

3 General Description 3.1

3.1 Main Fluidic System Description 3.2

4 Parts Replacement 4.1

4.1 Parts Replacement 4.1

5 Installation & Maintenance 5.1

5.1 Installation 5.2

6.1 Error Messages & Troubleshooting 6.1

Instrumentation Laboratory III

7 Check Out & Adjustment 7.1

7.1 Quick Reference Guide to Electronic Adjustment 7.2

7.16 Software Checking & Loading 7.87

8 System Interfacing 8.1

8.1 Keyboard 8.2

9 Parts List 9.1

9.1 Start Up Kit 9.2

11 Service Notes 11.1

A Host Communication Protocol 12.1 A

1.1 Product Use

Instrumentation Laboratory 1.1

1.1 Product Use

1.2 Measured Parameters

PT-FIB (Prothrombin Time and PT-Based Fibrinogen concentration)

ProClot (clotting Protein C)

1.2 Instrumentation Laboratory

1.3 Presentation of Results

Instrumentation Laboratory 1.3

1.4 Instrument Description and Operation

The ACL measures the parameters at 37 oC 1 oC (98.6 oF 1.8 oF), at an ambient

1.4 Instrumentation Laboratory

1.4.1 Main hardware components

1 Wash-R Emulsion 8 Rotor Stack Area

Instrumentation Laboratory 1.5

1.4.2 Sample Tray

1.4.2 Sample Tray

1.6 Instrumentation Laboratory

3 mL Primary tube, 3 or 3.5 mL total volume (13x75 mm)

Instrumentation Laboratory 1.7

Additional Reagents positions

Normally, position A1 is usually reserved for a cup containing calibration plasma

1.4.3 Reagent Area

The reagent area consists of 8 reservoirs labelled R1 to R8 designed to hold reagent

1.8 Instrumentation Laboratory

Grey: for 10 mL vials

Light Blue: for 10 mL vials

Dark Blue: for 4 mL vials

Instrumentation Laboratory 1.9

1.4.4 Rinse/Waste Area

1.4.5 Rotor loading and Analysis Area

1.10 Instrumentation Laboratory

Rotor (reaction cuvettes)

The disposable reaction cuvettes, precision made of UV-transparent acrylic, are

Instrumentation Laboratory 1.11

Rotor Exchange Module (R.E.M.)

1.12 Instrumentation Laboratory